TW201905592A - Photosensitive coloring composition, cured product, colored spacer, and image display device - Google Patents

Photosensitive coloring composition, cured product, colored spacer, and image display device

Info

Publication number
TW201905592A
TW201905592A TW107122683A TW107122683A TW201905592A TW 201905592 A TW201905592 A TW 201905592A TW 107122683 A TW107122683 A TW 107122683A TW 107122683 A TW107122683 A TW 107122683A TW 201905592 A TW201905592 A TW 201905592A
Authority
TW
Taiwan
Prior art keywords
group
ring
mass
less
pigment
Prior art date
Application number
TW107122683A
Other languages
Chinese (zh)
Other versions
TWI768074B (en
Inventor
沢井良尚
裴麗華
伊藤敦哉
大津猛
Original Assignee
日商三菱化學股份有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 日商三菱化學股份有限公司 filed Critical 日商三菱化學股份有限公司
Publication of TW201905592A publication Critical patent/TW201905592A/en
Application granted granted Critical
Publication of TWI768074B publication Critical patent/TWI768074B/en

Links

Classifications

    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C08ORGANIC MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS; THEIR PREPARATION OR CHEMICAL WORKING-UP; COMPOSITIONS BASED THEREON
    • C08GMACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS OBTAINED OTHERWISE THAN BY REACTIONS ONLY INVOLVING UNSATURATED CARBON-TO-CARBON BONDS
    • C08G59/00Polycondensates containing more than one epoxy group per molecule; Macromolecules obtained by polymerising compounds containing more than one epoxy group per molecule using curing agents or catalysts which react with the epoxy groups
    • C08G59/18Macromolecules obtained by polymerising compounds containing more than one epoxy group per molecule using curing agents or catalysts which react with the epoxy groups ; e.g. general methods of curing
    • C08G59/20Macromolecules obtained by polymerising compounds containing more than one epoxy group per molecule using curing agents or catalysts which react with the epoxy groups ; e.g. general methods of curing characterised by the epoxy compounds used
    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02BOPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
    • G02B5/00Optical elements other than lenses
    • G02B5/20Filters
    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02FOPTICAL DEVICES OR ARRANGEMENTS FOR THE CONTROL OF LIGHT BY MODIFICATION OF THE OPTICAL PROPERTIES OF THE MEDIA OF THE ELEMENTS INVOLVED THEREIN; NON-LINEAR OPTICS; FREQUENCY-CHANGING OF LIGHT; OPTICAL LOGIC ELEMENTS; OPTICAL ANALOGUE/DIGITAL CONVERTERS
    • G02F1/00Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics
    • G02F1/01Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics for the control of the intensity, phase, polarisation or colour 
    • G02F1/13Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics for the control of the intensity, phase, polarisation or colour  based on liquid crystals, e.g. single liquid crystal display cells
    • G02F1/133Constructional arrangements; Operation of liquid crystal cells; Circuit arrangements
    • G02F1/1333Constructional arrangements; Manufacturing methods
    • G02F1/1339Gaskets; Spacers; Sealing of cells
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03FPHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
    • G03F7/00Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
    • G03F7/004Photosensitive materials
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03FPHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
    • G03F7/00Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
    • G03F7/004Photosensitive materials
    • G03F7/027Non-macromolecular photopolymerisable compounds having carbon-to-carbon double bonds, e.g. ethylenic compounds
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03FPHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
    • G03F7/00Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
    • G03F7/004Photosensitive materials
    • G03F7/027Non-macromolecular photopolymerisable compounds having carbon-to-carbon double bonds, e.g. ethylenic compounds
    • G03F7/028Non-macromolecular photopolymerisable compounds having carbon-to-carbon double bonds, e.g. ethylenic compounds with photosensitivity-increasing substances, e.g. photoinitiators
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03FPHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
    • G03F7/00Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
    • G03F7/004Photosensitive materials
    • G03F7/09Photosensitive materials characterised by structural details, e.g. supports, auxiliary layers
    • G03F7/105Photosensitive materials characterised by structural details, e.g. supports, auxiliary layers having substances, e.g. indicators, for forming visible images

Landscapes

  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Optics & Photonics (AREA)
  • Nonlinear Science (AREA)
  • Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Mathematical Physics (AREA)
  • Crystallography & Structural Chemistry (AREA)
  • Spectroscopy & Molecular Physics (AREA)
  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Architecture (AREA)
  • Structural Engineering (AREA)
  • Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Chemical Kinetics & Catalysis (AREA)
  • Medicinal Chemistry (AREA)
  • Polymers & Plastics (AREA)
  • Organic Chemistry (AREA)
  • Materials For Photolithography (AREA)
  • Optical Filters (AREA)
  • Liquid Crystal (AREA)

Abstract

Provided are a photosensitive colored composition capable of forming a colored spacer having low light leakage at a wavelength of 400 nm to 500 nm and superior mechanical properties, the colored spacer, and an image display device provided with the colored spacer. One of embodiments of the photosensitive colored composition of the present invention comprises (a) a coloring agent, (b) an alkali soluble resin, (c) a photopolymerization initiator, and (d) an ethylenic unsaturated compound, wherein the content of (a) the coloring agent with respect to total solid content of the photosensitive colored composition is equal to or less than 23 wt%, (a) the coloring agent contains an orange pigment, and the content of the orange pigment with respect to (a) the coloring agent is equal to or more than 45 wt%.

Description

感光性著色組合物、硬化物、著色間隔物、及圖像顯示裝置Photosensitive coloring composition, cured material, colored spacer, and image display device

本發明係關於一種感光性著色組合物等。詳細而言,本發明係關於一種可於例如液晶顯示器等之彩色濾光片中較佳地用於著色間隔物等之形成之感光性著色組合物、將該感光性著色組合物硬化所獲得之硬化物及著色間隔物、具備該著色間隔物之圖像顯示裝置。 將2017年6月30日向日本特許廳提出申請之日本專利特願2017-129366之說明書、專利申請之範圍、圖式及摘要之全部內容、以及本說明書所引用之文獻等所揭示之內容之一部分或全部引用至此,作為本說明書之揭示內容而併入。The present invention relates to a photosensitive coloring composition and the like. Specifically, the present invention relates to a photosensitive coloring composition which can be preferably used for forming a colored spacer in a color filter such as a liquid crystal display, and the like obtained by curing the photosensitive coloring composition. A cured product and a colored spacer, and an image display device including the colored spacer. Part of the contents disclosed in the description of the Japanese Patent Application No. 2017-129366 filed with the Japan Patent Office on June 30, 2017, the scope of the patent application, the drawings and the abstract, and the documents cited in this specification It is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety.

液晶顯示器(LCD)係利用藉由施加至液晶之電壓之導通/斷開而切換液晶分子之排列之性質。另一方面,構成液晶顯示器之單元之各構件多為藉由以光微影法為代表之利用感光性組合物之方法所形成者。基於容易形成微細結構、對大面積基板之處理較容易等理由,今後亦預想將感光性組合物應用於較廣範圍。 又,液晶顯示器所使用之背光裝置因較高之解像度、較低之成本、較薄之外觀尺寸等特徵,現在LED(Light Emitting Diode,發光二極體)背光裝置於移動終端或電視之業界被廣泛採用。Liquid crystal displays (LCDs) use the property of switching the arrangement of liquid crystal molecules by the on / off of a voltage applied to the liquid crystal. On the other hand, many members constituting a unit of a liquid crystal display are formed by a method using a photosensitive composition typified by a photolithography method. For reasons such as easy formation of fine structures and easier handling of large-area substrates, it is expected that the photosensitive composition will be applied to a wide range in the future. In addition, the backlight device used in the liquid crystal display is characterized by higher resolution, lower cost, thinner appearance, and the like. Now LED (Light Emitting Diode) backlight devices are being used in the mobile terminal or television industry. used widely.

最近,為了應對彩色液晶顯示器之進一步高精細、高亮度化,於主動矩陣型液晶顯示器中,提出了將彩色濾光片設置於TFT(Thin Film Transistor,薄膜電晶體)元件基板側之整合式彩色濾光片方式(COA方式)或僅將黑矩陣設置於TFT元件基板側之整合式黑矩陣方式(BOA方式)。根據該方式,與在彩色濾光片側形成黑矩陣之情形相比,無需留存與主動元件側之位置對準範圍,因此可提高開口率,其結果為,可謀求高亮度化。對於此種黑矩陣之結構,要求較高之遮光性或儘量抑制可見光區域之漏光。Recently, in order to cope with further high-definition and high-brightness of color liquid crystal displays, in active matrix liquid crystal displays, an integrated color having a color filter placed on the substrate side of a TFT (Thin Film Transistor) element has been proposed. The filter method (COA method) or the integrated black matrix method (BOA method) in which a black matrix is provided only on the TFT element substrate side. According to this method, as compared with the case where a black matrix is formed on the color filter side, it is not necessary to retain the position alignment range with the active element side, so that the aperture ratio can be increased. As a result, higher brightness can be achieved. For the structure of such a black matrix, a high light-shielding property is required or light leakage in a visible light region is suppressed as much as possible.

又,伴隨液晶顯示器結構及製造步驟之簡化,亦開發有用以將液晶顯示器中之2塊基板之間隔保持為一定之所謂將柱狀間隔物、感光性間隔物及黑矩陣一體化而成之著色間隔物。作為此種著色間隔物,提出有使用複數種有機著色顏料作為顏料之著色間隔物(例如參照專利文獻1及2)。 又,另一方面,如專利文獻3~5般,亦提出有於邊框部之著色間隔物之對向部設置1層或2層以上之彩色濾光層之液晶顯示器。 [先前技術文獻] [專利文獻]In addition, along with the simplification of the structure and manufacturing steps of the liquid crystal display, a so-called integration of a columnar spacer, a photosensitive spacer, and a black matrix, which is useful for maintaining a constant interval between two substrates in the liquid crystal display, has also been developed. Spacer. As such a colored spacer, a colored spacer using a plurality of organic colored pigments as a pigment has been proposed (for example, refer to Patent Documents 1 and 2). On the other hand, as in Patent Documents 3 to 5, a liquid crystal display having a color filter layer with one or two or more layers provided on the facing portion of the colored spacer in the frame portion is also proposed. [Prior Art Literature] [Patent Literature]

[專利文獻1]韓國公開專利第10-2011-0027079號公報 [專利文獻2]國際公開第2013/115268號 [專利文獻3]韓國公開專利第10-2013-0015734號公報 [專利文獻4]韓國公開專利第10-2014-0119912號公報 [專利文獻5]韓國公開專利第10-2017-0017447號公報[Patent Document 1] Korean Published Patent No. 10-2011-0027079 [Patent Document 2] International Publication No. 2013/115268 [Patent Document 3] Korean Published Patent No. 10-2013-0015734 [Patent Document 4] Korea Patent Publication No. 10-2014-0119912 [Patent Document 5] Korean Publication No. 10-2017-0017447

[發明所欲解決之問題][Problems to be solved by the invention]

本發明者等人研究後發現,各種面板結構中,尤其是於具備LED背光裝置之液晶顯示器中,於在邊框部之著色間隔物之對向部設置有藍色之彩色濾光層之結構之情形時,來自LED之藍色光成分容易透過,於使用專利文獻1或2所記載之感光性著色組合物所形成之著色間隔物中,大量產生波長400~500 nm下之漏光。 又,於製造液晶顯示器時,由於經由將具有著色間隔物之基板與對向基板壓接之步驟,因此著色間隔物需具有於壓接步驟中即使因外部壓力而變形、於去除外部壓力之情形時亦會恢復為原來之形狀之特性,即需具有彈性恢復率等機械特性。The inventors of the present invention and others have found that in various panel structures, particularly in a liquid crystal display having an LED backlight device, a structure in which a blue color filter layer is provided on the facing portion of the colored spacer on the frame portion. In this case, the blue light component from the LED is easily transmitted, and in the colored spacer formed using the photosensitive coloring composition described in Patent Document 1 or 2, a large amount of light leakage at a wavelength of 400 to 500 nm occurs. In addition, when manufacturing a liquid crystal display, since the substrate having the colored spacers is pressed to the opposite substrate, the colored spacers must be deformed by the external pressure in the pressure-bonding step and the external pressure may be removed. It will also return to its original shape when it needs to have mechanical properties such as elastic recovery.

本發明係鑒於上述情況而完成者,其目的在於提供一種能夠形成波長400~500 nm下之漏光得以抑制、機械特性優異之著色間隔物之感光性著色組合物。 [解決問題之技術手段]The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a photosensitive coloring composition capable of forming a colored spacer with suppressed light leakage at a wavelength of 400 to 500 nm and excellent mechanical properties. [Technical means to solve the problem]

本發明者等人為了解決上述課題而進行了努力研究,結果發現,藉由使用特定之顏料作為著色劑,將該顏料之含有比率設為特定範圍,且將著色劑之含有比率設為特定範圍,可解決上述課題,從而完成本發明。 即,本發明具有以下之[1]至[11]之構成。The present inventors made diligent research in order to solve the above-mentioned problems, and as a result, found that by using a specific pigment as a colorant, the content ratio of the pigment is set to a specific range, and the content ratio of the colorant is set to a specific range Can solve the above-mentioned problems, thereby completing the present invention. That is, the present invention has the following configurations [1] to [11].

[1]一種感光性著色組合物,其特徵在於:其係含有(a)著色劑、(b)鹼可溶性樹脂、(c)光聚合起始劑、及(d)乙烯性不飽和化合物者,且 於感光性著色組合物之總固形物成分中,上述(a)著色劑之含有比率為23質量%以下, 上述(a)著色劑含有橙色顏料,且 上述(a)著色劑中之上述橙色顏料之含有比率為45質量%以上。 [2]如[1]所記載之感光性著色組合物,其中上述橙色顏料含有選自由C.I.顏料橙13、C.I.顏料橙43、C.I.顏料橙64、及C.I.顏料橙72所組成之群中之至少1種。 [3]如[1]或[2]所記載之感光性著色組合物,其中上述(a)著色劑中之藍色顏料及紫色顏料之含有比率為50質量%以下。[1] A photosensitive coloring composition characterized by comprising (a) a colorant, (b) an alkali-soluble resin, (c) a photopolymerization initiator, and (d) an ethylenically unsaturated compound, In the total solid content of the photosensitive coloring composition, the content ratio of the (a) colorant is 23% by mass or less, the (a) colorant contains an orange pigment, and the orange color in the (a) colorant is The content ratio of the pigment is 45% by mass or more. [2] The photosensitive coloring composition according to [1], wherein the orange pigment contains at least one selected from the group consisting of CI Pigment Orange 13, CI Pigment Orange 43, CI Pigment Orange 64, and CI Pigment Orange 72. 1 species. [3] The photosensitive coloring composition according to [1] or [2], wherein the content ratio of the blue pigment and the purple pigment in the (a) colorant is 50% by mass or less.

[4]如[1]至[3]中任一項所記載之感光性著色組合物,其中上述(a)著色劑進而含有黃色顏料。 [5]如[4]所記載之感光性著色組合物,其中上述黃色顏料含有選自由C.I.顏料黃138、C.I.顏料黃139、及C.I.顏料黃150所組成之群中之至少1種。 [6]如[1]至[5]中任一項所記載之感光性著色組合物,其中於感光性著色組合物之總固形物成分中,上述(a)著色劑之含有比率為1質量%以上。[4] The photosensitive coloring composition according to any one of [1] to [3], wherein the (a) colorant further contains a yellow pigment. [5] The photosensitive coloring composition according to [4], wherein the yellow pigment contains at least one selected from the group consisting of C.I. Pigment Yellow 138, C.I. Pigment Yellow 139, and C.I. Pigment Yellow 150. [6] The photosensitive coloring composition according to any one of [1] to [5], wherein the content ratio of the coloring agent (a) in the total solid content of the photosensitive coloring composition is 1 mass %the above.

[7]如[1]至[6]中任一項所記載之感光性著色組合物,其係用於形成著色間隔物。[7] The photosensitive coloring composition according to any one of [1] to [6], which is used to form a colored spacer.

[8]一種感光性著色組合物,其特徵在於:其係含有(a)著色劑、(b)鹼可溶性樹脂、(c)光聚合起始劑、及(d)乙烯性不飽和化合物者,且 上述感光性著色組合物係用於形成著色間隔物, 於感光性著色組合物之總固形物成分中,上述(a)著色劑之含有比率為23質量%以下,且 xy色度圖中之色度座標(x,y)滿足0.40≦x≦0.55、且0.35≦y≦0.50。 [9]一種硬化物,其係將如[1]至[8]中任一項所記載之感光性著色組合物硬化而獲得者。 [10]一種著色間隔物,其包含如[9]所記載之硬化物。 [11]一種圖像顯示裝置,其具備[10]所記載之著色間隔物。 [發明之效果][8] A photosensitive coloring composition characterized by comprising (a) a colorant, (b) an alkali-soluble resin, (c) a photopolymerization initiator, and (d) an ethylenically unsaturated compound, The photosensitive coloring composition is used to form a colored spacer. In the total solid content of the photosensitive coloring composition, the content ratio of the (a) colorant is 23% by mass or less, and The chromaticity coordinates (x, y) satisfy 0.40 ≦ x ≦ 0.55 and 0.35 ≦ y ≦ 0.50. [9] A cured product obtained by curing the photosensitive coloring composition according to any one of [1] to [8]. [10] A colored spacer comprising the hardened material as described in [9]. [11] An image display device including the colored spacer according to [10]. [Effect of the invention]

根據本發明,可提供一種可形成波長400~500 nm下之漏光得以抑制、機械特性優異之著色間隔物之感光性著色組合物、硬化物、著色間隔物、進而具備此種著色間隔物之圖像顯示裝置。According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a photosensitive coloring composition, a cured product, and a coloring spacer capable of forming a coloring spacer with suppressed light leakage at a wavelength of 400 to 500 nm and excellent mechanical properties, and further includes a drawing having such a coloring spacer. Like display device.

以下,對本發明之實施形態進行具體說明,但本發明並不限定於以下之實施形態,可於其主旨之範圍內進行各種變更而實施。 再者,於本發明中,所謂「(甲基)丙烯酸」意指「丙烯酸及/或甲基丙烯酸」,「(甲基)丙烯酸酯」、「(甲基)丙烯醯基」亦相同。Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described in detail, but the present invention is not limited to the following embodiments, and can be implemented with various changes within the scope of the gist thereof. In the present invention, the term "(meth) acrylic acid" means "acrylic and / or methacrylic acid", and the same applies to "(meth) acrylate" and "(meth) acrylfluorenyl".

所謂「(共)聚合物」意指包括均聚物(homopolymer)與共聚物(copolymer)之兩者,所謂「酸(酐)」、「(無水)…酸」意指包括酸與其酐兩者。又,於本發明中,所謂「丙烯酸系樹脂」意指含有(甲基)丙烯酸之(共)聚合物、含有具有羧基之(甲基)丙烯酸酯之(共)聚合物。The so-called "(co) polymer" means including both homopolymer and copolymer, and the so-called "acid (anhydride)" and "(anhydrous) ... acid" means including both the acid and its anhydride . In the present invention, the "acrylic resin" means a (co) polymer containing (meth) acrylic acid and a (co) polymer containing a (meth) acrylate having a carboxyl group.

又,於本發明中,所謂「單體」係相對於所謂之高分子物質(聚合物)之用語,其含義除了狹義之單體(monomer)以外,亦包括二聚物、三聚物、低聚物等。 於本發明中,所謂「總固形物成分」意指感光性著色組合物中或下文所述之油墨中所含之溶劑以外之全部成分。 於本發明中,所謂「重量平均分子量」係指藉由GPC(凝膠滲透層析法)所獲得之聚苯乙烯換算之重量平均分子量(Mw)。 又,於本發明中,所謂「胺值」,只要無特別說明,則表示有效固形物成分換算之胺值,為每1 g分散劑之固形物成分之鹼量與當量之KOH之質量所表示之值。再者,下文對測定方法進行說明。另一方面,所謂「酸值」,只要無特別說明,則表示有效固形物成分換算之酸值,藉由中和滴定而算出。In the present invention, the term "monomer" refers to a term referring to a so-called high molecular substance (polymer), and its meaning includes dimer, trimer, and Polymer and so on. In the present invention, the "total solid content" means all components other than the solvent contained in the photosensitive coloring composition or the ink described below. In the present invention, the "weight average molecular weight" means a weight average molecular weight (Mw) in terms of polystyrene obtained by GPC (gel permeation chromatography). In the present invention, unless otherwise specified, the "amine value" means an amine value in terms of effective solid content, which is expressed by the mass of alkali and equivalent KOH per 1 g of the solid content of the dispersant. Value. The measurement method is described below. On the other hand, unless otherwise specified, the "acid value" indicates an acid value in terms of effective solid content, and is calculated by neutralization titration.

又,於本說明書中,「質量」所表示之百分率或份與「重量」所表示之百分率或份含義相同。 又,於本說明書中,有時以顏料編號表示顏料之具體例,「C.I.顏料紅2」等用語意指色指數(C.I.)。In addition, in this specification, the percentage or part represented by "mass" has the same meaning as the percentage or part represented by "weight". In the present specification, specific examples of pigments may be represented by pigment numbers, and terms such as "C.I. Pigment Red 2" mean color index (C.I.).

[感光性著色組合物] 本發明之感光性著色組合物含有 (a)著色劑、 (b)鹼可溶性樹脂、 (c)光聚合起始劑、及 (d)乙烯性不飽和化合物 作為必需成分,可視需要而進一步含有矽烷偶合劑等密接改善劑、界面活性劑(塗佈性提高劑)、顏料衍生物、光酸產生劑、交聯劑、巰基化合物、顯影改良劑、紫外線吸收劑、抗氧化劑等其他調配成分,通常各調配成分係以溶解或分散於溶劑中之狀態使用。[Photosensitive coloring composition] The photosensitive coloring composition of the present invention contains (a) a colorant, (b) an alkali-soluble resin, (c) a photopolymerization initiator, and (d) an ethylenically unsaturated compound as essential components. As needed, it may further contain adhesion improving agents such as silane coupling agents, surfactants (coatability improving agents), pigment derivatives, photoacid generators, crosslinking agents, mercapto compounds, development improvers, ultraviolet absorbers, anti- The other formulation ingredients such as an oxidizing agent are usually used in a state of being dissolved or dispersed in a solvent.

本發明之第一態樣之感光性著色組合物中,於感光性著色組合物之總固形物成分中,上述(a)著色劑之含有比率為23質量%以下,上述(a)著色劑含有橙色顏料,且上述(a)著色劑中之上述橙色顏料之含有比率為45質量%以上。In the photosensitive coloring composition of the first aspect of the present invention, in the total solid content of the photosensitive coloring composition, the content ratio of the (a) colorant is 23% by mass or less, and the (a) colorant contains An orange pigment, and the content ratio of the orange pigment in the (a) colorant is 45% by mass or more.

另一方面,本發明之第二態樣之感光性著色組合物係著色間隔物形成用之感光性著色組合物,於感光性著色組合物之總固形物成分中,上述(a)著色劑之含有比率為23質量%以下,且xy色度圖中之色度座標(x,y)滿足0.40≦x≦0.55、且0.35≦y≦0.50。On the other hand, the photosensitive coloring composition of the second aspect of the present invention is a photosensitive coloring composition for forming a colored spacer, and in the total solid content of the photosensitive coloring composition, the above (a) colorant is The content ratio is 23% by mass or less, and the chromaticity coordinates (x, y) in the xy chromaticity diagram satisfy 0.40 ≦ x ≦ 0.55 and 0.35 ≦ y ≦ 0.50.

以下,只要無特別說明,則「本發明之感光性著色組合物」係指上述第一態樣之感光性著色組合物與第二態樣之感光性著色組合物之兩者。Hereinafter, unless otherwise specified, the "photosensitive coloring composition of the present invention" refers to both the above-mentioned photosensitive coloring composition and the second aspect of the photosensitive coloring composition.

<(a)著色劑> 本發明之感光性著色組合物所含之(a)著色劑係將感光性著色組合物進行著色之成分。藉由含有(a)著色劑,可獲得所需之光吸收特性。作為(a)著色劑,可使用顏料,亦可使用染料。<(A) Colorant> The (a) colorant contained in the photosensitive coloring composition of this invention is a component which colors a photosensitive coloring composition. By containing (a) a colorant, desired light absorption characteristics can be obtained. As the (a) colorant, a pigment or a dye may be used.

於第一態樣之本發明之感光性著色組合物中,(a)著色劑含有橙色顏料,且(a)著色劑中之上述橙色顏料之含有比率為45質量%以上。由於橙色顏料於吸收光譜中於波長440~490 nm附近具有吸收波峰之極大波長,因此認為藉由含有橙色顏料,可效率良好地減少波長400~500 nm下之漏光,尤其是藉由將橙色顏料之含有比率設為上述下限值以上,可將該漏光減少為實用上充分之程度。又,橙色顏料於波長500~600 nm吸收帶亦較廣,就容易提高光學密度(OD)之方面而言亦有效。另一方面,由於未達波長400 nm之吸收較少,因此與光聚合起始劑之吸收帶之重合較少,就光硬化性、感度之觀點而言亦有效。In the photosensitive coloring composition of the present invention in a first aspect, (a) the colorant contains an orange pigment, and (a) the content ratio of the orange pigment in the (a) colorant is 45% by mass or more. Since the orange pigment has a maximum wavelength of absorption peak in the absorption spectrum in the vicinity of a wavelength of 440 to 490 nm, it is considered that by containing an orange pigment, light leakage at a wavelength of 400 to 500 nm can be effectively reduced, especially by using an orange pigment The content ratio is set to the above lower limit value or more, and this light leakage can be reduced to a practically sufficient level. In addition, the orange pigment has a wide absorption band at a wavelength of 500 to 600 nm, and is also effective in terms of easily increasing the optical density (OD). On the other hand, since it has less absorption up to the wavelength of 400 nm, it has less overlap with the absorption band of the photopolymerization initiator, and is also effective from the viewpoint of photohardenability and sensitivity.

作為橙色顏料(orange pigment),可列舉:C.I.顏料橙1、2、5、13、16、17、19、20、21、22、23、24、34、36、38、39、43、46、48、49、61、62、64、65、67、68、69、70、71、72、73、74、75、77、78、79。其中,就分散性或遮光性之方面而言,較佳為使用C.I.顏料橙13、43、64、72,於藉由紫外線使感光性著色組合物硬化之情形時,較佳為使用紫外線吸收率較低者作為橙色顏料,就該觀點而言,更佳為使用C.I.顏料橙64、72,尤佳為C.I.顏料橙64。Examples of orange pigments include CI pigment orange 1, 2, 5, 13, 16, 17, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 34, 36, 38, 39, 43, 46, 48, 49, 61, 62, 64, 65, 67, 68, 69, 70, 71, 72, 73, 74, 75, 77, 78, 79. Among them, in terms of dispersibility or light-shielding properties, it is preferable to use CI pigment oranges 13, 43, 64, and 72. When the photosensitive coloring composition is hardened by ultraviolet rays, it is preferable to use ultraviolet absorption rates. The lower one is an orange pigment, and from this viewpoint, the CI pigment orange 64 and 72 are more preferably used, and the CI pigment orange 64 is more preferable.

只要(a)著色劑中之橙色顏料之含有比率為45質量%以上,則無特別限定,就大幅地抑制波長400~500 nm之透過率之觀點而言,較佳為50質量%以上,更佳為60質量%以上,進而較佳為70質量%以上,進而更佳為80質量%以上,尤佳為90質量%以上,最佳為100質量%。 另一方面,就利用橙色顏料以外之著色劑之光學特性、使吸收波段變得更廣之觀點而言,較佳為95質量%以下,更佳為90質量%以下,進而較佳為85質量%以下,尤佳為80質量%以下。作為上限與下限之組合,例如較佳為45~95質量%,更佳為50~90質量%,進而較佳為60~85質量%,尤佳為70~80質量%。As long as the content ratio of the orange pigment in the (a) colorant is 45% by mass or more, it is not particularly limited. From the viewpoint of significantly suppressing the transmittance at a wavelength of 400 to 500 nm, it is preferably 50% by mass or more, more It is preferably 60% by mass or more, more preferably 70% by mass or more, even more preferably 80% by mass or more, even more preferably 90% by mass or more, and most preferably 100% by mass. On the other hand, from the viewpoint of using the optical characteristics of a coloring agent other than an orange pigment to widen the absorption band, it is preferably 95% by mass or less, more preferably 90% by mass or less, and still more preferably 85% by mass. % Or less, particularly preferably 80% by mass or less. The combination of the upper limit and the lower limit is, for example, preferably 45 to 95% by mass, more preferably 50 to 90% by mass, still more preferably 60 to 85% by mass, and even more preferably 70 to 80% by mass.

(a)著色劑可含有橙色顏料以外之著色劑(以下簡記為「其他著色劑」)。作為其他著色劑,可列舉顏料或染料,就耐熱性之觀點而言,較佳為顏料,就色調、光硬化性、感度之觀點而言,較佳為有機顏料。(a) The coloring agent may contain a coloring agent other than an orange pigment (hereinafter referred to as "other coloring agent"). Examples of the other coloring agents include pigments and dyes. From the viewpoint of heat resistance, pigments are preferred, and from the viewpoint of hue, photocurability, and sensitivity, organic pigments are preferred.

作為顏料,可列舉:黃色顏料、紅色顏料、藍色顏料、紫色顏料、綠色顏料、棕色顏料等有機著色顏料。 作為黃色顏料,可列舉:C.I.顏料黃1、1:1、2、3、4、5、6、9、10、12、13、14、16、17、24、31、32、34、35、35:1、36、36:1、37、37:1、40、41、42、43、48、53、55、61、62、62:1、63、65、73、74、75、81、83、87、93、94、95、97、100、101、104、105、108、109、110、111、116、117、119、120、126、127、127:1、128、129、133、134、136、138、139、142、147、148、150、151、153、154、155、157、158、159、160、161、162、163、164、165、166、167、168、169、170、172、173、174、175、176、180、181、182、183、184、185、188、189、190、191、191:1、192、193、194、195、196、197、198、199、200、202、203、204、205、206、207、208。其中,就分散性、可靠性之觀點而言,較佳為C.I.顏料黃83、117、129、138、139、150、154、155、180、185,進而較佳為C.I.顏料黃138、139、150,就遮光性之觀點而言,尤佳為C.I.顏料黃139。Examples of the pigment include organic coloring pigments such as a yellow pigment, a red pigment, a blue pigment, a purple pigment, a green pigment, and a brown pigment. Examples of the yellow pigment include: CI Pigment Yellow 1, 1: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 9, 10, 12, 13, 14, 16, 17, 24, 31, 32, 34, 35, 35: 1, 36, 36: 1, 37, 37: 1, 40, 41, 42, 43, 48, 53, 55, 61, 62, 62: 1, 63, 65, 73, 74, 75, 81, 83, 87, 93, 94, 95, 97, 100, 101, 104, 105, 108, 109, 110, 111, 116, 117, 119, 120, 126, 127, 127: 1, 128, 129, 133, 134, 136, 138, 139, 142, 147, 148, 150, 151, 153, 154, 155, 157, 158, 159, 160, 161, 162, 163, 164, 165, 166, 167, 168, 169, 170, 172, 173, 174, 175, 176, 180, 181, 182, 183, 184, 185, 188, 189, 190, 191, 191: 1, 192, 193, 194, 195, 196, 197, 198, 199, 200, 202, 203, 204, 205, 206, 207, 208. Among these, from the viewpoints of dispersibility and reliability, CI Pigment Yellow 83, 117, 129, 138, 139, 150, 154, 155, 180, 185 is preferable, and CI Pigment Yellow 138, 139, From the viewpoint of light-shielding properties, 150 is particularly preferably CI Pigment Yellow 139.

作為紅色顏料,可列舉:C.I.顏料紅1、2、3、4、5、6、7、8、9、12、14、15、16、17、21、22、23、31、32、37、38、41、47、48、48:1、48:2、48:3、48:4、49、49:1、49:2、50:1、52:1、52:2、53、53:1、53:2、53:3、57、57:1、57:2、58:4、60、63、63:1、63:2、64、64:1、68、69、81、81:1、81:2、81:3、81:4、83、88、90:1、101、101:1、104、108、108:1、109、112、113、114、122、123、144、146、147、149、151、166、168、169、170、172、173、174、175、176、177、178、179、181、184、185、187、188、190、193、194、200、202、206、207、208、209、210、214、216、220、221、224、230、231、232、233、235、236、237、238、239、242、243、245、247、249、250、251、253、254、255、256、257、258、259、260、262、263、264、265、266、267、268、269、270、271、272、273、274、275、276。其中,就遮光性、分散性之觀點而言,較佳可列舉:C.I.顏料紅48:1、122、149、168、177、179、194、202、206、207、209、224、242、254,進而較佳可列舉:C.I.顏料紅177、209、224、254。再者,就分散性或遮光性之方面而言,較佳為使用C.I.顏料紅177、254、272,於藉由紫外線使感光性著色組合物硬化之情形時,較佳為使用紫外線吸收率較低者作為紅色顏料,就該觀點而言,更佳為使用C.I.顏料紅254、272。Examples of the red pigment include CI Pigment Red 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 12, 14, 15, 16, 17, 21, 22, 23, 31, 32, 37, 38, 41, 47, 48, 48: 1, 48: 2, 48: 3, 48: 4, 49, 49: 1, 49: 2, 50: 1, 52: 1, 52: 2, 53, 53: 1, 53: 2, 53: 3, 57, 57: 1, 57: 2, 58: 4, 60, 63, 63: 1, 63: 2, 64, 64: 1, 68, 69, 81, 81: 1, 81: 2, 81: 3, 81: 4, 83, 88, 90: 1, 101, 101: 1, 104, 108, 108: 1, 109, 112, 113, 114, 122, 123, 144, 146, 147, 149, 151, 166, 168, 169, 170, 172, 173, 174, 175, 176, 177, 178, 179, 181, 184, 185, 187, 188, 190, 193, 194, 200, 202, 206, 207, 208, 209, 210, 214, 216, 220, 221, 224, 230, 231, 232, 233, 235, 236, 237, 238, 239, 242, 243, 245, 247, 249, 250, 251, 253, 254, 255, 256, 257, 258, 259, 260, 262, 263, 264, 265, 266, 267, 268, 269, 270, 271, 272, 273, 274, 275, 276. Among them, in terms of light-shielding property and dispersibility, preferably, CI Pigment Red 48: 1, 122, 149, 168, 177, 179, 194, 202, 206, 207, 209, 224, 242, 254 Further preferred examples include CI Pigment Red 177, 209, 224, and 254. In terms of dispersibility or light-shielding properties, it is preferable to use CI Pigment Red 177, 254, and 272. When the photosensitive coloring composition is hardened by ultraviolet rays, it is preferable to use ultraviolet absorption ratios. The lower one is a red pigment, and from this viewpoint, CI pigment reds 254 and 272 are more preferably used.

作為藍色顏料,可列舉:C.I.顏料藍1、1:2、9、14、15、15:1、15:2、15:3、15:4、15:6、16、17、19、25、27、28、29、33、35、36、56、56:1、60、61、61:1、62、63、66、67、68、71、72、73、74、75、76、78、79。其中,就遮光性之觀點而言,較佳可列舉:C.I.顏料藍15、15:1、15:2、15:3、15:4、15:6、16、60,進而較佳可列舉:C.I.顏料藍15:6、16。 再者,就分散性或遮光性之方面而言,較佳為使用C.I.顏料藍15:6、16、60,於藉由紫外線使感光性著色組合物硬化之情形時,較佳為使用紫外線吸收率較低者作為藍色顏料,就該觀點而言,更佳為使用C.I.顏料藍60。另一方面,如韓國註冊專利第10-1840984號公報所記載般,就可靠性、遮光性、彈性恢復率之觀點而言,較佳為使用C.I.顏料藍16。Examples of the blue pigment include CI Pigment Blue 1, 1: 2, 9, 14, 15, 15: 1, 15: 2, 15: 3, 15: 4, 15: 6, 16, 17, 19, 25 , 27, 28, 29, 33, 35, 36, 56, 56: 1, 60, 61, 61: 1, 62, 63, 66, 67, 68, 71, 72, 73, 74, 75, 76, 78 , 79. Among them, from the viewpoint of light-shielding properties, preferably, CI Pigment Blue 15, 15: 1, 15: 2, 15: 3, 15: 4, 15: 6, 16, 60 are mentioned, and further preferably: CI Pigment Blue 15: 6,16. In terms of dispersibility or light-shielding properties, it is preferable to use CI Pigment Blue 15: 6, 16, 60, and when the photosensitive coloring composition is hardened by ultraviolet rays, it is preferable to use ultraviolet absorption. From the standpoint of the lower rate, the blue pigment is more preferably CI Pigment Blue 60. On the other hand, as described in Korean Registered Patent No. 10-1840984, it is preferable to use C.I. Pigment Blue 16 from the viewpoints of reliability, light-shielding properties, and elastic recovery.

作為紫色顏料,可列舉:C.I.顏料紫1、1:1、2、2:2、3、3:1、3:3、5、5:1、14、15、16、19、23、25、27、29、31、32、37、39、42、44、47、49、50。其中,就遮光性之觀點而言,較佳可列舉C.I.顏料紫19、23,進而較佳可列舉C.I.顏料紫23。 另一方面,就分散性之觀點而言,較佳為使用C.I.顏料紫29。Examples of the purple pigment include CI Pigment Violet 1, 1: 1,2, 2: 2, 3, 3: 1, 3: 3, 5, 5: 1, 14, 15, 16, 19, 23, 25, 27, 29, 31, 32, 37, 39, 42, 44, 47, 49, 50. Among these, from the viewpoint of light-shielding properties, C.I. Pigment Violet 19 and 23 are preferred, and C.I. Pigment Violet 23 is more preferred. On the other hand, from the viewpoint of dispersibility, C.I. Pigment Violet 29 is preferably used.

作為綠色顏料,可列舉:C.I.顏料綠1、2、4、7、8、10、13、14、15、17、18、19、26、36、45、48、50、51、54、55、58、59。其中,就分散性之觀點而言,較佳為C.I.顏料綠7、36。Examples of the green pigment include CI Pigment Green 1, 2, 4, 7, 8, 10, 13, 14, 15, 17, 18, 19, 26, 36, 45, 48, 50, 51, 54, 55, 58, 59. Among these, from the viewpoint of dispersibility, C.I. Pigment Green 7, 36 is preferred.

作為棕色顏料(brown pigment),可列舉:C.I.顏料棕23、25、26、28、38、41、83、93。其中,就兼顧近紅外線透過性與遮光性之觀點而言,較佳可列舉C.I.顏料棕26、28、83、93。Examples of brown pigments include C.I. Pigment Brown 23, 25, 26, 28, 38, 41, 83, and 93. Among them, C.I. Pigment Brown 26, 28, 83, and 93 are preferably mentioned from the viewpoint of considering both near-infrared transmittance and light-shielding properties.

該等有機著色顏料中,就於波長400~500 nm附近具有吸收帶之方面而言,較佳為黃色顏料或紅色顏料,更佳為黃色顏料。 於含有黃色顏料之情形時,(a)著色劑中之黃色顏料之含有比率並無特別限定,較佳為1質量%以上,更佳為5質量%以上,進而較佳為10質量%以上,尤佳為20質量%以上,又,較佳為50質量%以下,更佳為40質量%以下,進而較佳為35質量%以下,尤佳為30質量%以下。藉由設為上述下限值以上,有波長400~500 nm之透過率變低之傾向,又,藉由設為上述上限值以下,有光學密度(OD)變高之傾向。作為上限與下限之組合,例如較佳為1~50質量%,更佳為5~50質量%,進而較佳為10~40質量%,進而更佳為20~35質量%,尤佳為20~30質量%。Among these organic coloring pigments, a yellow pigment or a red pigment is preferable, and a yellow pigment is more preferable because it has an absorption band near a wavelength of 400 to 500 nm. When a yellow pigment is contained, the content ratio of the yellow pigment in (a) the colorant is not particularly limited, but is preferably 1% by mass or more, more preferably 5% by mass or more, and further preferably 10% by mass or more. It is particularly preferably 20% by mass or more, more preferably 50% by mass or less, more preferably 40% by mass or less, still more preferably 35% by mass or less, and even more preferably 30% by mass or less. When it is set to the above lower limit value, the transmittance at a wavelength of 400 to 500 nm tends to be low, and when it is set to the above upper limit value, the optical density (OD) tends to be high. The combination of the upper limit and the lower limit is, for example, preferably 1 to 50% by mass, more preferably 5 to 50% by mass, still more preferably 10 to 40% by mass, even more preferably 20 to 35% by mass, and even more preferably 20 -30% by mass.

於含有紅色顏料之情形時,(a)著色劑中之紅色顏料之含有比率並無特別限定,較佳為1質量%以上,更佳為3質量%以上,進而較佳為5質量%以上,尤佳為10質量%以上,又,較佳為40質量%以下,更佳為30質量%以下,進而較佳為20質量%以下,尤佳為15質量%以下。藉由設為上述下限值以上,有光學密度(OD)變高之傾向,又,藉由設為上述上限值以下,有波長400~500 nm之透過率變低之傾向。作為上限與下限之組合,較佳為1~40質量%,更佳為3~30質量%,進而較佳為5~20質量%,進而更佳為5~15質量%,尤佳為10~15質量%。When a red pigment is contained, the content ratio of the red pigment in the (a) colorant is not particularly limited, but it is preferably 1% by mass or more, more preferably 3% by mass or more, and even more preferably 5% by mass or more. It is particularly preferably 10% by mass or more, more preferably 40% by mass or less, more preferably 30% by mass or less, still more preferably 20% by mass or less, and even more preferably 15% by mass or less. When it is at least the above lower limit value, the optical density (OD) tends to be high, and when it is at most the above upper limit value, the transmittance at a wavelength of 400 to 500 nm tends to be low. The combination of the upper limit and the lower limit is preferably 1 to 40% by mass, more preferably 3 to 30% by mass, still more preferably 5 to 20% by mass, still more preferably 5 to 15% by mass, and even more preferably 10 to 15% by mass.

又,就色調之觀點而言,較佳為黃色顏料及紅色顏料以外之有機著色顏料、例如藍色顏料及紫色顏料之含有比率較低。就該觀點而言,(a)著色劑中之藍色顏料及紫色顏料之合計之含有比率較佳為50質量%以下,更佳為40質量%以下,進而較佳為30質量%以下,尤佳為20質量%以下,最佳為0質量%。即,最佳為於(a)著色劑中不含藍色顏料及紫色顏料。From the viewpoint of color tone, it is preferable that the content ratio of organic coloring pigments other than yellow pigments and red pigments, such as blue pigments and purple pigments, be low. From this viewpoint, the total content ratio of the blue pigment and the purple pigment in the (a) colorant is preferably 50% by mass or less, more preferably 40% by mass or less, and further preferably 30% by mass or less, particularly It is preferably 20% by mass or less, and most preferably 0% by mass. That is, it is preferable that the (a) colorant does not contain a blue pigment and a purple pigment.

(a)著色劑中之藍色顏料之含有比率較佳為50質量%以下,更佳為40質量%以下,進而較佳為30質量%以下,尤佳為20質量%以下,最佳為0質量%。藉由設為上述上限值以下,有成為良好之色調之傾向。(a) The content ratio of the blue pigment in the colorant is preferably 50% by mass or less, more preferably 40% by mass or less, still more preferably 30% by mass or less, even more preferably 20% by mass or less, and most preferably 0 quality%. By setting it to be below the above-mentioned upper limit value, there is a tendency to have a good hue.

(a)著色劑中之紫色顏料之含有比率較佳為50質量%以下,更佳為40質量%以下,進而較佳為30質量%以下,尤佳為20質量%以下,最佳為0質量%。藉由設為上述上限值以下,有成為良好之色調之傾向。(a) The content ratio of the purple pigment in the colorant is preferably 50% by mass or less, more preferably 40% by mass or less, still more preferably 30% by mass or less, particularly preferably 20% by mass or less, and most preferably 0% by mass %. By setting it to be below the above-mentioned upper limit value, there is a tendency to have a good hue.

另一方面,就遮光性之觀點而言,亦可含有藍色顏料及/或紫色顏料。於該情形時,(a)著色劑中之藍色顏料及紫色顏料之合計之含有比率較佳為2質量%以上,更佳為5質量%以上,進而較佳為8質量%以上,尤佳為10質量%以上,又,較佳為50質量%以下,更佳為40質量%以下,進而較佳為30質量%以下,進而更佳為20質量%以下,尤佳為15質量%以下。藉由設為上述下限值以上,有光學密度(OD)變高之傾向,藉由設為上述上限值以下,有波長400~500 nm之透過率變低之傾向。作為上限與下限之組合,例如較佳為2~50質量%,更佳為5~40質量%,進而較佳為8~30質量%,進而更佳為10~20質量%,尤佳為10~15質量%。On the other hand, from the viewpoint of light-shielding properties, a blue pigment and / or a purple pigment may be contained. In this case, the total content ratio of the blue pigment and the purple pigment in the (a) colorant is preferably 2% by mass or more, more preferably 5% by mass or more, and further preferably 8% by mass or more, and particularly preferably It is preferably 10% by mass or more, more preferably 50% by mass or less, more preferably 40% by mass or less, still more preferably 30% by mass or less, still more preferably 20% by mass or less, even more preferably 15% by mass or less. When it is more than the said lower limit value, there exists a tendency for optical density (OD) to become high, and when it is less than the said upper limit value, there exists a tendency for the transmittance | permeability of a wavelength of 400-500 nm to fall. The combination of the upper limit and the lower limit is, for example, preferably 2 to 50% by mass, more preferably 5 to 40% by mass, still more preferably 8 to 30% by mass, even more preferably 10 to 20% by mass, and even more preferably 10 -15% by mass.

又,作為其他著色劑,亦可含有黑色顏料。作為黑色顏料,可列舉有機黑色顏料或無機黑色顏料。作為有機黑色顏料,例如可列舉含有選自由下述式(1)所表示之化合物、上述化合物之幾何異構物、上述化合物之鹽、及上述化合物之幾何異構物之鹽所組成之群中的至少1種之有機黑色顏料。As another colorant, a black pigment may be contained. Examples of the black pigment include organic black pigments and inorganic black pigments. Examples of the organic black pigment include a group selected from the group consisting of a compound represented by the following formula (1), a geometric isomer of the compound, a salt of the compound, and a salt of the geometric isomer of the compound. At least 1 kind of organic black pigment.

[化1] [Chemical 1]

式(1)中,R1 及R6 分別獨立為氫原子、CH3 、CF3 、氟原子或氯原子; R2 、R3 、R4 、R5 、R7 、R8 、R9 及R10 分別獨立為氫原子、鹵素原子、R11 、COOH、COOR11 、COO- 、CONH2 、CONHR11 、CONR11 R12 、CN、OH、OR11 、COCR11 、OOCNH2 、OOCNHR11 、OOCNR11 R12 、NO2 、NH2 、NHR11 、NR11 R12 、NHCOR12 、NR11 COR12 、N=CH2 、N=CHR11 、N=CR11 R12 、SH、SR11 、SOR11 、SO2 R11 、SO3 R11 、SO3 H、SO3 - 、SO2 NH2 、SO2 NHR11 或SO2 NR11 R12 ; 且選自由R2 與R3 、R3 與R4 、R4 與R5 、R7 與R8 、R8 與R9 、及R9 與R10 所組成之群中之至少1種組合可互相直接鍵結,或者利用氧原子、硫原子、NH或NR11 橋而互相鍵結; R11 及R12 分別獨立為碳數1~12之烷基、碳數3~12之環烷基、碳數2~12之烯基、碳數3~12之環烯基或碳數2~12之炔基。In formula (1), R 1 and R 6 are each independently a hydrogen atom, CH 3 , CF 3 , fluorine atom, or chlorine atom; R 2 , R 3 , R 4 , R 5 , R 7 , R 8 , R 9 and R 10 is independently a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, R 11, COOH, COOR 11 , COO -, CONH 2, CONHR 11, CONR 11 R 12, CN, OH, OR 11, COCR 11, OOCNH 2, OOCNHR 11, OOCNR 11 R 12 , NO 2 , NH 2 , NHR 11 , NR 11 R 12 , NHCOR 12 , NR 11 COR 12 , N = CH 2 , N = CHR 11 , N = CR 11 R 12 , SH, SR 11 , SOR 11 , SO 2 R 11, SO 3 R 11, SO 3 H, SO 3 -, SO 2 NH 2, SO 2 NHR 11 or SO 2 NR 11 R 12; and selected from the group consisting of R 2 and R 3, R 3 and R 4 At least one combination of R 4 and R 5 , R 7 and R 8 , R 8 and R 9 , and R 9 and R 10 may be directly bonded to each other, or an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom, NH Or NR 11 bridged and bonded to each other; R 11 and R 12 are each independently an alkyl group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms, a cycloalkyl group having 3 to 12 carbon atoms, an alkenyl group having 2 to 12 carbon atoms, and 3 to 12 carbon atoms A cycloalkenyl group or an alkynyl group having 2 to 12 carbon atoms.

通式(1)所表示之化合物之幾何異構物具有以下之核結構(其中省略結構式中之取代基),很可能最穩定的是反-反異構物。The geometric isomer of the compound represented by the general formula (1) has the following nuclear structure (where the substituents in the structural formula are omitted), and it is likely that the most stable is the trans-trans isomer.

[化2] [Chemical 2]

於通式(1)所表示之化合物為陰離子性之情形時,較佳為藉由任意公知之合適之陽離子,例如金屬、有機、無機或金屬有機陽離子,具體而言為鹼金屬、鹼土金屬、過渡金屬、一級銨、二級銨、三烷基銨等三級銨、四烷基銨等四級銨或有機金屬錯合物補償其電荷而成之鹽。又,於通式(1)所表示之化合物之幾何異構物為陰離子性之情形時,較佳為同樣之鹽。In the case where the compound represented by the general formula (1) is anionic, it is preferred to use any known suitable cation, such as a metal, organic, inorganic or metal organic cation, specifically an alkali metal, alkaline earth metal, Transition metal, primary ammonium, secondary ammonium, trialkylammonium and other tertiary ammonium, tetraalkylammonium and other quaternary ammonium or organometallic complexes to compensate their charges. When the geometric isomer of the compound represented by the general formula (1) is anionic, the same salt is preferred.

於通式(1)之取代基及該等之定義中,由於有遮蔽率變高之傾向,因此較佳為以下。其原因在於認為以下之取代基無吸收,不會對顏料之色相產生影響。 R2 、R4 、R5 、R7 、R9 及R10 分別獨立,較佳為氫原子、氟原子、或氯原子,進而較佳為氫原子。 R3 及R8 分別獨立,較佳為氫原子、NO2 、OCH3 、OC2 H5 、溴原子、氯原子、CH3 、C2 H5 、N(CH3 )2 、N(CH3 )(C2 H5 )、N(C2 H5 )2 、α-萘基、β-萘基、SO3 H或SO3 - ,進而較佳為氫原子或SO3 H。Among the substituents of the general formula (1) and the definitions of these, the masking rate tends to be high, so the following are preferred. The reason is that the following substituents are considered non-absorptive and do not affect the hue of the pigment. R 2 , R 4 , R 5 , R 7 , R 9 and R 10 are each independently, preferably a hydrogen atom, a fluorine atom, or a chlorine atom, and further preferably a hydrogen atom. R 3 and R 8 are each independently, preferably hydrogen atom, NO 2 , OCH 3 , OC 2 H 5 , bromine atom, chlorine atom, CH 3 , C 2 H 5 , N (CH 3 ) 2 , N (CH 3 ) (C 2 H 5), N (C 2 H 5) 2, α- naphthyl, β- naphthyl group, SO 3 H or SO 3 -, further preferably a hydrogen atom or SO 3 H.

R1 及R6 分別獨立,較佳為氫原子、CH3 或CF3 ,進而較佳為氫原子。 較佳為選自由R1 與R6 、R2 與R7 、R3 與R8 、R4 與R9 、及R5 與R10 所組成之群中之至少1種組合相同,更佳為R1 與R6 相同,R2 與R7 相同,R3 與R8 相同,R4 與R9 相同,且R5 與R10 相同。R 1 and R 6 are each independently, preferably a hydrogen atom, CH 3 or CF 3 , and more preferably a hydrogen atom. Preferably, at least one combination selected from the group consisting of R 1 and R 6 , R 2 and R 7 , R 3 and R 8 , R 4 and R 9 , and R 5 and R 10 is the same, more preferably R 1 is the same as R 6 , R 2 is the same as R 7 , R 3 is the same as R 8 , R 4 is the same as R 9 , and R 5 is the same as R 10 .

碳數1~12之烷基例如為:甲基、乙基、正丙基、異丙基、正丁基、第二丁基、異丁基、第三丁基、2-甲基丁基、正戊基、2-戊基、3-戊基、2,2-二甲基丙基、正己基、庚基、正辛基、1,1,3,3-四甲基丁基、2-乙基己基、壬基、癸基、十一烷基或十二烷基。Examples of the alkyl group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms include methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, isopropyl, n-butyl, second butyl, isobutyl, third butyl, 2-methylbutyl, N-pentyl, 2-pentyl, 3-pentyl, 2,2-dimethylpropyl, n-hexyl, heptyl, n-octyl, 1,1,3,3-tetramethylbutyl, 2- Ethylhexyl, nonyl, decyl, undecyl or dodecyl.

碳數3~12之環烷基例如為:環丙基、環丙基甲基、環丁基、環戊基、環己基、環己基甲基、三甲基環己基、側柏基(thujyl)、降基、基、降蒈基(norcaryl)、蒈基、䓝基、降蒎基(norpinyl)、蒎基、1-金剛烷基或2-金剛烷基。Cycloalkyl groups having 3 to 12 carbon atoms are, for example, cyclopropyl, cyclopropylmethyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl, cyclohexylmethyl, trimethylcyclohexyl, thujyl , Norbornyl, base, norcaryl, fluorenyl, fluorenyl, norpinyl, fluorenyl, 1-adamantyl, or 2-adamantyl.

碳數2~12之烯基例如為:乙烯基、烯丙基、2-丙烯-2-基、2-丁烯-1-基、3-丁烯-1-基、1,3-丁二烯-2-基、2-戊烯-1-基、3-戊烯-2-基、2-䓝基-1-丁烯-3-基、2-甲基-3-丁烯-2-基、3-甲基-2-丁烯-1-基、1,4-戊二烯-3-基、己烯基、辛烯基、壬烯基、癸烯基或十二碳烯基。Alkenyl groups having 2 to 12 carbon atoms are, for example, vinyl, allyl, 2-propen-2-yl, 2-buten-1-yl, 3-buten-1-yl, 1,3-butane Alken-2-yl, 2-penten-1-yl, 3-penten-2-yl, 2-fluorenyl-1-buten-3-yl, 2-methyl-3-butene-2- Radical, 3-methyl-2-buten-1-yl, 1,4-pentadien-3-yl, hexenyl, octenyl, nonenyl, decenyl or dodecenyl.

碳數3~12之環烯基例如為:2-環丁烯-1-基、2-環戊烯-1-基、2-環己烯-1-基、3-環己烯-1-基、2,4-環己二烯-1-基、1-對䓝烯-8-基、4(10)-側柏烯-10-基、2-降烯-1-基、2,5-降二烯-1-基、7,7-二甲基-2,4-降蒈二烯-3-基或烯基(camphenyl)。The cycloalkenyl group having 3 to 12 carbon atoms is, for example, 2-cyclobuten-1-yl, 2-cyclopenten-1-yl, 2-cyclohexen-1-yl, 3-cyclohexene-1- Base, 2,4-cyclohexadiene-1-yl, 1-p-pinene-8-yl, 4 (10) -pawnene-10-yl, 2-noren-1-yl, 2,5 -Nordien-1-yl, 7,7-dimethyl-2,4-norbornadien-3-yl or camphenyl.

碳數2~12之炔基例如為:1-丙炔-3-基、1-丁炔-4-基、1-戊炔-5-基、2-甲基-3-丁炔-2-基、1,4-戊二炔-3-基、1,3-戊二炔-5-基、1-己炔-6-基、順-3-甲基-2-戊烯-4-炔-1-基、反-3-甲基-2-戊烯-4-炔-1-基、1,3-己二炔-5-基、1-辛炔-8-基、1-壬炔-9-基、1-癸炔-10-基或1-十二碳炔-12-基。Examples of alkynyl groups having 2 to 12 carbon atoms are 1-propyn-3-yl, 1-butyn-4-yl, 1-pentyn-5-yl, and 2-methyl-3-butyn-2- , 1,4-pentadiyn-3-yl, 1,3-pentadiyn-5-yl, 1-hexyne-6-yl, cis-3-methyl-2-pentene-4-yne -1-yl, trans-3-methyl-2-pentene-4-yn-1-yl, 1,3-hexadiyn-5-yl, 1-octyne-8-yl, 1-nonyne -9-yl, 1-decyne-10-yl or 1-dodecyne-12-yl.

鹵素原子例如為:氟原子、氯原子、溴原子或碘原子。The halogen atom is, for example, a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, a bromine atom, or an iodine atom.

上述有機黑色顏料較佳為下述通式(2)所表示之化合物及/或上述化合物之幾何異構物,更佳為下述通式(2)所表示之化合物。The organic black pigment is preferably a compound represented by the following general formula (2) and / or a geometric isomer of the compound, and more preferably a compound represented by the following general formula (2).

[化3] [Chemical 3]

作為此種有機黑色顏料之具體例,可列舉商品名如下者:Irgaphor(註冊商標) Black S 0100 CF(BASF公司製造)。 該有機黑色顏料較佳為藉由下文所述之分散劑、溶劑、方法使其分散而使用。又,於分散時若存在上述通式(1)所表示之化合物之磺酸衍生物或上述化合物之磺酸衍生物、尤其是上述通式(2)所表示之化合物之磺酸衍生物或上述化合物之幾何異構物之磺酸衍生物,則存在提高分散性或保存性之情形。 又,作為有機黑色顏料,就光學特性與可靠性之觀點而言,較佳為使用韓國公開專利第10-2018-0052502號公報所記載之有機黑色顏料、或韓國公開專利第10-2018-0052864號公報所記載之有機黑色顏料。As a specific example of such an organic black pigment, the trade name is Irgaphor (registered trademark) Black S 0100 CF (manufactured by BASF). The organic black pigment is preferably used by being dispersed by a dispersant, a solvent, and a method described below. In addition, if a sulfonic acid derivative of the compound represented by the general formula (1) or a sulfonic acid derivative of the compound, particularly a sulfonic acid derivative of the compound represented by the general formula (2), or the above is present during dispersion. The sulfonic acid derivative of the geometrical isomer of the compound may improve dispersibility or preservation. As the organic black pigment, in terms of optical characteristics and reliability, it is preferable to use the organic black pigment described in Korean Laid-Open Patent No. 10-2018-0052502 or Korean Laid-Open Patent No. 10-2018-0052864. The organic black pigment described in the publication.

又,作為其他有機黑色顏料,亦可列舉:苯胺黑、花青黑、苝黑等。又,亦可使用作為無機黑色顏料之碳黑。作為碳黑之例,可列舉如以下之碳黑。Examples of other organic black pigments include aniline black, cyanine black, and black. Carbon black, which is an inorganic black pigment, can also be used. Examples of the carbon black include the following carbon blacks.

三菱化學公司製造:MA7、MA8、MA11、MA77、MA100、MA100R、MA100S、MA220、MA230、MA600、MCF88、#5、#10、#20、#25、#30、#32、#33、#40、#44、#45、#47、#50、#52、#55、#650、#750、#850、#900、#950、#960、#970、#980、#990、#1000、#2200、#2300、#2350、#2400、#2600、#2650、#3030、#3050、#3150、#3250、#3400、#3600、#3750、#3950、#4000、#4010、OIL7B、OIL9B、OIL11B、OIL30B、OIL31B Degussa公司製造:Printex(註冊商標,以下相同)3、Printex3OP、Printex30、Printex30OP、Printex40、Printex45、Printex55、Printex60、Printex75、Printex80、Printex85、Printex90、Printex A、Printex L、Printex G、Printex P、Printex U、Printex V、SpecialBlack550、SpecialBlack350、SpecialBlack250、SpecialBlack100、SpecialBlack6、SpecialBlack5、SpecialBlack4、Color Black FW1、Color Black FW2、Color Black FW2V、Color Black FW18、Color Black FW200、Color Black S160、Color Black S170 Cabot公司製造:Monarch(註冊商標,以下相同)120、Monarch280、Monarch460、Monarch800、Monarch880、Monarch900、Monarch1000、Monarch1100、Monarch1300、Monarch1400、Monarch4630、REGAL(註冊商標,以下相同)99、REGAL99R、REGAL415、REGAL415R、REGAL250、REGAL250R、REGAL330、REGAL400R、REGAL55R0、REGAL660R、BLACK PEARLS480、PEARLS130、VULCAN(註冊商標) XC72R、ELFTEX(註冊商標)-8 Birla公司製造:RAVEN(註冊商標,以下相同)11、RAVEN14、RAVEN15、RAVEN16、RAVEN22RAVEN30、RAVEN35、RAVEN40、RAVEN410、RAVEN420、RAVEN450、RAVEN500、RAVEN780、RAVEN850、RAVEN890H、RAVEN1000、RAVEN1020、RAVEN1040、RAVEN1060U、RAVEN1080U、RAVEN1170、RAVEN1190U、RAVEN1250、RAVEN1500、RAVEN2000、RAVEN2500U、RAVEN3500、RAVEN5000、RAVEN5250、RAVEN5750、RAVEN7000Manufactured by Mitsubishi Chemical Corporation: MA7, MA8, MA11, MA77, MA100, MA100R, MA100S, MA220, MA230, MA600, MCF88, # 5, # 10, # 20, # 25, # 30, # 32, # 33, # 40 # 44, # 45, # 47, # 50, # 52, # 55, # 650, # 750, # 850, # 900, # 950, # 960, # 970, # 980, # 990, # 1000, # 2200, # 2300, # 2350, # 2400, # 2600, # 2650, # 3030, # 3050, # 3150, # 3250, # 3400, # 3600, # 3750, # 3950, # 4000, # 4010, OIL7B, OIL9B , OIL11B, OIL30B, OIL31B Degussa company: Printex (registered trademark, the same below) 3, Printex3OP, Printex30, Printex30OP, Printex40, Printex45, Printex55, Printex60, Printex75, Printex80, Printex85, Printex90, Printex A, Printex L, Printex G , Printex P, Printex U, Printex V, SpecialBlack550, SpecialBlack350, SpecialBlack250, SpecialBlack100, SpecialBlack6, SpecialBlack5, SpecialBlack4, Color Black FW1, Color Black FW2, Color Black FW2V, Color Black FW18, Color Black FW200, Color Black S160, Color Black S170 Cabot Corporation: Monarch (registered trademark, Same below) 120, Monarch280, Monarch460, Monarch800, Monarch880, Monarch900, Monarch1000, Monarch1100, Monarch1300, Monarch1400, Monarch4630, REGAL (registered trademark, the same below) 99, REGAL99R, REGAL415, REGAL415R, REGAL250, REGAL250R, REGAL330, REGAL400R, REGAL55R0 , REGAL660R, BLACK PEARLS480, PEARLS130, VULCAN (registered trademark) XC72R, ELFTEX (registered trademark) -8 Made by Birla: RAVEN (registered trademark, the same below) 11, RAVEN14, RAVEN15, RAVEN16, RAVEN22RAVEN30, RAVEN35, RAVEN40, RAVEN410, RAVEN420, RAVEN450, RAVEN500, RAVEN780, RAVEN850, RAVEN890H, RAVEN1000, RAVEN1020, RAVEN1040, RAVEN1060U, RAVEN1080U, RAVEN1170, RAVEN1190U, RAVEN1250, RAVEN1500, RAVEN2000, RAVEN2500U, RAVEN3500, RAVEN5000, RAVEN5250, RAVEN5750

碳黑亦可使用由樹脂被覆者。若使用由樹脂被覆之碳黑,則具有提高對玻璃基板之密接性或體積電阻值之效果。作為由樹脂被覆之碳黑,例如可適宜地使用日本專利特開平09-71733號公報所記載之碳黑等。就體積電阻或介電常數之方面而言,可適宜地使用樹脂被覆碳黑。Carbon black can also be used as a resin coating. If carbon black coated with a resin is used, it has the effect of improving the adhesion to the glass substrate or the volume resistance value. As the carbon black coated with a resin, for example, the carbon black described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 09-71733 can be suitably used. In terms of volume resistance or dielectric constant, resin-coated carbon black can be suitably used.

該等顏料較佳為以平均粒徑通常成為1 μm以下、較佳為0.5 μm以下、進而較佳為0.25 μm以下之方式分散而使用。此處,平均粒徑之基準為顏料粒子之個數。 再者,於感光性著色組合物中,顏料之平均粒徑係根據藉由動態光散射(Dynamic Light Scattering,DLS)測得之顏料粒徑求出之值。粒徑測定係對經充分稀釋之感光性著色組合物(通常進行稀釋而製備為顏料濃度0.005~0.2質量%左右。但若有測定機器推薦之濃度,則按照該濃度)進行,於25℃下進行測定。These pigments are preferably used in such a manner that the average particle diameter is usually 1 μm or less, preferably 0.5 μm or less, and more preferably 0.25 μm or less. Here, the standard of the average particle diameter is the number of pigment particles. In addition, in the photosensitive coloring composition, the average particle diameter of a pigment is a value calculated | required from the particle diameter of the pigment measured by Dynamic Light Scattering (DLS). The particle size measurement is performed on a sufficiently diluted photosensitive coloring composition (usually diluted to prepare a pigment concentration of about 0.005 to 0.2% by mass. However, if a concentration recommended by a measuring device is available, the concentration is determined according to this concentration) at 25 ° C. Perform the measurement.

又,作為其他著色劑,除了上述顏料以外,亦可使用染料。作為可用作其他著色劑之染料,可列舉:偶氮系染料、蒽醌系染料、酞菁系染料、醌亞胺系染料、喹啉系染料、硝基系染料、羰基系染料、次甲基系染料等。 作為偶氮系染料,例如可列舉:C.I.酸性黃11、C.I.酸性橙7、C.I.酸性紅37、C.I.酸性紅180、C.I.酸性藍29、C.I.直接紅28、C.I.直接紅83、C.I.直接黃12、C.I.直接橙26、C.I.直接綠28、C.I.直接綠59、C.I.反應性黃2、C.I.反應性紅17、C.I.反應性紅120、C.I.反應性黑5、C.I.分散橙5、C.I.分散紅58、C.I.分散藍165、C.I.鹼性藍41、C.I.鹼性紅18、C.I.媒染紅7、C.I.媒染黃5、C.I.媒染黑7等。Moreover, as another coloring agent, in addition to the said pigment, a dye can also be used. Examples of dyes that can be used as other colorants include azo dyes, anthraquinone dyes, phthalocyanine dyes, quinimine dyes, quinoline dyes, nitro dyes, carbonyl dyes, and methylene chloride. Basic dyes and so on. Examples of the azo dye include: CI Acid Yellow 11, CI Acid Orange 7, CI Acid Red 37, CI Acid Red 180, CI Acid Blue 29, CI Direct Red 28, CI Direct Red 83, CI Direct Yellow 12, CI Direct Orange 26, CI Direct Green 28, CI Direct Green 59, CI Reactive Yellow 2, CI Reactive Red 17, CI Reactive Red 120, CI Reactive Black 5, CI Disperse Orange 5, CI Disperse Red 58, CI Disperse Blue 165, CI Basic Blue 41, CI Basic Red 18, CI Mordant Red 7, CI Mordant Yellow 5, CI Mordant Black 7, and the like.

作為蒽醌系染料,例如可列舉:C.I.還原藍4、C.I.酸性藍40、C.I.酸性綠25、C.I.反應性藍19、C.I.反應性藍49、C.I.分散紅60、C.I.分散藍56、C.I.分散藍60等。 除此以外,作為酞菁系染料,例如可列舉C.I.Pad Blue5等,作為醌亞胺系染料,例如可列舉C.I.鹼性藍3、C.I.鹼性藍9等,作為喹啉系染料,例如可列舉C.I.溶劑黃33、C.I.酸性黃3、C.I.分散黃64等,作為硝基系染料,例如可列舉C.I.酸性黃1、C.I.酸性橙3、C.I.分散黃42等。Examples of the anthraquinone dye include CI reduction blue 4, CI acid blue 40, CI acid green 25, CI reactive blue 19, CI reactive blue 49, CI disperse red 60, CI disperse blue 56, CI disperse blue 60 and so on. In addition, examples of the phthalocyanine dyes include Cipad Blue 5 and the like, and examples of quinone imine dyes include CI Basic Blue 3 and CI Basic Blue 9. Examples of the quinoline dyes include CI solvent yellow 33, CI acid yellow 3, CI disperse yellow 64, and the like. Examples of the nitro dye include CI acid yellow 1, CI acid orange 3, CI disperse yellow 42 and the like.

另一方面,於第二態樣之本發明之感光性著色組合物中,(a)著色劑只要為可製成下文所述之xy色度圖中之色度座標(x,y)滿足0.40≦x≦0.55、且0.35≦y≦0.50之感光性著色組合物之著色劑或著色劑之組合,則無特別限定。On the other hand, in the photosensitive coloring composition of the present invention in the second aspect, as long as (a) the colorant can be made into the chromaticity coordinates (x, y) of the xy chromaticity diagram described below, 0.40 is satisfied. The coloring agent or a combination of coloring agents of the photosensitive coloring composition of ≦ x ≦ 0.55 and 0.35 ≦ y ≦ 0.50 is not particularly limited.

例如,可列舉使用紅色顏料與黃色顏料作為(a)著色劑,以色度座標(x,y)滿足上述範圍之方式調整其含有比率。又,亦可列舉:紅色顏料、黃色顏料及紫色顏料之組合;棕色顏料與黃色顏料之組合;棕色顏料、黃色顏料及紫色顏料之組合;橙色顏料與黃色顏料之組合;橙色顏料與紅色顏料之組合;橙色顏料、黃色顏料及紅色顏料之組合;橙色顏料與紫色顏料之組合;橙色顏料與藍色顏料之組合;橙色顏料、藍色顏料及紫色顏料之組合。又,亦可應用上述第一態樣中所列舉者。For example, a red pigment and a yellow pigment are used as the (a) colorant, and the content ratio is adjusted so that the chromaticity coordinates (x, y) satisfy the above range. Also include: a combination of red, yellow, and purple pigments; a combination of brown and yellow pigments; a combination of brown, yellow, and purple pigments; a combination of orange and yellow pigments; a combination of orange and red pigments Combination; combination of orange pigment, yellow pigment and red pigment; combination of orange pigment and purple pigment; combination of orange pigment and blue pigment; combination of orange pigment, blue pigment and purple pigment. Also, those listed in the first aspect may be applied.

將色度座標(x,y)滿足上述範圍之顏料種類及其含有比率之具體例與各具體例中之色度座標(x,y)之值示於表1。再者,表中之顏料之含有比率係感光性著色組合物之總固形物成分中之值。Table 1 shows specific examples of pigment types whose chromaticity coordinates (x, y) satisfy the above range and their content ratios, and the values of the chromaticity coordinates (x, y) in each specific example. In addition, the content ratio of the pigment in a table | surface is a value in the total solid content of a photosensitive coloring composition.

[表1] [Table 1]

表1中之簡稱係如以下所述。 Y139:C.I.顏料黃139 R254:C.I.顏料紅254 Br41:C.I.顏料棕41The abbreviations in Table 1 are as follows. Y139: C.I. Pigment Yellow 139 R254: C.I. Pigment Red 254 Br41: C.I. Pigment Brown 41

<(b)鹼可溶性樹脂> 作為本發明所使用之(b)鹼可溶性樹脂,只要為含有羧基或羥基之樹脂,則無特別限定,例如可列舉環氧(甲基)丙烯酸酯系樹脂、丙烯酸系樹脂、含羧基之環氧樹脂、含羧基之胺基甲酸酯樹脂、酚醛清漆系樹脂、聚乙烯基酚系樹脂等,其中,就優異之製版性之觀點而言,可適宜地使用 (b1)環氧(甲基)丙烯酸酯系樹脂 (b2)丙烯酸系樹脂。 該等可單獨使用一種,或可混合使用複數種。<(B) Alkali-soluble resin> The (b) alkali-soluble resin used in the present invention is not particularly limited as long as it is a resin containing a carboxyl group or a hydroxyl group, and examples thereof include epoxy (meth) acrylate resins and acrylic acid. Based resins, carboxyl group-containing epoxy resins, carboxyl group-containing urethane resins, novolac resins, polyvinyl phenol resins, and the like, among them, from the viewpoint of excellent plate-making properties, they can be suitably used ( b1) epoxy (meth) acrylate resin (b2) acrylic resin. These may be used singly or in combination of plural kinds.

<(b1)環氧(甲基)丙烯酸酯系樹脂> (b1)環氧(甲基)丙烯酸酯系樹脂係使環氧樹脂(環氧化合物)與α,β-不飽和單羧酸及/或具有羧基之α,β-不飽和單羧酸酯之反應物的由反應生成之羥基進而與多元酸、及/或其酐進行反應所獲得之樹脂。 又,於使上述多元酸及/或其酐與羥基進行反應前,使其與具有2個以上之可與該羥基進行反應之取代基的化合物進行反應後與多元酸及/或其酐進行反應所獲得之樹脂亦包含於上述(b1)環氧(甲基)丙烯酸酯系樹脂中。<(B1) Epoxy (meth) acrylate resin> (b1) Epoxy (meth) acrylate resin is based on epoxy resin (epoxy compound), α, β-unsaturated monocarboxylic acid, and / Or a resin obtained by reacting a hydroxyl group formed by a reaction of an α, β-unsaturated monocarboxylic acid ester having a carboxyl group with a polybasic acid and / or an anhydride thereof. Before reacting the polybasic acid and / or its anhydride with a hydroxyl group, it is reacted with a compound having two or more substituents capable of reacting with the hydroxyl group, and then reacted with the polybasic acid and / or its anhydride. The obtained resin is also included in the (b1) epoxy (meth) acrylate resin.

又,使上述反應中獲得之樹脂之羧基進而與具有可反應之官能基之化合物進行反應所獲得之樹脂亦包含於上述(b1)環氧(甲基)丙烯酸酯系樹脂中。 如上所述,環氧(甲基)丙烯酸酯系樹脂於化學結構上實質上不具有環氧基,且並不限定於「(甲基)丙烯酸酯」,由於環氧化合物(環氧樹脂)為原料,且「(甲基)丙烯酸酯」為代表例,因此依照慣用而如此命名。The resin obtained by reacting the carboxyl group of the resin obtained in the above reaction with a compound having a reactive functional group is also included in the (b1) epoxy (meth) acrylate resin. As described above, the epoxy (meth) acrylate resin does not substantially have an epoxy group in the chemical structure, and is not limited to "(meth) acrylate". Since the epoxy compound (epoxy resin) is Raw materials, and "(meth) acrylate" is a representative example, so it is named as usual.

作為本發明所使用之(b1)環氧(甲基)丙烯酸酯系樹脂,具體而言,就顯影性、可靠性之觀點而言,可適宜地使用下述環氧(甲基)丙烯酸酯系樹脂(b1-1)及/或環氧(甲基)丙烯酸酯系樹脂(b1-2)(以下有時稱為「含羧基之環氧(甲基)丙烯酸酯系樹脂」)。As the (b1) epoxy (meth) acrylate-based resin used in the present invention, specifically, from the viewpoint of developability and reliability, the following epoxy (meth) acrylate-based resins can be suitably used. Resin (b1-1) and / or epoxy (meth) acrylate resin (b1-2) (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "carboxyl-containing epoxy (meth) acrylate resin").

<環氧(甲基)丙烯酸酯系樹脂(b1-1)> 藉由對環氧樹脂加成α,β-不飽和單羧酸及/或具有羧基之α,β-不飽和單羧酸酯,進而與多元酸及/或其酐進行反應所獲得之鹼可溶性樹脂。 <環氧(甲基)丙烯酸酯系樹脂鹼可溶性樹脂(b1-2)> 藉由對環氧樹脂加成α,β-不飽和單羧酸及/或具有羧基之α,β-不飽和單羧酸酯,進而與多元醇、以及多元酸及/或其酐進行反應所獲得之鹼可溶性樹脂。<Epoxy (meth) acrylate resin (b1-1)> By adding an α, β-unsaturated monocarboxylic acid and / or an α, β-unsaturated monocarboxylic acid ester having a carboxyl group to an epoxy resin And an alkali-soluble resin obtained by further reacting with a polybasic acid and / or its anhydride. <Epoxy (meth) acrylate resin alkali-soluble resin (b1-2)> By adding an α, β-unsaturated monocarboxylic acid and / or an α, β-unsaturated monomer having a carboxyl group to an epoxy resin A carboxylic acid ester, an alkali-soluble resin obtained by further reacting with a polyhydric alcohol and a polybasic acid and / or an anhydride thereof.

此處,所謂環氧樹脂係亦包括藉由熱硬化形成樹脂前之原料化合物而言,作為該環氧樹脂,可自公知之環氧樹脂中適當選擇而使用。又,環氧樹脂可使用使酚性化合物與表鹵醇進行反應所獲得之化合物。作為酚性化合物,較佳為具有二價以上之酚性羥基之化合物,可為單體,亦可為聚合物。 作為成為原料之環氧樹脂之種類,可適宜地使用甲酚酚醛清漆型環氧樹脂、苯酚酚醛清漆型環氧樹脂、雙酚A型環氧樹脂、雙酚F型環氧樹脂、三苯酚甲烷型環氧樹脂、聯苯酚醛清漆型環氧樹脂、萘酚醛清漆型環氧樹脂、作為二環戊二烯與苯酚或甲酚之加成聚合反應物與表鹵醇之反應產物之環氧樹脂、含金剛烷基之環氧樹脂、茀型環氧樹脂等,可適宜地使用此種主鏈具有芳香族環者。Here, the epoxy resin system also includes a raw material compound before the resin is formed by thermosetting. As the epoxy resin, it can be appropriately selected from known epoxy resins and used. As the epoxy resin, a compound obtained by reacting a phenolic compound with epihalohydrin can be used. The phenolic compound is preferably a compound having a phenolic hydroxyl group of two or more valences, and may be a monomer or a polymer. As the kind of epoxy resin used as a raw material, a cresol novolac epoxy resin, a phenol novolac epoxy resin, a bisphenol A epoxy resin, a bisphenol F epoxy resin, and triphenol methane can be suitably used. Type epoxy resin, biphenol novolac type epoxy resin, naphthol novolac type epoxy resin, epoxy resin as reaction product of addition polymerization reaction product of dicyclopentadiene and phenol or cresol and epihalohydrin , An adamantyl group-containing epoxy resin, a fluorene type epoxy resin, and the like, such a main chain having an aromatic ring can be suitably used.

又,作為環氧樹脂之具體例,例如可適宜地使用:雙酚A型環氧樹脂(例如三菱化學公司製造之「jER(註冊商標,以下相同)-828」、「jER-1001」、「jER-1002」、「jER-1004」、日本化藥公司製造之「NER-1302」(環氧當量323,軟化點76℃)等)、雙酚F型樹脂(例如三菱化學公司製造之「jER-807」、「jER-4004P」、「jER-4005P」、「jER-4007P」、日本化藥公司製造之「NER-7406」(環氧當量350,軟化點66℃)等)、雙酚S型環氧樹脂、聯苯縮水甘油醚(例如三菱化學公司製造之「jER-YX4000」)、苯酚酚醛清漆型環氧樹脂(例如日本化藥公司製造之「EPPN-201」、三菱化學公司製造之「jER-152」、「jER-154」、Dow Chemical公司製造之「DEN-438」)、(鄰、間、對)甲酚酚醛清漆型環氧樹脂(例如日本化藥公司製造之「EOCN(註冊商標,以下相同)-102S」、「EOCN-1020」、「EOCN-104S」)、異氰脲酸三縮水甘油酯(例如日產化學公司製造之「TEPIC(註冊商標)」)、三苯酚甲烷型環氧樹脂(例如日本化藥公司製造之「EPPN(註冊商標,以下相同)-501」、「EPPN-502」、「EPPN-503」)、脂環式環氧樹脂(Daicel公司製造之「Celloxide(註冊商標,以下相同)2021P」、「Celloxide EHPE」)、將藉由二環戊二烯與苯酚之反應獲得之苯酚樹脂進行縮水甘油基化而成之環氧樹脂(例如,DIC公司製造之「EXA-7200」、日本化藥公司製造之「NC-7300」)、下述通式(B1)~(B4)所表示之環氧樹脂等。具體而言,作為下述通式(B1)所表示之環氧樹脂,可列舉日本化藥公司製造之「XD-1000」,作為下述通式(B2)所表示之環氧樹脂,可列舉日本化藥公司製造之「NC-3000」,作為下述通式(B4)所表示之環氧樹脂,可列舉新日鐵住金化學公司製造之「ESF-300」等。As specific examples of the epoxy resin, for example, bisphenol A epoxy resin (for example, "jER (registered trademark, the same below) -828", "jER-1001", "manufactured by Mitsubishi Chemical Corporation"), jER-1002 "," jER-1004 "," NER-1302 "(epoxy equivalent 323, softening point 76 ° C, etc.) manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd., bisphenol F-type resin (such as" jER manufactured by Mitsubishi Chemical Corporation " -807 "," jER-4004P "," jER-4005P "," jER-4007P "," NER-7406 "(epoxy equivalent 350, softening point 66 ° C, etc.) manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.), bisphenol S Type epoxy resin, biphenyl glycidyl ether (such as "jER-YX4000" manufactured by Mitsubishi Chemical Corporation), phenol novolac type epoxy resin (such as "EPPN-201" manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd., "JER-152", "jER-154", "DEN-438" manufactured by Dow Chemical Co., Ltd., (ortho, meta, p) cresol novolac type epoxy resin (e.g. "EOCN ( Registered trademark, the same below) -102S "," EOCN-1020 "," EOCN-104S "), triglycidyl isocyanurate (such as Nissan "TEPIC (registered trademark)" manufactured by Chemical Co., Ltd., triphenol methane epoxy resin (such as "EPPN (registered trademark, the same below) -501", "EPPN-502", "EPPN- 503 "), alicyclic epoxy resin (" Celloxide (registered trademark, the same below) 2021P "," Celloxide EHPE "manufactured by Daicel), and a phenol resin obtained by the reaction of dicyclopentadiene and phenol A glycidyl epoxy resin (for example, "EXA-7200" manufactured by DIC Corporation, "NC-7300" manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.), represented by the following general formulae (B1) to (B4) Epoxy, etc. Specifically, as the epoxy resin represented by the following general formula (B1), "XD-1000" manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd., and as the epoxy resin represented by the following general formula (B2), As the "NC-3000" manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd., as the epoxy resin represented by the following general formula (B4), "ESF-300" manufactured by Nippon Steel & Sumitomo Chemical Co., Ltd. can be cited.

[化4] [Chemical 4]

於上述通式(B1)中,a為平均值,表示0~10之數,R111 表示氫原子、鹵素原子、碳數1~8之烷基、碳數3~10之環烷基、苯基、萘基、或聯苯基。再者,存在於1分子中之複數個R111 分別可相同亦可不同。In the above general formula (B1), a is an average value and represents a number from 0 to 10; R 111 represents a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms, a cycloalkyl group having 3 to 10 carbon atoms, and benzene. , Naphthyl, or biphenyl. In addition, a plurality of R 111 present in one molecule may be the same or different.

[化5] [Chemical 5]

於上述通式(B2)中,b為平均值,表示0~10之數,R121 表示氫原子、鹵素原子、碳數1~8之烷基、碳數3~10之環烷基、苯基、萘基、或聯苯基。再者,存在於1分子中之複數個R121 分別可相同亦可不同。In the above general formula (B2), b is an average value and represents a number from 0 to 10. R 121 represents a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms, a cycloalkyl group having 3 to 10 carbon atoms, and benzene. , Naphthyl, or biphenyl. In addition, a plurality of R 121 existing in one molecule may be the same or different.

[化6] [Chemical 6]

於上述通式(B3)中,X表示下述通式(B3-1)或(B3-2)所表示之連結基,c表示2或3。但於分子結構中含有1個以上之金剛烷結構。In the general formula (B3), X represents a linking group represented by the following general formula (B3-1) or (B3-2), and c represents 2 or 3. However, the molecular structure contains more than one adamantane structure.

[化7] [Chemical 7]

於上述通式(B3-1)及(B3-2)中,R131 ~R134 及R135 ~R137 分別獨立地表示可具有取代基之金剛烷基、氫原子、可具有取代基之碳數1~12之烷基、或可具有取代基之苯基,﹡表示鍵結鍵。In the general formulae (B3-1) and (B3-2), R 131 to R 134 and R 135 to R 137 each independently represent an adamantyl group which may have a substituent, a hydrogen atom, and a carbon which may have a substituent. An alkyl group having 1 to 12 or a phenyl group which may have a substituent, and ﹡ represents a bonding bond.

[化8] [Chemical 8]

於上述通式(B4)中,p及q分別獨立地表示0~4之整數,R141 及R142 分別獨立地表示碳數1~4之烷基或鹵素原子,R143 及R144 分別獨立地表示碳數1~4之伸烷基,x及y分別獨立地表示0以上之整數。In the above general formula (B4), p and q each independently represent an integer of 0 to 4, R 141 and R 142 each independently represent an alkyl or halogen atom having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, and R 143 and R 144 are each independently Ground represents an alkylene group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, and x and y each independently represent an integer of 0 or more.

該等中,較佳為使用通式(B1)~(B4)之任一者所表示之環氧樹脂。Among these, it is preferable to use an epoxy resin represented by any one of the general formulae (B1) to (B4).

作為α,β-不飽和單羧酸或具有羧基之α,β-不飽和單羧酸酯,可列舉:(甲基)丙烯酸、丁烯酸、鄰乙烯基苯甲酸、間乙烯基苯甲酸、對乙烯基苯甲酸、(甲基)丙烯酸之α位鹵代烷基、烷氧基、鹵素、硝基、氰基取代體等單羧酸;丁二酸2-(甲基)丙烯醯氧基乙酯、己二酸2-(甲基)丙烯醯氧基乙酯、鄰苯二甲酸2-(甲基)丙烯醯氧基乙酯、六氫鄰苯二甲酸2-(甲基)丙烯醯氧基乙酯、順丁烯二酸2-(甲基)丙烯醯氧基乙酯、丁二酸2-(甲基)丙烯醯氧基丙酯、己二酸2-(甲基)丙烯醯氧基丙酯、四氫鄰苯二甲酸2-(甲基)丙烯醯氧基丙酯、鄰苯二甲酸2-(甲基)丙烯醯氧基丙酯、順丁烯二酸2-(甲基)丙烯醯氧基丙酯、丁二酸2-(甲基)丙烯醯氧基丁酯、己二酸2-(甲基)丙烯醯氧基丁酯、氫鄰苯二甲酸2-(甲基)丙烯醯氧基丁酯、鄰苯二甲酸2-(甲基)丙烯醯氧基丁酯、順丁烯二酸2-(甲基)丙烯醯氧基丁酯(甲基);對丙烯酸加成ε-己內酯、β-丙內酯、γ-丁內酯、δ-戊內酯等內酯類而成之單體;或對(甲基)丙烯酸羥基烷基酯、季戊四醇三(甲基)丙烯酸酯、二季戊四醇五(甲基)丙烯酸酯加成丁二酸(酐)、鄰苯二甲酸(酐)、順丁烯二酸(酐)等酸(酐)而成之單體;(甲基)丙烯酸二聚物等。 該等中,就感度之方面而言,尤佳為(甲基)丙烯酸。Examples of the α, β-unsaturated monocarboxylic acid or an α, β-unsaturated monocarboxylic acid having a carboxyl group include (meth) acrylic acid, butenoic acid, o-vinylbenzoic acid, m-vinylbenzoic acid, Monocarboxylic acids such as p-vinyl benzoic acid, α-haloalkyl, (meth) acrylic acid, alkoxy, halogen, nitro, and cyano substituents; 2- (meth) acrylic acid ethoxyethyl succinate 2- (meth) acryloxyethyl adipate, 2- (meth) acryloxyethyl phthalate, 2- (meth) acryloxy hexahydrophthalate Ethyl ester, 2- (meth) acryloxyethyl maleate, 2- (meth) acryloxypropyl succinate, 2- (meth) acryloxy adipic acid Propyl ester, 2- (meth) acryloxypropyl phthalate, 2- (meth) acryloxypropyl phthalate, 2- (methyl) maleic acid Acrylic acid oxypropyl ester, 2- (meth) acrylic acid oxybutyl succinate, 2- (meth) acrylic acid oxybutyl adipate, 2- (methyl) hydrogen phthalate Acrylic ethoxybutyl ester, 2- (meth) acrylic ethoxybutyl phthalate, maleic acid 2- (meth) acrylic ethoxylate Esters (meth); monomers made by adding lactones such as ε-caprolactone, β-propiolactone, γ-butyrolactone, and δ-valerolactone to acrylic acid; or (meth) acrylic acid Addition of hydroxyalkyl ester, pentaerythritol tri (meth) acrylate, dipentaerythritol penta (meth) acrylate to succinic acid (anhydride), phthalic acid (anhydride), maleic acid (anhydride) (Anhydride) monomers; (meth) acrylic acid dimers, etc. Among these, in terms of sensitivity, (meth) acrylic acid is particularly preferred.

作為對環氧樹脂加成α,β-不飽和單羧酸及/或具有羧基之α,β-不飽和單羧酸酯之方法,可使用公知之方法。例如,可於酯化觸媒之存在下,於50~150℃之溫度下使α,β-不飽和單羧酸及/或具有羧基之α,β-不飽和單羧酸酯與環氧樹脂進行反應。作為此處所使用之酯化觸媒,可使用:三乙胺、三甲胺、苄基二甲基胺、苄基二乙基胺等三級胺;四甲基氯化銨、四乙基氯化銨、十二烷基三甲基氯化銨等四級銨鹽等。As a method for adding an α, β-unsaturated monocarboxylic acid and / or an α, β-unsaturated monocarboxylic acid ester having a carboxyl group to an epoxy resin, a known method can be used. For example, an α, β-unsaturated monocarboxylic acid and / or an α, β-unsaturated monocarboxylic acid having a carboxyl group and an epoxy resin can be formed at a temperature of 50 to 150 ° C in the presence of an esterification catalyst. Perform the reaction. As the esterification catalyst used here, tertiary amines such as triethylamine, trimethylamine, benzyldimethylamine, and benzyldiethylamine; tetramethylammonium chloride and tetraethyl chloride Quaternary ammonium salts such as ammonium and dodecyltrimethylammonium chloride.

再者,環氧樹脂、α,β-不飽和單羧酸及/或具有羧基之α,β-不飽和單羧酸酯、及酯化觸媒均可單獨使用一種,亦可將兩種以上併用。 α,β-不飽和單羧酸及/或具有羧基之α,β-不飽和單羧酸酯之使用量相對於環氧樹脂之環氧基1當量,較佳為0.5~1.2當量之範圍,進而較佳為0.7~1.1當量之範圍。藉由將α,β-不飽和單羧酸及/或具有羧基之α,β-不飽和單羧酸酯之使用量設為上述下限值以上,有可抑制不飽和基之導入量之不足,容易使後續之與多元酸及/或其酐之反應亦充分之傾向。另一方面,藉由設為上述上限值以下,可見可抑制α,β-不飽和單羧酸及/或具有羧基之α,β-不飽和單羧酸酯之未反應物之殘存,容易使硬化特性變得良好之傾向。Furthermore, the epoxy resin, the α, β-unsaturated monocarboxylic acid and / or the α, β-unsaturated monocarboxylic acid ester having a carboxyl group, and the esterification catalyst may be used alone or in combination of two or more. And use. The amount of the α, β-unsaturated monocarboxylic acid and / or the α, β-unsaturated monocarboxylic acid ester having a carboxyl group is preferably 0.5 to 1.2 equivalents relative to 1 equivalent of the epoxy group of the epoxy resin. A more preferable range is 0.7 to 1.1 equivalents. When the amount of the α, β-unsaturated monocarboxylic acid and / or the α, β-unsaturated monocarboxylic acid ester having a carboxyl group is set to the above-mentioned lower limit value or more, there is a problem that the amount of the unsaturated group introduced can be suppressed. It is easy to make the subsequent reaction with polybasic acid and / or its anhydride sufficient. On the other hand, by making it below the above-mentioned upper limit value, it can be seen that it is easy to suppress the remaining of unreacted products of α, β-unsaturated monocarboxylic acid and / or α, β-unsaturated monocarboxylic acid having a carboxyl group, and it is easy to The tendency to make the hardening properties good.

作為多元酸及/或其酐,可列舉選自順丁烯二酸、丁二酸、伊康酸、鄰苯二甲酸、四氫鄰苯二甲酸、六氫鄰苯二甲酸、均苯四甲酸、偏苯三甲酸、二苯甲酮四羧酸、甲基六氫鄰苯二甲酸、內亞甲基四氫鄰苯二甲酸、氯橋酸、甲基四氫鄰苯二甲酸、聯苯四羧酸、及該等之酐等中之一種或兩種以上。Examples of the polybasic acid and / or its anhydride include those selected from maleic acid, succinic acid, itaconic acid, phthalic acid, tetrahydrophthalic acid, hexahydrophthalic acid, and pyromellitic acid. , Trimellitic acid, benzophenone tetracarboxylic acid, methylhexahydrophthalic acid, internal methylenetetrahydrophthalic acid, chlorobridged acid, methyltetrahydrophthalic acid, biphenyltetra One or two or more of carboxylic acids and their anhydrides.

較佳為順丁烯二酸、丁二酸、伊康酸、鄰苯二甲酸、四氫鄰苯二甲酸、六氫鄰苯二甲酸、均苯四甲酸、偏苯三甲酸、聯苯四羧酸、或該等之酐。尤佳為四氫鄰苯二甲酸、聯苯四羧酸、四氫鄰苯二甲酸酐、或聯苯四羧酸二酐。Preferred are maleic acid, succinic acid, itaconic acid, phthalic acid, tetrahydrophthalic acid, hexahydrophthalic acid, pyromellitic acid, trimellitic acid, biphenyltetracarboxylic acid. Acids, or anhydrides of these. Particularly preferred is tetrahydrophthalic acid, biphenyltetracarboxylic acid, tetrahydrophthalic anhydride, or biphenyltetracarboxylic dianhydride.

關於多元酸及/或其酐之加成反應,亦可使用公知之方法,可於與對環氧樹脂加成α,β-不飽和單羧酸及/或具有羧基之α,β-不飽和單羧酸酯之反應同樣之條件下繼續反應而獲得目標物。多元酸及/或其酐成分之加成量較佳為所產生之含羧基之環氧(甲基)丙烯酸酯系樹脂之酸值成為10~150 mgKOH/g之範圍之程度,進而較佳為成為20~140 mgKOH/g之範圍之程度。藉由設為上述下限值以上,有鹼性顯影性變得良好之傾向,又,藉由設為上述上限值以下,有硬化性能變得良好之傾向。Regarding the addition reaction of a polybasic acid and / or its anhydride, a known method can also be used. It can be used to add α, β-unsaturated monocarboxylic acid and / or α, β-unsaturated carboxyl group to epoxy resin. The reaction of the monocarboxylic acid ester is continued under the same conditions to obtain the target substance. The addition amount of the polybasic acid and / or its anhydride component is preferably such that the acid value of the carboxyl group-containing epoxy (meth) acrylate resin is in the range of 10 to 150 mgKOH / g, and more preferably It is in a range of 20 to 140 mgKOH / g. When it is more than the said lower limit value, there exists a tendency for alkaline developability to become favorable, and when it is below the said upper limit value, there exists a tendency for hardening performance to become favorable.

再者,於該多元酸及/或其酐之加成反應時,可添加三羥甲基丙烷、季戊四醇、二季戊四醇等多元醇而製成導入多分支結構者。In addition, during the addition reaction of the polybasic acid and / or its anhydride, polyhydric alcohols such as trimethylolpropane, pentaerythritol, and dipentaerythritol can be added to prepare a multi-branched structure.

含羧基之環氧(甲基)丙烯酸酯系樹脂通常係藉由在環氧樹脂與α,β-不飽和單羧酸及/或具有羧基之α,β-不飽和單羧酸酯之反應物中混合多元酸及/或其酐後,或者在環氧樹脂與α,β-不飽和單羧酸及/或具有羧基之α,β-不飽和單羧酸酯之反應物中混合多元酸及/或其酐及多元醇後進行加溫而獲得。於該情形時,多元酸及/或其酐與多元醇之混合順序並無特別限制。藉由加溫,多元酸及/或其酐對環氧樹脂與α,β-不飽和單羧酸或具有羧基之α,β-不飽和單羧酸酯之反應物及多元醇之混合物中存在之任意羥基進行加成反應。The carboxyl group-containing epoxy (meth) acrylate resin is generally a reaction product between an epoxy resin and an α, β-unsaturated monocarboxylic acid and / or an α, β-unsaturated monocarboxylic acid having a carboxyl group. After the polybasic acid and / or its anhydride are mixed in the mixture, or the polybasic acid and / or its reactant are mixed with an α, β-unsaturated monocarboxylic acid and / or an α, β-unsaturated monocarboxylic acid ester having a carboxyl group, And / or its anhydride and polyhydric alcohol are obtained by heating. In this case, the mixing order of the polybasic acid and / or its anhydride and the polyol is not particularly limited. By heating, polyacids and / or their anhydrides are present in mixtures of epoxy resins with reactants of α, β-unsaturated monocarboxylic acids or α, β-unsaturated monocarboxylic acids with carboxyl groups, and polyols. Any of the hydroxyl groups undergo an addition reaction.

作為含羧基之環氧(甲基)丙烯酸酯系樹脂,除了上文所述者以外,可列舉韓國公開專利第10-2013-0022955號公報、韓國註冊專利第10-0965189號公報、日本專利特開2005-165294號公報、日本專利特開2006-312704號公報所記載者等。As the carboxyl group-containing epoxy (meth) acrylate resin, in addition to the above, Korean Published Patent No. 10-2013-0022955, Korean Registered Patent No. 10-0965189, and Japanese Patent Special Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2005-165294 and Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2006-312704.

環氧(甲基)丙烯酸酯系樹脂之藉由凝膠滲透層析法(GPC)測得之聚苯乙烯換算之重量平均分子量(Mw)通常為1000以上,較佳為1500以上,更佳為2000以上,進而較佳為2500以上,且通常為10000以下,較佳為8000以下,更佳為6000以下,進而較佳為5000以下,尤佳為4000以下。藉由設為上述下限值以上,有可抑制對顯影液之溶解性變得過高之情況之傾向,藉由設為上述上限值以下,有容易使對顯影液之溶解性良好之傾向。作為上限與下限之組合,例如,較佳為1000~10000,更佳為1500~8000,進而較佳為2000~6000,進而更佳為2500~5000,尤佳為2500~4000。The polystyrene-equivalent weight average molecular weight (Mw) of the epoxy (meth) acrylate resin measured by gel permeation chromatography (GPC) is generally 1,000 or more, preferably 1500 or more, and more preferably 2000 or more, more preferably 2500 or more, and usually 10,000 or less, preferably 8000 or less, more preferably 6,000 or less, even more preferably 5,000 or less, particularly preferably 4,000 or less. By setting it to be above the lower limit value, there is a tendency that the solubility in the developer can be suppressed from becoming too high, and by setting it to be less than the above upper limit value, the solubility in the developer solution tends to be good. . The combination of the upper limit and the lower limit is, for example, preferably 1,000 to 10,000, more preferably 1500 to 8000, still more preferably 2000 to 6000, still more preferably 2500 to 5000, and even more preferably 2500 to 4000.

環氧(甲基)丙烯酸酯系樹脂之酸值並無特別限定,較佳為10 mgKOH/g以上,更佳為20 mgKOH/g以上,又,較佳為200 mgKOH/g以下,更佳為150 mgKOH/g以下,進而較佳為100 mgKOH/g以下,尤佳為50 mgKOH/g以下。藉由設為上述下限值以上,有可獲得適度之顯影溶解性之傾向,又,藉由設為上述上限值以下,有可抑制過分進行顯影而發生膜溶解之情況之傾向。作為上限與下限之組合,例如,較佳為10~200 mgKOH/g,更佳為10~150 mgKOH/g,進而較佳為10~100 mgKOH/g,尤佳為20~50 mgKOH/g。The acid value of the epoxy (meth) acrylate resin is not particularly limited, but is preferably 10 mgKOH / g or more, more preferably 20 mgKOH / g or more, and further preferably 200 mgKOH / g or less, and more preferably 150 mgKOH / g or less, more preferably 100 mgKOH / g or less, and particularly preferably 50 mgKOH / g or less. By setting it to be above the lower limit value, there is a tendency that moderate development solubility can be obtained, and by setting it to be less than the above upper limit value, there is a tendency that the development of the film may be suppressed due to excessive development. The combination of the upper limit and the lower limit is, for example, preferably 10 to 200 mgKOH / g, more preferably 10 to 150 mgKOH / g, still more preferably 10 to 100 mgKOH / g, and even more preferably 20 to 50 mgKOH / g.

環氧(甲基)丙烯酸酯系樹脂(b1)之化學結構並無特別限定,例如可列舉具有下述通式(I)所表示之部分結構(1)之環氧(甲基)丙烯酸酯系樹脂(b1-A)(以下有時簡記為「環氧(甲基)丙烯酸酯系樹脂(b1-A)」)。環氧(甲基)丙烯酸酯系樹脂(b1-A)由於在式(I)所表示之部分結構中具有3個以上之(甲基)丙烯醯氧基,因此樹脂1分子中之乙烯性雙鍵量較多,若使用含有該樹脂之感光性著色組合物形成著色間隔物,則有如下傾向:交聯密度變高,可抑制雜質向溶劑之溶出而確保高可靠性,又,間隔物之交聯密度變高,藉此機械特性提高。The chemical structure of the epoxy (meth) acrylate resin (b1) is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include epoxy (meth) acrylates having a partial structure (1) represented by the following general formula (I) Resin (b1-A) (hereinafter sometimes referred to simply as "epoxy (meth) acrylate resin (b1-A)"). The epoxy (meth) acrylate resin (b1-A) has three or more (meth) acrylic fluorenyloxy groups in a partial structure represented by the formula (I), so the ethylene-based bis There are many bonds, and if a colored spacer is formed by using the photosensitive coloring composition containing the resin, the tendency is to increase the crosslinking density, to suppress the elution of impurities into the solvent, and to ensure high reliability. The cross-linking density becomes higher, thereby improving mechanical properties.

(部分結構(1))(Partial structure (1))

[化9] [Chemical 9]

上述式(I)中,R1 表示氫原子或甲基, R2 、R3 、R5 及R6 分別獨立地表示可具有取代基之伸烷基, R4 表示n+1價之連結基, R7 表示可具有取代基之伸烷基、可具有取代基之伸烯基或可具有取代基之芳香族環基, l及m分別獨立地表示0~12之整數, n表示3以上之整數, ﹡表示鍵結鍵。In the above formula (I), R 1 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, R 2 , R 3 , R 5, and R 6 each independently represent an alkylene group which may have a substituent, R 4 represents an n + 1-valent linking group, and R 7 represents an alkylene group which may have a substituent, an alkenyl group which may have a substituent, or an aromatic ring group which may have a substituent; l and m each independently represent an integer of 0 to 12, and n represents an integer of 3 or more, ﹡ Means bond key.

(R2 、R3 、R5 及R6 ) 於上述式(I)中,R2 、R3 、R5 及R6 分別獨立地表示可具有取代基之伸烷基。 伸烷基可為直鏈狀,亦可為支鏈狀,亦可為環狀,亦可為該等之組合。其碳數並無特別限定,通常為1以上,又,通常為8以下,較佳為6以下,更佳為4以下,進而較佳為2以下。藉由設為上述上限值以下,有與其他成分之相溶性變得良好之傾向。(R 2 , R 3 , R 5, and R 6 ) In the formula (I), R 2 , R 3 , R 5, and R 6 each independently represent an alkylene group which may have a substituent. The alkylene may be linear, branched, or cyclic, or a combination of these. The number of carbon atoms is not particularly limited, but it is usually 1 or more, and usually 8 or less, preferably 6 or less, more preferably 4 or less, and even more preferably 2 or less. By making it below the said upper limit, there exists a tendency for compatibility with other components to become favorable.

作為伸烷基之具體例,可列舉:亞甲基、伸乙基、伸丙基、伸丁基、伸環己基,就與其他成分之相溶性之觀點而言,較佳為亞甲基或伸乙基,更佳為亞甲基。Specific examples of the alkylene group include methylene, ethylene, propyl, butyl, and cyclohexyl. From the viewpoint of compatibility with other components, methylene or Ethylene, more preferably methylene.

作為伸烷基可具有之取代基,可列舉:烷氧基、鹵素原子(-F、-Cl、-Br、-I)、羥基、羧基等,就合成容易性之觀點而言,較佳為未經取代。Examples of the substituent which the alkylene group may have include an alkoxy group, a halogen atom (-F, -Cl, -Br, -I), a hydroxyl group, and a carboxyl group. From the viewpoint of ease of synthesis, it is preferably Without replacement.

(R4 ) 於上述通式(I)中,R4 表示n+1價之連結基。n+1價之連結基之化學結構並無特別限定,可列舉可具有取代基之n+1價之烴基。烴基可為脂肪族烴基,亦可為芳香族烴基,就顯影性之觀點而言,較佳為脂肪族烴基。又,烴基中之碳-碳單鍵可由選自由-O-、-CO-及-NH-所組成之群中之至少1種所中斷。(R 4 ) In the general formula (I), R 4 represents an n + 1-valent linking group. The chemical structure of the n + 1 monovalent linking group is not particularly limited, and examples include a n + 1 monovalent hydrocarbon group which may have a substituent. The hydrocarbon group may be an aliphatic hydrocarbon group or an aromatic hydrocarbon group. From the viewpoint of developability, an aliphatic hydrocarbon group is preferred. The carbon-carbon single bond in the hydrocarbon group may be interrupted by at least one selected from the group consisting of -O-, -CO-, and -NH-.

作為n+1價之連結基之具體例,可列舉以下者。化學式中之﹡表示鍵結鍵。Specific examples of the n + 1-valent linking group include the following. ﹡ In the chemical formula represents a bond.

[化10] [Chemical 10]

(R7 ) 於上述式(I)中,R7 表示可具有取代基之伸烷基、可具有取代基之伸烯基或可具有取代基之二價芳香族環基。(R 7 ) In the formula (I), R 7 represents an alkylene group which may have a substituent, an alkenyl group which may have a substituent, or a divalent aromatic ring group which may have a substituent.

R7 中之伸烷基可為直鏈狀,亦可為支鏈狀,亦可為環狀,亦可為該等之組合。其碳數並無特別限定,通常為1以上,較佳為2以上,又,通常為8以下,較佳為6以下,更佳為4以下。藉由設為上述下限值以上,有顯影密接性變得良好之傾向,又,藉由設為上述上限值以下,有硬化性變得良好之傾向。The alkylene group in R 7 may be linear, branched, or cyclic, or a combination of these. The carbon number is not particularly limited, but it is usually 1 or more, preferably 2 or more, and usually 8 or less, preferably 6 or less, and more preferably 4 or less. When it is more than the said lower limit value, there exists a tendency for development adhesiveness to become favorable, and when it is below the said upper limit value, there exists a tendency for hardenability to become favorable.

作為伸烷基之具體例,可列舉:亞甲基、伸乙基、伸丙基、伸己基、伸環己基,就硬化性之觀點而言,較佳為亞甲基或伸乙基,更佳為伸乙基。Specific examples of the alkylene group include a methylene group, an ethylene group, a propylene group, a hexyl group, and a cyclohexyl group. From the viewpoint of hardenability, a methylene group or an ethylene group is preferred, and more Ethyl is preferred.

作為伸烷基可具有之取代基,可列舉:烷氧基、鹵素原子(-F、-Cl、-Br、-I)、羥基、羧基等,就硬化性之觀點而言,較佳為未經取代。Examples of the substituent which the alkylene group may have include an alkoxy group, a halogen atom (-F, -Cl, -Br, -I), a hydroxyl group, and a carboxyl group. Was replaced.

R7 中之伸烯基可為直鏈狀,亦可為支鏈狀,亦可為環狀,亦可為該等之組合。其碳數並無特別限定,通常為2以上,較佳為4以上,又,通常為8以下,較佳為6以下。藉由設為上述下限值以上,有顯影密接性變得良好之傾向,又,藉由設為上述上限值以下,有硬化性變得良好之傾向。The alkylene group in R 7 may be linear, branched, or cyclic, or a combination of these. The carbon number is not particularly limited, but it is usually 2 or more, preferably 4 or more, and usually 8 or less, and preferably 6 or less. When it is more than the said lower limit value, there exists a tendency for development adhesiveness to become favorable, and when it is below the said upper limit value, there exists a tendency for hardenability to become favorable.

作為伸烯基之具體例,可列舉:伸乙烯基、伸丙烯基、伸丁烯基、伸環己烯基,就硬化性之觀點而言,較佳為伸乙烯基或伸環己烯基,更佳為伸乙烯基。Specific examples of the alkenyl group include a vinylidene group, an alkenyl group, a butylene group, and a cyclohexene group. From the viewpoint of hardenability, the vinylidene group or the cyclohexene group is preferred. , More preferably vinyl.

作為伸烯基可具有之取代基,可列舉:烷氧基、鹵素原子(-F、-Cl、-Br、-I)、羥基、羧基等,就硬化性之觀點而言,較佳為未經取代。Examples of the substituent which the alkenyl group may have include an alkoxy group, a halogen atom (-F, -Cl, -Br, -I), a hydroxyl group, and a carboxyl group. Was replaced.

作為R7 中之二價芳香族環基,可列舉二價芳香族烴環基及二價芳香族雜環基。其碳數通常為4以上,較佳為5以上,更佳為6以上,又,較佳為40以下,更佳為30以下,進而較佳為20以下,進而更佳為15以下,尤佳為10以下。藉由設為上述下限值以上,有顯影密接性變得良好之傾向,又,藉由設為上述上限值以下,有硬化性變得良好之傾向。Examples of the divalent aromatic ring group in R 7 include a divalent aromatic hydrocarbon ring group and a divalent aromatic heterocyclic group. Its carbon number is usually 4 or more, preferably 5 or more, more preferably 6 or more, and more preferably 40 or less, more preferably 30 or less, still more preferably 20 or less, even more preferably 15 or less, and particularly preferably It is 10 or less. When it is more than the said lower limit value, there exists a tendency for development adhesiveness to become favorable, and when it is below the said upper limit value, there exists a tendency for hardenability to become favorable.

作為二價芳香族烴環基中之芳香族烴環,可為單環,亦可為縮合環。作為二價芳香族烴環基,例如可列舉具有2個自由原子價之苯環、萘環、蒽環、菲環、苝環、稠四苯環、芘環、苯并芘環、環、聯三伸苯環、苊環、螢蒽環、茀環等基。 又,作為二價芳香族雜環基中之雜芳香環,可為單環,亦可為縮合環。作為二價芳香族雜環基,例如可列舉具有2個自由原子價之呋喃環、苯并呋喃環、噻吩環、苯并噻吩環、吡咯環、吡唑環、咪唑環、㗁二唑環、吲哚環、咔唑環、吡咯并咪唑環、吡咯并吡唑環、吡咯并吡咯環、噻吩并吡咯環、噻吩并噻吩環、呋喃并吡咯環、呋喃并呋喃環、噻吩并呋喃環、苯并異㗁唑環、苯并異噻唑環、苯并咪唑環、吡啶環、吡環、嗒環、嘧啶環、三環、喹啉環、異喹啉環、㖕啉環、喹㗁啉環、啡啶環、苯并咪唑環、呸啶環、喹唑啉環、喹唑啉酮環、薁環等基。 二價芳香族環基中,就光硬化性之觀點而言,較佳為具有2個自由原子價之苯環或萘環,更佳為具有2個自由原子價之苯環。The aromatic hydrocarbon ring in the divalent aromatic hydrocarbon ring group may be a monocyclic ring or a condensed ring. Examples of the divalent aromatic hydrocarbon ring group include a benzene ring, a naphthalene ring, an anthracene ring, a phenanthrene ring, a fluorene ring, a fused tetraphenyl ring, a fluorene ring, a benzofluorene ring, Ring, bitriphenylene ring, fluorene ring, fluoranthene ring, fluorene ring and other groups. The heteroaromatic ring in the divalent aromatic heterocyclic group may be a monocyclic ring or a condensed ring. Examples of the divalent aromatic heterocyclic group include a furan ring, a benzofuran ring, a thiophene ring, a benzothiophene ring, a pyrrole ring, a pyrazole ring, an imidazole ring, an oxadiazole ring, Indole ring, carbazole ring, pyrroloimidazole ring, pyrrolopyrazole ring, pyrrolopyrrole ring, thienopyrrole ring, thienothiophene ring, furanopyrrole ring, furanofuran ring, thienofuran ring, benzene Acyl isoxazole ring, benzoisothiazole ring, benzimidazole ring, pyridine ring, pyridine ring, data ring, pyrimidine ring, tricyclic ring, quinoline ring, isoquinoline ring, oxoline ring, quinoline ring, The pyridine ring, benzimidazole ring, pyrimidine ring, quinazoline ring, quinazolinone ring, fluorene ring and other groups. Among the divalent aromatic ring groups, from the viewpoint of photohardenability, a benzene ring or a naphthalene ring having two free atomic valences is preferred, and a benzene ring having two free atomic valences is more preferred.

作為二價芳香族環基可具有之取代基,可列舉:烷基、烷氧基、鹵素原子(-F、-Cl、-Br、-I)、羥基、羧基等。該等中,就硬化性之觀點而言,較佳為未經取代。Examples of the substituent which the divalent aromatic ring group may have include an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, a halogen atom (-F, -Cl, -Br, -I), a hydroxyl group, and a carboxyl group. Among these, from the viewpoint of hardenability, it is preferably unsubstituted.

該等中,就硬化性之觀點而言,R7 較佳為可具有取代基之伸烷基,更佳為未經取代之伸烷基,進而較佳為伸乙基。Among these, from the viewpoint of hardenability, R 7 is preferably an alkylene group which may have a substituent, more preferably an unsubstituted alkylene group, and even more preferably an alkylene group.

(l及m) 於上述通式(I)中,l及m分別獨立地表示0~12之整數。就顯影密接性之觀點而言,較佳為0以上,更佳為1以上,又,就硬化性之觀點而言,較佳為8以下,更佳為6以下,進而較佳為4以下,尤佳為2以下。另一方面,就硬化性之觀點而言,較佳為0。(l and m) In the general formula (I), l and m each independently represent an integer of 0 to 12. From the viewpoint of development adhesion, it is preferably 0 or more, more preferably 1 or more, and from the viewpoint of hardenability, it is preferably 8 or less, more preferably 6 or less, and even more preferably 4 or less. Particularly preferred is 2 or less. On the other hand, from the viewpoint of hardenability, it is preferably 0.

(n) 於上述通式(I)中,n表示3以上之整數。n較佳為4以上,更佳為5以上,又,較佳為10以下,更佳為8以下,進而較佳為7以下,尤佳為6以下。藉由設為上述下限值以上,有硬化性變得良好之傾向,又,藉由設為上述上限值以下,有顯影溶解性變得良好之傾向。上限與下限之組合例如較佳為4~10,更佳為4~8,進而較佳為4~7,尤佳為4~6。(n) In the general formula (I), n represents an integer of 3 or more. n is preferably 4 or more, more preferably 5 or more, and more preferably 10 or less, more preferably 8 or less, still more preferably 7 or less, and even more preferably 6 or less. When it is more than the said lower limit value, hardenability tends to become favorable, and when it is below the said upper limit value, the developing solubility tends to become favorable. The combination of the upper limit and the lower limit is, for example, preferably from 4 to 10, more preferably from 4 to 8, even more preferably from 4 to 7, and even more preferably from 4 to 6.

(部分結構(2)) 又,環氧(甲基)丙烯酸酯系樹脂(b1-A)就顯影溶解性之觀點而言,較佳為具有下述通式(II)所表示之部分結構(2)。(Partial structure (2)) Further, the epoxy (meth) acrylate resin (b1-A) preferably has a partial structure represented by the following general formula (II) from the viewpoint of development solubility ( 2).

[化11] [Chemical 11]

上述式(II)中,R8 表示可具有取代基之伸烷基、可具有取代基之伸烯基或可具有取代基之芳香族環基,﹡表示鍵結鍵。In the formula (II), R 8 represents an alkylene group which may have a substituent, an alkenyl group which may have a substituent, or an aromatic cyclic group which may have a substituent, and ﹡ represents a bonding bond.

(R8 ) 於上述式(II)中,R8 表示可具有取代基之伸烷基、可具有取代基之伸烯基或可具有取代基之二價芳香族環基。(R 8 ) In the formula (II), R 8 represents an alkylene group which may have a substituent, an alkenyl group which may have a substituent, or a divalent aromatic ring group which may have a substituent.

R8 中之伸烷基可為直鏈狀,亦可為支鏈狀,亦可為環狀,亦可為該等之組合。其碳數並無特別限定,通常為1以上,較佳為2以上,又,通常為8以下,較佳為6以下。藉由設為上述下限值以上,有顯影密接性變得良好之傾向,又,藉由設為上述上限值以下,有硬化性變得良好之傾向。The alkylene group in R 8 may be linear, branched, or cyclic, or a combination of these. The carbon number is not particularly limited, but it is usually 1 or more, preferably 2 or more, and usually 8 or less, and preferably 6 or less. When it is more than the said lower limit value, there exists a tendency for development adhesiveness to become favorable, and when it is below the said upper limit value, there exists a tendency for hardenability to become favorable.

作為伸烷基之具體例,可列舉:亞甲基、伸乙基、伸丙基、伸己基、伸環己基,就硬化性之觀點而言,較佳為亞甲基或伸乙基,更佳為伸乙基。Specific examples of the alkylene group include a methylene group, an ethylene group, a propylene group, a hexyl group, and a cyclohexyl group. From the viewpoint of hardenability, a methylene group or an ethylene group is preferred, and more Ethyl is preferred.

作為伸烷基可具有之取代基,可列舉:烷氧基、鹵素原子(-F、-Cl、-Br、-I)、羥基、羧基等,就硬化性之觀點而言,較佳為未經取代。Examples of the substituent which the alkylene group may have include an alkoxy group, a halogen atom (-F, -Cl, -Br, -I), a hydroxyl group, and a carboxyl group. Was replaced.

R8 中之伸烯基可為直鏈狀,亦可為支鏈狀,亦可為環狀,亦可為該等之組合。其碳數並無特別限定,通常為2以上,較佳為4以上,又,通常為8以下,較佳為6以下。藉由設為上述下限值以上,有顯影密接性變得良好之傾向,又,藉由設為上述上限值以下,有硬化性變得良好之傾向。The alkylene group in R 8 may be linear, branched, or cyclic, or a combination of these. The carbon number is not particularly limited, but it is usually 2 or more, preferably 4 or more, and usually 8 or less, and preferably 6 or less. When it is more than the said lower limit value, there exists a tendency for development adhesiveness to become favorable, and when it is below the said upper limit value, there exists a tendency for hardenability to become favorable.

作為伸烯基之具體例,可列舉:伸乙烯基、伸丙烯基、伸丁烯基、伸環己烯基,就硬化性之觀點而言,較佳為伸乙烯基或伸環己烯基,更佳為伸環己烯基。Specific examples of the alkenyl group include a vinylidene group, an alkenyl group, a butylene group, and a cyclohexene group. From the viewpoint of hardenability, the vinylidene group or the cyclohexene group is preferred. And more preferably cyclohexenyl.

作為伸烯基可具有之取代基,可列舉:烷氧基、鹵素原子(-F、-Cl、-Br、-I)、羥基、羧基等,就硬化性之觀點而言,較佳為未經取代。Examples of the substituent which the alkenyl group may have include an alkoxy group, a halogen atom (-F, -Cl, -Br, -I), a hydroxyl group, and a carboxyl group. Was replaced.

作為R8 中之二價芳香族環基,可列舉二價芳香族烴環基及二價芳香族雜環基。其碳數通常為4以上,較佳為5以上,更佳為6以上,又,較佳為40以下,更佳為30以下,進而較佳為20以下,進而更佳為15以下,尤佳為10以下。藉由設為上述下限值以上,有顯影密接性變得良好之傾向,又,藉由設為上述上限值以下,有硬化性變得良好之傾向。Examples of the divalent aromatic ring group in R 8 include a divalent aromatic hydrocarbon ring group and a divalent aromatic heterocyclic group. Its carbon number is usually 4 or more, preferably 5 or more, more preferably 6 or more, and more preferably 40 or less, more preferably 30 or less, still more preferably 20 or less, even more preferably 15 or less, and particularly preferably It is 10 or less. When it is more than the said lower limit value, there exists a tendency for development adhesiveness to become favorable, and when it is below the said upper limit value, there exists a tendency for hardenability to become favorable.

作為二價芳香族烴環基中之芳香族烴環,可為單環,亦可為縮合環。作為二價芳香族烴環基,例如可列舉具有2個自由原子價之苯環、萘環、蒽環、菲環、苝環、稠四苯環、芘環、苯并芘環、環、聯三伸苯環、苊環、螢蒽環、茀環等基。 又,作為二價芳香族雜環基中之雜芳香環,可為單環,亦可為縮合環。作為二價芳香族雜環基,例如可列舉具有2個自由原子價之呋喃環、苯并呋喃環、噻吩環、苯并噻吩環、吡咯環、吡唑環、咪唑環、㗁二唑環、吲哚環、咔唑環、吡咯并咪唑環、吡咯并吡唑環、吡咯并吡咯環、噻吩并吡咯環、噻吩并噻吩環、呋喃并吡咯環、呋喃并呋喃環、噻吩并呋喃環、苯并異㗁唑環、苯并異噻唑環、苯并咪唑環、吡啶環、吡環、嗒環、嘧啶環、三環、喹啉環、異喹啉環、㖕啉環、喹㗁啉環、啡啶環、苯并咪唑環、呸啶環、喹唑啉環、喹唑啉酮環、薁環等基。該等中,就光硬化性之觀點而言,較佳為具有2個自由原子價之苯環或萘環,更佳為具有2個自由原子價之苯環。The aromatic hydrocarbon ring in the divalent aromatic hydrocarbon ring group may be a monocyclic ring or a condensed ring. Examples of the divalent aromatic hydrocarbon ring group include a benzene ring, a naphthalene ring, an anthracene ring, a phenanthrene ring, a fluorene ring, a thick tetraphenyl ring, a fluorene ring, a benzofluorene ring, Ring, bitriphenylene ring, fluorene ring, fluoranthene ring, fluorene ring and other groups. The heteroaromatic ring in the divalent aromatic heterocyclic group may be a monocyclic ring or a condensed ring. Examples of the divalent aromatic heterocyclic group include a furan ring, a benzofuran ring, a thiophene ring, a benzothiophene ring, a pyrrole ring, a pyrazole ring, an imidazole ring, an oxadiazole ring, Indole ring, carbazole ring, pyrroloimidazole ring, pyrrolopyrazole ring, pyrrolopyrrole ring, thienopyrrole ring, thienothiophene ring, furanopyrrole ring, furanofuran ring, thienofuran ring, benzene Acyl isoxazole ring, benzoisothiazole ring, benzimidazole ring, pyridine ring, pyridine ring, data ring, pyrimidine ring, tricyclic ring, quinoline ring, isoquinoline ring, oxoline ring, quinoline ring, The pyridine ring, benzimidazole ring, pyrimidine ring, quinazoline ring, quinazolinone ring, fluorene ring and other groups. Among these, from the viewpoint of photohardenability, a benzene ring or a naphthalene ring having two free atomic valences is preferred, and a benzene ring having two free atomic valences is more preferred.

作為二價芳香族環基可具有之取代基,可列舉:烷基、烷氧基、鹵素原子(-F、-Cl、-Br、-I)、羥基、羧基等。該等中,就硬化性之觀點而言,較佳為未經取代。Examples of the substituent which the divalent aromatic ring group may have include an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, a halogen atom (-F, -Cl, -Br, -I), a hydroxyl group, and a carboxyl group. Among these, from the viewpoint of hardenability, it is preferably unsubstituted.

該等中,就硬化性之觀點而言,R8 較佳為可具有取代基之伸烯基,更佳為未經取代之伸烯基,進而較佳為伸環己烯基。Among these, from the viewpoint of hardenability, R 8 is preferably an alkenyl group which may have a substituent, more preferably an unsubstituted alkenyl group, and even more preferably a cyclohexenyl group.

作為上述式(II)所表示之部分結構(2)之具體例,可列舉以下者。化學式中之﹡表示鍵結鍵。Specific examples of the partial structure (2) represented by the formula (II) include the followings. ﹡ In the chemical formula represents a bond.

[化12] [Chemical 12]

(部分結構(3)) 又,環氧(甲基)丙烯酸酯系樹脂(b1-A)就硬化性之觀點而言,較佳為具有下述通式(III)所表示之部分結構(3)。(Partial structure (3)) Further, the epoxy (meth) acrylate resin (b1-A) preferably has a partial structure (3) represented by the following general formula (III) from the viewpoint of curability. ).

[化13] [Chemical 13]

上述式(III)中,R9 表示環氧樹脂殘基,p表示1以上之整數,﹡表示鍵結鍵。In the formula (III), R 9 represents an epoxy resin residue, p represents an integer of 1 or more, and ﹡ represents a bonding bond.

(R9 ) 上述式(III)中,R9 表示環氧樹脂殘基。所謂環氧樹脂殘基意指自環氧樹脂中去除環氧基而成之殘基。 此處,所謂環氧樹脂,其含義與上文所述相同。(R 9 ) In the formula (III), R 9 represents an epoxy resin residue. The epoxy resin residue means a residue obtained by removing an epoxy group from an epoxy resin. Here, the meaning of the epoxy resin is the same as described above.

(p) 上述式(III)中,p表示1以上之整數。就兼顧硬化性與顯影溶解性之觀點而言,p較佳為2。另一方面,就硬化性之觀點而言,p較佳為2以上,更佳為5以上,進而較佳為10以上,又,就顯影溶解性之觀點而言,較佳為20以下,更佳為15以下,進而較佳為12以下。藉由設為上述下限值以上,有硬化性變得良好之傾向,藉由設為上述上限值以下,有顯影溶解性變得良好之傾向。(p) In the formula (III), p represents an integer of 1 or more. From the viewpoint of considering both the hardenability and the developing solubility, p is preferably 2. On the other hand, from the viewpoint of hardenability, p is preferably 2 or more, more preferably 5 or more, still more preferably 10 or more, and from the viewpoint of development solubility, 20 or less is more preferable. It is preferably 15 or less, and further preferably 12 or less. When it is more than the said lower limit value, hardenability tends to become favorable, and when it is less than the said upper limit value, development solubility tends to become favorable.

(部分結構(3-1)) 上述通式(III)所表示之部分結構(3)就顯影溶解性之觀點而言,較佳為下述通式(III-1)所表示之部分結構(3-1)。(Partial structure (3-1)) The partial structure (3) represented by the general formula (III) is preferably a partial structure represented by the following general formula (III-1) from the viewpoint of development solubility ( 3-1).

[化14] [Chemical 14]

上述式(III-1)中,γ表示二價連結基,﹡表示鍵結鍵。式(III-1)中之苯環可進而經任意取代基所取代。In the formula (III-1), γ represents a divalent linking group, and ﹡ represents a bonding bond. The benzene ring in the formula (III-1) may be further substituted with an arbitrary substituent.

(γ) 上述式(III-1)中,γ表示二價連結基。作為二價連結基,就顯影溶解性之觀點而言,可列舉單鍵、可具有取代基之伸烷基、-CO-或-SO2 -。 伸烷基可為直鏈狀,亦可為支鏈狀,亦可為環狀,亦可為該等之組合。其碳數並無特別限定,通常為1以上,較佳為2以上,又,通常為8以下,較佳為6以下。藉由設為上述下限值以上,有顯影密接性變得良好之傾向,又,藉由設為上述上限值以下,有硬化性變得良好之傾向。(γ) In the formula (III-1), γ represents a divalent linking group. Examples of the divalent linking group include a single bond, an alkylene group which may have a substituent, and -CO- or -SO 2 -from the viewpoint of developing solubility. The alkylene may be linear, branched, or cyclic, or a combination of these. The carbon number is not particularly limited, but it is usually 1 or more, preferably 2 or more, and usually 8 or less, and preferably 6 or less. When it is more than the said lower limit value, there exists a tendency for development adhesiveness to become favorable, and when it is below the said upper limit value, there exists a tendency for hardenability to become favorable.

作為伸烷基之具體例,可列舉:亞甲基、伸乙基、伸丙基、伸丁基、伸己基、伸環己基、伸庚基、伸辛基、伸十二烷基,就硬化性之觀點而言,較佳為亞甲基或伸丙基,更佳為伸丙基。Specific examples of the alkylene group include methylene, ethylene, propyl, butylene, hexyl, cyclohexyl, heptyl, octyl, and dodecyl. From the standpoint of sexuality, methylene or propylene is preferred, and propylene is more preferred.

作為伸烷基可具有之取代基,可列舉:烷氧基、鹵素原子(-F、-Cl、-Br、-I)、羥基、羧基等,就硬化性之觀點而言,較佳為未經取代。 於具有取代基之情形時,其個數並無限定,可為1個,亦可為2個以上。Examples of the substituent which the alkylene group may have include an alkoxy group, a halogen atom (-F, -Cl, -Br, -I), a hydroxyl group, and a carboxyl group. Was replaced. When there are substituents, the number is not limited, and may be one or two or more.

又,於伸烷基中之亞甲基(-CH2 -)所具有之2個氫原子均被取代基取代之情形時,該2個取代基彼此可連結而形成烴環。作為該情形時之γ之具體例,可列舉下述式(IV)所表示之基、下述式(V)所表示之基。化學式中之﹡表示鍵結鍵。When two hydrogen atoms of the methylene group (-CH 2- ) in the alkylene group are substituted with a substituent, the two substituents may be bonded to each other to form a hydrocarbon ring. Specific examples of γ in this case include a base represented by the following formula (IV) and a base represented by the following formula (V). ﹡ In the chemical formula represents a bond.

[化15] [Chemical 15]

又,作為上述式(III-1)中之苯環可具有之任意取代基,例如可列舉:羥基、甲基、甲氧基、乙基、乙氧基、丙基、丙氧基等。取代基之個數亦無特別限定,可為1個,亦可為2個以上。又,於上述式(III-1)中之苯環具有取代基之情形時,式(III-1)中之2個苯環可經由該取代基而連結。Moreover, as an arbitrary substituent which a benzene ring in the said Formula (III-1) may have, a hydroxyl group, a methyl group, a methoxy group, an ethyl group, an ethoxy group, a propyl group, a propoxy group, etc. are mentioned, for example. The number of substituents is also not particularly limited, and may be one or two or more. When the benzene ring in the formula (III-1) has a substituent, two benzene rings in the formula (III-1) may be connected via the substituent.

該等中,就硬化性之觀點而言,γ較佳為可具有取代基之伸烷基,更佳為未經取代之伸烷基,進而較佳為伸丙基。Among these, from the viewpoint of hardenability, γ is preferably an alkylene group which may have a substituent, more preferably an unsubstituted alkylene group, and still more preferably a propylene group.

(部分結構(3-2)) 上述通式(III)所表示之部分結構(3)就硬化性之觀點而言,較佳為下述通式(III-2)所表示之部分結構(3-2)。(Partial structure (3-2)) The partial structure (3) represented by the general formula (III) is preferably a partial structure (3) represented by the following general formula (III-2) from the viewpoint of hardenability. -2).

[化16] [Chemical 16]

上述式(III-2)中,﹡表示鍵結鍵。上述式(III-2)中之苯環可進而經任意取代基所取代。In the formula (III-2), ﹡ represents a bonding bond. The benzene ring in the formula (III-2) may be further substituted with an arbitrary substituent.

作為上述式(III-2)中之苯環可具有之任意取代基,例如可列舉羥基、烷基、烷氧基等。取代基之個數亦無特別限定,可為1個,亦可為2個以上。該等中,就顯影密接性之觀點而言,較佳為烷基,更佳為環烷基,進而較佳為金剛烷基。As an arbitrary substituent which a benzene ring in the said Formula (III-2) may have, a hydroxyl group, an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, etc. are mentioned, for example. The number of substituents is also not particularly limited, and may be one or two or more. Among these, an alkyl group is preferable, a cycloalkyl group is more preferable, and an adamantyl group is more preferable from a viewpoint of developing adhesiveness.

(部分結構(3-3)) 上述通式(III)所表示之部分結構(3)就硬化性之觀點而言,較佳為含有下述通式(III-3)所表示之部分結構(3-3)。(Partial structure (3-3)) The partial structure (3) represented by the general formula (III) preferably contains a partial structure represented by the following general formula (III-3) from the viewpoint of hardenability ( 3-3).

[化17] [Chemical 17]

上述式(III-3)中,R10 表示可具有取代基之二價烴基,﹡表示鍵結鍵。式(III-3)中之苯環可進而經任意取代基所取代。In the formula (III-3), R 10 represents a divalent hydrocarbon group which may have a substituent, and ﹡ represents a bonding bond. The benzene ring in the formula (III-3) may be further substituted with an arbitrary substituent.

(R10 ) 於上述式(III-3)中,R10 表示可具有取代基之二價烴基。 作為二價烴基,可列舉:二價脂肪族基、二價芳香族環基、將1個以上之二價脂肪族基與1個以上之二價芳香族環基連結而成之基。(R 10 ) In the formula (III-3), R 10 represents a divalent hydrocarbon group which may have a substituent. Examples of the divalent hydrocarbon group include a divalent aliphatic group, a divalent aromatic ring group, and a group in which one or more divalent aliphatic groups are connected to one or more divalent aromatic ring groups.

二價脂肪族基可列舉直鏈狀、支鏈狀、環狀、將該等組合而成者。該等中,就顯影溶解性之觀點而言,較佳為直鏈狀者,另一方面,就顯影密接性之觀點而言,較佳為環狀者。其碳數通常為1以上,較佳為3以上,更佳為6以上,又,較佳為20以下,更佳為15以下,進而較佳為10以下。藉由設為上述下限值以上,有顯影密接性變得良好之傾向,又,藉由設為上述上限值以下,有硬化性變得良好之傾向。Examples of the divalent aliphatic group include linear, branched, cyclic, and combinations thereof. Among these, a linear one is preferable from a viewpoint of development solubility, and a cyclic one is preferable from a viewpoint of development adhesiveness. Its carbon number is usually 1 or more, preferably 3 or more, more preferably 6 or more, and more preferably 20 or less, more preferably 15 or less, and even more preferably 10 or less. When it is more than the said lower limit value, there exists a tendency for development adhesiveness to become favorable, and when it is below the said upper limit value, there exists a tendency for hardenability to become favorable.

作為二價之直鏈狀脂肪族基之具體例,可列舉:亞甲基、伸乙基、伸正丙基、伸正丁基、伸正己基、伸正庚基等。該等中,就硬化性之觀點而言,較佳為亞甲基。 作為二價之支鏈狀脂肪族基之具體例,可列舉上文所述之二價之直鏈狀脂肪族基具有甲基、乙基、正丙基、異丙基、正丁基、異丁基、第二丁基、第三丁基等作為側鏈之結構。 二價之環狀脂肪族基所具有之環數並無特別限定,通常為1以上,較佳為2以上,又,通常為10以下,較佳為5以下。藉由設為上述下限值以上,有顯影密接性變得良好之傾向,又,藉由設為上述上限值以下,有硬化性變得良好之傾向。作為二價之環狀脂肪族基之具體例,可列舉自環己烷環、環庚烷環、環癸烷環、環十二烷環、降烷環、異烷環、金剛烷環等之環中去除2個氫原子而成之基。該等中,就骨架之剛直性之觀點而言,較佳為自金剛烷環中去除2個氫原子而成之基。Specific examples of the divalent linear aliphatic group include a methylene group, an ethyl group, a n-propyl group, a n-butyl group, a n-hexyl group, a n-heptyl group, and the like. Among these, methylene is preferred from the viewpoint of hardenability. Specific examples of the divalent branched aliphatic group include the above-mentioned divalent linear aliphatic group having methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, isopropyl, n-butyl, iso Structures of butyl, second butyl, third butyl, etc. as side chains. The number of rings of the divalent cyclic aliphatic group is not particularly limited, but is usually 1 or more, preferably 2 or more, and usually 10 or less, and preferably 5 or less. When it is more than the said lower limit value, there exists a tendency for development adhesiveness to become favorable, and when it is below the said upper limit value, there exists a tendency for hardenability to become favorable. Specific examples of the divalent cyclic aliphatic group include a cyclohexane ring, a cycloheptane ring, a cyclodecane ring, a cyclododecane ring, a norbornane ring, an isoane ring, and an adamantane ring. A radical formed by removing two hydrogen atoms from a ring. Among these, from the viewpoint of the rigidity of the skeleton, a group obtained by removing two hydrogen atoms from the adamantane ring is preferred.

作為二價脂肪族基可具有之取代基,可列舉:羥基;甲氧基、乙氧基等碳數1~5之烷氧基;硝基;氰基;羧基等。該等中,就合成容易性之觀點而言,較佳為未經取代。Examples of the substituent which the divalent aliphatic group may have include a hydroxyl group; an alkoxy group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms, such as a methoxy group and an ethoxy group; a nitro group; a cyano group; and a carboxyl group. Among these, from the viewpoint of ease of synthesis, it is preferably unsubstituted.

又,作為二價芳香族環基,可列舉二價芳香族烴環基及二價芳香族雜環基。其碳數通常為4以上,較佳為5以上,更佳為6以上,又,較佳為20以下,更佳為15以下,進而較佳為10以下。藉由設為上述下限值以上,有顯影密接性變得良好之傾向,又,藉由設為上述上限值以下,有硬化性變得良好之傾向。Examples of the divalent aromatic ring group include a divalent aromatic hydrocarbon ring group and a divalent aromatic heterocyclic group. The carbon number is usually 4 or more, preferably 5 or more, more preferably 6 or more, and more preferably 20 or less, more preferably 15 or less, and even more preferably 10 or less. When it is more than the said lower limit value, there exists a tendency for development adhesiveness to become favorable, and when it is below the said upper limit value, there exists a tendency for hardenability to become favorable.

作為二價芳香族烴環基中之芳香族烴環,可為單環,亦可為縮合環。作為二價芳香族烴環基,例如可列舉具有2個自由原子價之苯環、萘環、蒽環、菲環、苝環、稠四苯環、芘環、苯并芘環、環、聯三伸苯環、苊環、螢蒽環、茀環等基。 又,作為二價芳香族雜環基中之雜芳香環,可為單環,亦可為縮合環。作為二價芳香族雜環基,例如可列舉具有2個自由原子價之呋喃環、苯并呋喃環、噻吩環、苯并噻吩環、吡咯環、吡唑環、咪唑環、㗁二唑環、吲哚環、咔唑環、吡咯并咪唑環、吡咯并吡唑環、吡咯并吡咯環、噻吩并吡咯環、噻吩并噻吩環、呋喃并吡咯環、呋喃并呋喃環、噻吩并呋喃環、苯并異㗁唑環、苯并異噻唑環、苯并咪唑環、吡啶環、吡環、嗒環、嘧啶環、三環、喹啉環、異喹啉環、㖕啉環、喹㗁啉環、啡啶環、呸啶環、喹唑啉環、喹唑啉酮環、薁環等基。 該等中,就光硬化性之觀點而言,較佳為具有2個自由原子價之苯環或萘環,更佳為具有2個自由原子價之苯環。The aromatic hydrocarbon ring in the divalent aromatic hydrocarbon ring group may be a monocyclic ring or a condensed ring. Examples of the divalent aromatic hydrocarbon ring group include a benzene ring, a naphthalene ring, an anthracene ring, a phenanthrene ring, a fluorene ring, a fused tetraphenyl ring, a fluorene ring, a benzofluorene ring, Ring, bitriphenylene ring, fluorene ring, fluoranthene ring, fluorene ring and other groups. The heteroaromatic ring in the divalent aromatic heterocyclic group may be a monocyclic ring or a condensed ring. Examples of the divalent aromatic heterocyclic group include a furan ring, a benzofuran ring, a thiophene ring, a benzothiophene ring, a pyrrole ring, a pyrazole ring, an imidazole ring, an oxadiazole ring, Indole ring, carbazole ring, pyrroloimidazole ring, pyrrolopyrazole ring, pyrrolopyrrole ring, thienopyrrole ring, thienothiophene ring, furanopyrrole ring, furanofuran ring, thienofuran ring, benzene Acyl isoxazole ring, benzoisothiazole ring, benzimidazole ring, pyridine ring, pyridine ring, data ring, pyrimidine ring, tricyclic ring, quinoline ring, isoquinoline ring, oxoline ring, quinoline ring, Pyridine ring, pyridine ring, quinazoline ring, quinazolinone ring, fluorene ring and other groups. Among these, from the viewpoint of photohardenability, a benzene ring or a naphthalene ring having two free atomic valences is preferred, and a benzene ring having two free atomic valences is more preferred.

作為二價芳香族環基可具有之取代基,可列舉:羥基、甲基、甲氧基、乙基、乙氧基、丙基、丙氧基等。該等中,就硬化性之觀點而言,較佳為未經取代。Examples of the substituent which the divalent aromatic ring group may have include a hydroxyl group, a methyl group, a methoxy group, an ethyl group, an ethoxy group, a propyl group, a propoxy group, and the like. Among these, from the viewpoint of hardenability, it is preferably unsubstituted.

又,作為將1個以上之二價脂肪族基與1個以上之二價芳香族環基連結而成之基,可列舉將1個以上之上文所述之二價脂肪族基與1個以上之上文所述之二價芳香族環基連結而成之基。 二價脂肪族基之個數並無特別限定,通常為1以上,較佳為2以上,且通常為10以下,較佳為5以下,更佳為3以下。藉由設為上述下限值以上,有硬化性變得良好之傾向,又,藉由設為上述上限值以下,有硬化性變得良好之傾向。 二價芳香族環基之個數並無特別限定,通常為1以上,較佳為2以上,且通常為10以下,較佳為5以下,更佳為3以下。藉由設為上述下限值以上,有硬化性變得良好之傾向,又,藉由設為上述上限值以下,有硬化性變得良好之傾向。In addition, examples of the group in which one or more divalent aliphatic groups are connected to one or more divalent aromatic ring groups include one or more divalent aliphatic groups described above and one The above-mentioned divalent aromatic ring group is a group formed by linking. The number of divalent aliphatic groups is not particularly limited, but is usually 1 or more, preferably 2 or more, and usually 10 or less, preferably 5 or less, and more preferably 3 or less. When it is more than the said lower limit value, hardenability tends to become favorable, and when it is less than the said upper limit value, hardenability tends to become favorable. The number of divalent aromatic ring groups is not particularly limited, but is usually 1 or more, preferably 2 or more, and usually 10 or less, preferably 5 or less, and more preferably 3 or less. When it is more than the said lower limit value, hardenability tends to become favorable, and when it is less than the said upper limit value, hardenability tends to become favorable.

作為將1個以上之二價脂肪族基與1個以上之二價芳香族環基連結而成之基之具體例,可列舉下述式(III-3-A)~(III-3-E)所表示之基等。該等中,就顯影溶解性之觀點而言,較佳為下述式(III-3-A)所表示之基。化學式中之﹡表示鍵結鍵。Specific examples of the group in which one or more divalent aliphatic groups are connected to one or more divalent aromatic ring groups include the following formulae (III-3-A) to (III-3-E) ). Among these, from the viewpoint of development solubility, a group represented by the following formula (III-3-A) is preferred. ﹡ In the chemical formula represents a bond.

[化18] [Chemical 18]

如上所述,式(III-3)中之苯環可進而經任意取代基所取代。作為該取代基,例如可列舉:羥基、甲基、甲氧基、乙基、乙氧基、丙基、丙氧基等。取代基之個數亦無特別限定,可為1個,亦可為2個以上。 該等中,就硬化性之觀點而言,較佳為未經取代。As described above, the benzene ring in the formula (III-3) may be further substituted with an arbitrary substituent. Examples of the substituent include a hydroxy group, a methyl group, a methoxy group, an ethyl group, an ethoxy group, a propyl group, and a propoxy group. The number of substituents is also not particularly limited, and may be one or two or more. Among these, from the viewpoint of hardenability, it is preferably unsubstituted.

(部分結構(3-4)) 上述通式(III)所表示之部分結構(3)就硬化性之觀點而言,較佳為含有下述通式(III-4)所表示之部分結構(3-4)。(Partial structure (3-4)) The partial structure (3) represented by the general formula (III) preferably contains a partial structure represented by the following general formula (III-4) from the viewpoint of hardenability ( 3-4).

[化19] [Chemical 19]

上述式(III-4)中,γ表示二價連結基,﹡表示鍵結鍵。式(III-4)中之苯環可進而經任意取代基所取代。In the formula (III-4), γ represents a divalent linking group, and ﹡ represents a bonding bond. The benzene ring in the formula (III-4) may be further substituted with an arbitrary substituent.

作為上述式(III-4)中之γ,可較佳地採用作為上述式(III-1)中之γ而記載者。 又,作為上述式(III-4)中之苯環可具有之任意取代基,可較佳地採用作為上述式(III-1)中之苯環可具有之任意取代基而記載者。As γ in the formula (III-4), those described as γ in the formula (III-1) can be preferably used. Moreover, as an arbitrary substituent which a benzene ring in the said Formula (III-4) may have, it is preferable to use what is described as the arbitrary substituent which a benzene ring in said Formula (III-1) may have.

環氧(甲基)丙烯酸酯系樹脂(b1-A)於部分結構(3-1)~(3-4)中,就顯影溶解性之觀點而言,較佳為具有部分結構(3-1)者。The epoxy (meth) acrylate resin (b1-A) has a partial structure (3-1) in the partial structures (3-1) to (3-4) from the viewpoint of developing solubility. )By.

作為環氧(甲基)丙烯酸酯系樹脂(b1-A)之具體之製造方法,可採用日本專利特開2007-119718號公報所記載之方法。As a specific manufacturing method of the epoxy (meth) acrylate resin (b1-A), a method described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2007-119718 can be adopted.

又,作為環氧(甲基)丙烯酸酯系樹脂,就硬化性之觀點而言,較佳為具有下述通式(i)所表示之部分結構之環氧(甲基)丙烯酸酯系樹脂(b1-B)(以下有時簡記為「環氧(甲基)丙烯酸酯系樹脂(b1-B)」)、或具有下述通式(ii)所表示之部分結構之環氧(甲基)丙烯酸酯系樹脂(b1-C)(以下有時簡記為「環氧(甲基)丙烯酸酯系樹脂(b1-C)」)。又,就可靠性之觀點而言,更佳為環氧(甲基)丙烯酸酯系樹脂(b1-C)。The epoxy (meth) acrylate resin is preferably an epoxy (meth) acrylate resin having a partial structure represented by the following general formula (i) from the viewpoint of curability ( b1-B) (hereinafter may be abbreviated as "epoxy (meth) acrylate resin (b1-B)") or epoxy (methyl) having a partial structure represented by the following general formula (ii) Acrylic resin (b1-C) (Hereinafter, it may be abbreviated as "epoxy (meth) acrylate resin (b1-C)."). From the viewpoint of reliability, an epoxy (meth) acrylate resin (b1-C) is more preferable.

[化20] [Chemical 20]

式(i)中,Ra 表示氫原子或甲基,Rb 表示可具有取代基之二價烴基,﹡表示鍵結鍵。式(i)中之苯環可進而經任意取代基所取代。In formula (i), R a represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, R b represents a divalent hydrocarbon group which may have a substituent, and ﹡ represents a bonding bond. The benzene ring in formula (i) may be further substituted with an arbitrary substituent.

[化21] [Chemical 21]

式(ii)中,Rc 分別獨立地表示氫原子或甲基,Rd 表示具有環狀烴基作為側鏈之二價烴基,﹡表示鍵結鍵。In formula (ii), R c each independently represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, R d represents a divalent hydrocarbon group having a cyclic hydrocarbon group as a side chain, and ﹡ represents a bonding bond.

(Rb ) 於上述式(i)中,Rb 表示可具有取代基之二價烴基。 作為二價烴基,可列舉:二價脂肪族基、二價芳香族環基、將1個以上之二價脂肪族基與1個以上之二價芳香族環基連結而成之基。(R b ) In the formula (i), R b represents a divalent hydrocarbon group which may have a substituent. Examples of the divalent hydrocarbon group include a divalent aliphatic group, a divalent aromatic ring group, and a group in which one or more divalent aliphatic groups are connected to one or more divalent aromatic ring groups.

二價脂肪族基可列舉直鏈狀、支鏈狀、環狀、將該等組合而成者。該等中,就顯影溶解性之觀點而言,較佳為直鏈狀者,另一方面,就顯影密接性之觀點而言,較佳為環狀者。其碳數通常為1以上,較佳為3以上,更佳為6以上,又,較佳為20以下,更佳為15以下,進而較佳為10以下。藉由設為上述下限值以上,有顯影密接性變得良好之傾向,又,藉由設為上述上限值以下,有硬化性變得良好之傾向。Examples of the divalent aliphatic group include linear, branched, cyclic, and combinations thereof. Among these, a linear one is preferable from a viewpoint of development solubility, and a cyclic one is preferable from a viewpoint of development adhesiveness. Its carbon number is usually 1 or more, preferably 3 or more, more preferably 6 or more, and more preferably 20 or less, more preferably 15 or less, and even more preferably 10 or less. When it is more than the said lower limit value, there exists a tendency for development adhesiveness to become favorable, and when it is below the said upper limit value, there exists a tendency for hardenability to become favorable.

作為二價之直鏈狀脂肪族基之具體例,可列舉:亞甲基、伸乙基、伸正丙基、伸正丁基、伸正己基、伸正庚基等。該等中,就硬化性之觀點而言,較佳為亞甲基。 作為二價之支鏈狀脂肪族基之具體例,可列舉上文所述之二價之直鏈狀脂肪族基具有甲基、乙基、正丙基、異丙基、正丁基、異丁基、第二丁基、第三丁基等作為側鏈之結構。 二價之環狀脂肪族基所具有之環數並無特別限定,通常為1以上,較佳為2以上,又,通常為10以下,較佳為5以下。藉由設為上述下限值以上,有顯影密接性變得良好之傾向,又,藉由設為上述上限值以下,有硬化性變得良好之傾向。作為二價之環狀脂肪族基之具體例,可列舉自環己烷環、環庚烷環、環癸烷環、環十二烷環、降烷環、異烷環、金剛烷環等之環中去除2個氫原子而成之基。該等中,就骨架之剛直性之觀點而言,較佳為自金剛烷環中去除2個氫原子而成之基。Specific examples of the divalent linear aliphatic group include a methylene group, an ethyl group, a n-propyl group, a n-butyl group, a n-hexyl group, a n-heptyl group, and the like. Among these, methylene is preferred from the viewpoint of hardenability. Specific examples of the divalent branched aliphatic group include the above-mentioned divalent linear aliphatic group having methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, isopropyl, n-butyl, iso Structures of butyl, second butyl, third butyl, etc. as side chains. The number of rings of the divalent cyclic aliphatic group is not particularly limited, but is usually 1 or more, preferably 2 or more, and usually 10 or less, and preferably 5 or less. When it is more than the said lower limit value, there exists a tendency for development adhesiveness to become favorable, and when it is below the said upper limit value, there exists a tendency for hardenability to become favorable. Specific examples of the divalent cyclic aliphatic group include a cyclohexane ring, a cycloheptane ring, a cyclodecane ring, a cyclododecane ring, a norbornane ring, an isoane ring, and an adamantane ring. A radical formed by removing two hydrogen atoms from a ring. Among these, from the viewpoint of the rigidity of the skeleton, a group obtained by removing two hydrogen atoms from the adamantane ring is preferred.

作為二價脂肪族基可具有之取代基,可列舉:羥基;甲氧基、乙氧基等碳數1~5之烷氧基;硝基;氰基;羧基等。該等中,就合成容易性之觀點而言,較佳為未經取代。Examples of the substituent which the divalent aliphatic group may have include a hydroxyl group; an alkoxy group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms, such as a methoxy group and an ethoxy group; a nitro group; a cyano group; and a carboxyl group. Among these, from the viewpoint of ease of synthesis, it is preferably unsubstituted.

又,作為二價芳香族環基,可列舉二價芳香族烴環基及二價芳香族雜環基。其碳數通常為4以上,較佳為5以上,更佳為6以上,又,較佳為20以下,更佳為15以下,進而較佳為10以下。藉由設為上述下限值以上,有顯影密接性變得良好之傾向,又,藉由設為上述上限值以下,有硬化性變得良好之傾向。Examples of the divalent aromatic ring group include a divalent aromatic hydrocarbon ring group and a divalent aromatic heterocyclic group. The carbon number is usually 4 or more, preferably 5 or more, more preferably 6 or more, and more preferably 20 or less, more preferably 15 or less, and even more preferably 10 or less. When it is more than the said lower limit value, there exists a tendency for development adhesiveness to become favorable, and when it is below the said upper limit value, there exists a tendency for hardenability to become favorable.

作為二價芳香族烴環基中之芳香族烴環,可為單環,亦可為縮合環。作為二價芳香族烴環基,例如可列舉具有2個自由原子價之苯環、萘環、蒽環、菲環、苝環、稠四苯環、芘環、苯并芘環、環、聯三伸苯環、苊環、螢蒽環、茀環等基。 又,作為二價芳香族雜環基中之雜芳香環,可為單環,亦可為縮合環。作為二價芳香族雜環基,例如可列舉具有2個自由原子價之呋喃環、苯并呋喃環、噻吩環、苯并噻吩環、吡咯環、吡唑環、咪唑環、㗁二唑環、吲哚環、咔唑環、吡咯并咪唑環、吡咯并吡唑環、吡咯并吡咯環、噻吩并吡咯環、噻吩并噻吩環、呋喃并吡咯環、呋喃并呋喃環、噻吩并呋喃環、苯并異㗁唑環、苯并異噻唑環、苯并咪唑環、吡啶環、吡環、嗒環、嘧啶環、三環、喹啉環、異喹啉環、㖕啉環、喹㗁啉環、啡啶環、呸啶環、喹唑啉環、喹唑啉酮環、薁環等基。該等中,就光硬化性之觀點而言,較佳為具有2個自由原子價之苯環或萘環,更佳為具有2個自由原子價之苯環。The aromatic hydrocarbon ring in the divalent aromatic hydrocarbon ring group may be a monocyclic ring or a condensed ring. Examples of the divalent aromatic hydrocarbon ring group include a benzene ring, a naphthalene ring, an anthracene ring, a phenanthrene ring, a fluorene ring, a fused tetraphenyl ring, a fluorene ring, a benzofluorene ring, Ring, bitriphenylene ring, fluorene ring, fluoranthene ring, fluorene ring and other groups. The heteroaromatic ring in the divalent aromatic heterocyclic group may be a monocyclic ring or a condensed ring. Examples of the divalent aromatic heterocyclic group include a furan ring, a benzofuran ring, a thiophene ring, a benzothiophene ring, a pyrrole ring, a pyrazole ring, an imidazole ring, an oxadiazole ring, Indole ring, carbazole ring, pyrroloimidazole ring, pyrrolopyrazole ring, pyrrolopyrrole ring, thienopyrrole ring, thienothiophene ring, furanopyrrole ring, furanofuran ring, thienofuran ring, benzene Acyl isoxazole ring, benzoisothiazole ring, benzimidazole ring, pyridine ring, pyridine ring, data ring, pyrimidine ring, tricyclic ring, quinoline ring, isoquinoline ring, oxoline ring, quinoline ring, Pyridine ring, pyridine ring, quinazoline ring, quinazolinone ring, fluorene ring and other groups. Among these, from the viewpoint of photohardenability, a benzene ring or a naphthalene ring having two free atomic valences is preferred, and a benzene ring having two free atomic valences is more preferred.

作為二價芳香族環基可具有之取代基,可列舉:羥基、甲基、甲氧基、乙基、乙氧基、丙基、丙氧基等。該等中,就硬化性之觀點而言,較佳為未經取代。Examples of the substituent which the divalent aromatic ring group may have include a hydroxyl group, a methyl group, a methoxy group, an ethyl group, an ethoxy group, a propyl group, a propoxy group, and the like. Among these, from the viewpoint of hardenability, it is preferably unsubstituted.

又,作為將1個以上之二價脂肪族基與1個以上之二價芳香族環基連結而成之基,可列舉將1個以上之上文所述之二價脂肪族基與1個以上之上文所述之二價芳香族環基連結而成之基。 二價脂肪族基之個數並無特別限定,通常為1以上,較佳為2以上,且通常為10以下,較佳為5以下,更佳為3以下。藉由設為上述下限值以上,有顯影密接性變得良好之傾向,又,藉由設為上述上限值以下,有硬化性變得良好之傾向。 二價芳香族環基之個數並無特別限定,通常為1以上,較佳為2以上,且通常為10以下,較佳為5以下,更佳為3以下。藉由設為上述下限值以上,有硬化性變得良好之傾向,又,藉由設為上述上限值以下,有硬化性變得良好之傾向。In addition, examples of the group in which one or more divalent aliphatic groups are connected to one or more divalent aromatic ring groups include one or more divalent aliphatic groups described above and one The above-mentioned divalent aromatic ring group is a group formed by linking. The number of divalent aliphatic groups is not particularly limited, but is usually 1 or more, preferably 2 or more, and usually 10 or less, preferably 5 or less, and more preferably 3 or less. When it is more than the said lower limit value, there exists a tendency for development adhesiveness to become favorable, and when it is below the said upper limit value, there exists a tendency for hardenability to become favorable. The number of divalent aromatic ring groups is not particularly limited, but is usually 1 or more, preferably 2 or more, and usually 10 or less, preferably 5 or less, and more preferably 3 or less. When it is more than the said lower limit value, hardenability tends to become favorable, and when it is less than the said upper limit value, hardenability tends to become favorable.

作為將1個以上之二價脂肪族基與1個以上之二價芳香族環基連結而成之基之具體例,可列舉下述式(i-A)~(i-E)所表示之基等。該等中,就顯影溶解性之觀點而言,較佳為下述式(i-A)所表示之基。化學式中之﹡表示鍵結鍵。Specific examples of the group in which one or more divalent aliphatic groups are connected to one or more divalent aromatic ring groups include a group represented by the following formulae (i-A) to (i-E). Among these, from the viewpoint of development solubility, a base represented by the following formula (i-A) is preferred. ﹡ In the chemical formula represents a bond.

[化22] [Chemical 22]

如上所述,式(i)中之苯環可進而經任意取代基所取代。作為該取代基,例如可列舉:羥基、甲基、甲氧基、乙基、乙氧基、丙基、丙氧基等。取代基之個數亦無特別限定,可為1個,亦可為2個以上。 該等中,就硬化性之觀點而言,較佳為未經取代。As described above, the benzene ring in the formula (i) may be further substituted with an arbitrary substituent. Examples of the substituent include a hydroxy group, a methyl group, a methoxy group, an ethyl group, an ethoxy group, a propyl group, and a propoxy group. The number of substituents is also not particularly limited, and may be one or two or more. Among these, from the viewpoint of hardenability, it is preferably unsubstituted.

又,上述通式(i)所表示之部分結構就硬化性之觀點而言,較佳為下述通式(i-1)所表示之部分結構。The partial structure represented by the general formula (i) is preferably a partial structure represented by the following general formula (i-1) from the viewpoint of hardenability.

[化23] [Chemical 23]

式(i-1)中,Ra 及Rb 與上述式(i)中者含義相同,RX 表示氫原子或多元酸殘基,﹡表示鍵結鍵。式(i-1)中之苯環可進而經任意取代基所取代。In the formula (i-1), R a and R b have the same meanings as in the above formula (i), R X represents a hydrogen atom or a polyacid residue, and ﹡ represents a bonding bond. The benzene ring in the formula (i-1) may be further substituted with an arbitrary substituent.

所謂多元酸殘基意指自多元酸或其酐中去除1個OH基而成之一價基。作為多元酸,可列舉選自順丁烯二酸、丁二酸、伊康酸、鄰苯二甲酸、四氫鄰苯二甲酸、六氫鄰苯二甲酸、均苯四甲酸、偏苯三甲酸、二苯甲酮四羧酸、甲基六氫鄰苯二甲酸、內亞甲基四氫鄰苯二甲酸、氯橋酸、甲基四氫鄰苯二甲酸、聯苯四羧酸中之一種或兩種以上。 該等中,就圖案化特性之觀點而言,作為多元酸,較佳為順丁烯二酸、丁二酸、伊康酸、鄰苯二甲酸、四氫鄰苯二甲酸、六氫鄰苯二甲酸、均苯四甲酸、偏苯三甲酸、聯苯四羧酸,更佳為四氫鄰苯二甲酸、聯苯四羧酸、四氫鄰苯二甲酸、聯苯四羧酸。The polybasic acid residue means a monovalent group obtained by removing one OH group from a polybasic acid or an anhydride thereof. Examples of the polybasic acid include maleic acid, succinic acid, itaconic acid, phthalic acid, tetrahydrophthalic acid, hexahydrophthalic acid, pyromellitic acid, trimellitic acid , Benzophenone tetracarboxylic acid, methylhexahydrophthalic acid, endomethylenetetrahydrophthalic acid, chlorobridged acid, methyltetrahydrophthalic acid, biphenyltetracarboxylic acid Or two or more. Among these, from the viewpoint of patterning characteristics, as the polybasic acid, maleic acid, succinic acid, itaconic acid, phthalic acid, tetrahydrophthalic acid, and hexahydrophthalic acid are preferred. Dicarboxylic acid, pyromellitic acid, trimellitic acid, biphenyltetracarboxylic acid, more preferably tetrahydrophthalic acid, biphenyltetracarboxylic acid, tetrahydrophthalic acid, and biphenyltetracarboxylic acid.

環氧(甲基)丙烯酸酯系樹脂(b1-B)1分子中所含之上述式(i-1)所表示之部分結構可為一種,亦可為兩種以上,例如,可混合存在RX 為氫原子者與RX 為多元酸殘基者。The partial structure represented by the formula (i-1) contained in one molecule of the epoxy (meth) acrylate resin (b1-B) may be one type, or two or more types. For example, R may be mixed X is a hydrogen atom and R X is a polyacid residue.

又,環氧(甲基)丙烯酸酯系樹脂(b1-B)1分子中所含之上述式(i)所表示之部分結構之個數並無特別限定,較佳為1以上,更佳為3以上,又,較佳為20以下,進而較佳為15以下。藉由設為上述下限值以上,有硬化性變得良好之傾向,又,藉由設為上述上限值以下,有顯影溶解性變得良好之傾向。The number of partial structures represented by the formula (i) contained in one molecule of the epoxy (meth) acrylate resin (b1-B) is not particularly limited, but it is preferably 1 or more, and more preferably 3 or more, and preferably 20 or less, and further preferably 15 or less. When it is more than the said lower limit value, hardenability tends to become favorable, and when it is below the said upper limit value, the developing solubility tends to become favorable.

以下列舉環氧(甲基)丙烯酸酯系樹脂(b1-B)之具體例。Specific examples of the epoxy (meth) acrylate resin (b1-B) are listed below.

[化24] [Chemical 24]

[化25] [Chemical 25]

[化26] [Chemical 26]

[化27] [Chemical 27]

(Rd ) 於上述式(ii)中,Rd 表示具有環狀烴基作為側鏈之二價烴基。 作為環狀烴基,可列舉脂肪族環基或芳香族環基。(R d ) In the above formula (ii), R d represents a divalent hydrocarbon group having a cyclic hydrocarbon group as a side chain. Examples of the cyclic hydrocarbon group include an aliphatic cyclic group and an aromatic cyclic group.

脂肪族環基所具有之環數並無特別限定,通常為1以上,較佳為2以上,又,通常為10以下,較佳為5以下,更佳為3以下。藉由設為上述下限值以上,有顯影密接性變得良好之傾向,又,藉由設為上述上限值以下,有硬化性變得良好之傾向。 又,脂肪族環基之碳數通常為4以上,較佳為6以上,更佳為8以上,又,較佳為40以下,更佳為30以下,進而較佳為20以下,尤佳為15以下。藉由設為上述下限值以上,有顯影密接性變得良好之傾向,又,藉由設為上述上限值以下,有硬化性變得良好之傾向。 作為脂肪族環基中之脂肪族環之具體例,可列舉:環己烷環、環庚烷環、環癸烷環、環十二烷環、降烷環、異烷環、金剛烷環等。該等中,就可靠性之觀點而言,較佳為金剛烷環。The number of rings of the aliphatic cyclic group is not particularly limited, but it is usually 1 or more, preferably 2 or more, and usually 10 or less, preferably 5 or less, and more preferably 3 or less. When it is more than the said lower limit value, there exists a tendency for development adhesiveness to become favorable, and when it is below the said upper limit value, there exists a tendency for hardenability to become favorable. The number of carbon atoms of the aliphatic ring group is usually 4 or more, preferably 6 or more, more preferably 8 or more, and more preferably 40 or less, more preferably 30 or less, even more preferably 20 or less, particularly preferably 15 or less. When it is more than the said lower limit value, there exists a tendency for development adhesiveness to become favorable, and when it is below the said upper limit value, there exists a tendency for hardenability to become favorable. Specific examples of the aliphatic ring in the aliphatic ring group include a cyclohexane ring, a cycloheptane ring, a cyclodecane ring, a cyclododecane ring, a norane ring, an isoane ring, and an adamantane ring. . Among these, from the viewpoint of reliability, an adamantane ring is preferred.

另一方面,芳香族環基所具有之環數並無特別限定,通常為1以上,較佳為2以上,更佳為3以上,又,通常為10以下,較佳為5以下,更佳為4以下。藉由設為上述下限值以上,有顯影密接性變得良好之傾向,又,藉由設為上述上限值以下,有硬化性變得良好之傾向。 作為芳香族環基,可列舉芳香族烴環基、芳香族雜環基。又,芳香族環基之碳數通常為4以上,較佳為6以上,更佳為8以上,進而更佳為10以上,尤佳為12以上,又,較佳為40以下,更佳為30以下,進而較佳為20以下,尤佳為15以下。藉由設為上述下限值以上,有顯影密接性變得良好之傾向,又,藉由設為上述上限值以下,有硬化性變得良好之傾向。 作為芳香族環基中之芳香族環之具體例,可列舉:苯環、萘環、蒽環、菲環、苝環、稠四苯環、芘環、苯并芘環、環、聯三伸苯環、苊環、螢蒽環、茀環等。該等中,就圖案化特性之觀點而言,較佳為茀環。On the other hand, the number of rings of the aromatic ring group is not particularly limited, and is usually 1 or more, preferably 2 or more, more preferably 3 or more, and usually 10 or less, preferably 5 or less, more preferably It is 4 or less. When it is more than the said lower limit value, there exists a tendency for development adhesiveness to become favorable, and when it is below the said upper limit value, there exists a tendency for hardenability to become favorable. Examples of the aromatic ring group include an aromatic hydrocarbon ring group and an aromatic heterocyclic group. The carbon number of the aromatic ring group is usually 4 or more, preferably 6 or more, more preferably 8 or more, still more preferably 10 or more, even more preferably 12 or more, and still more preferably 40 or less, more preferably 30 or less, more preferably 20 or less, and particularly preferably 15 or less. When it is more than the said lower limit value, there exists a tendency for development adhesiveness to become favorable, and when it is below the said upper limit value, there exists a tendency for hardenability to become favorable. Specific examples of the aromatic ring in the aromatic ring group include a benzene ring, a naphthalene ring, an anthracene ring, a phenanthrene ring, a fluorene ring, a fused tetraphenyl ring, a fluorene ring, a benzofluorene ring, Ring, bitriphenylene ring, fluorene ring, fluoranthene ring, fluorene ring, etc. Among these, from the viewpoint of patterning characteristics, a ring is preferred.

又,具有環狀烴基作為側鏈之二價烴基中之二價烴基並無特別限定,例如可列舉二價脂肪族基、二價芳香族環基、將1個以上之二價脂肪族基與1個以上之二價芳香族環基連結而成之基。The divalent hydrocarbon group in the divalent hydrocarbon group having a cyclic hydrocarbon group as a side chain is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include a divalent aliphatic group, a divalent aromatic ring group, and one or more divalent aliphatic groups. A group in which one or more divalent aromatic ring groups are linked.

二價脂肪族基可列舉直鏈狀、支鏈狀、環狀、將該等組合而成者。該等中,就相溶性之觀點而言,較佳為直鏈狀者,另一方面,就可靠性之觀點而言,較佳為環狀者。其碳數通常為1以上,較佳為3以上,更佳為6以上,又,較佳為25以下,更佳為20以下,進而較佳為15以下。藉由設為上述下限值以上,有顯影密接性變得良好之傾向,又,藉由設為上述上限值以下,有硬化性變得良好之傾向。Examples of the divalent aliphatic group include linear, branched, cyclic, and combinations thereof. Among these, a linear one is preferable from a compatibility viewpoint, and a cyclic one is preferable from a reliability viewpoint. Its carbon number is usually 1 or more, preferably 3 or more, more preferably 6 or more, and more preferably 25 or less, more preferably 20 or less, and even more preferably 15 or less. When it is more than the said lower limit value, there exists a tendency for development adhesiveness to become favorable, and when it is below the said upper limit value, there exists a tendency for hardenability to become favorable.

作為二價之直鏈狀脂肪族基之具體例,可列舉:亞甲基、伸乙基、伸正丙基、伸正丁基、伸正己基、伸正庚基等。該等中,就硬化性之觀點而言,較佳為亞甲基。 作為二價之支鏈狀脂肪族基之具體例,可列舉於上文所述之二價之直鏈狀脂肪族基具有甲基、乙基、正丙基、異丙基、正丁基、異丁基、第二丁基、第三丁基等作為側鏈之結構。 二價之環狀脂肪族基所具有之環數並無特別限定,通常為1以上,較佳為2以上,又,通常為10以下,較佳為5以下,進而較佳為3以下。藉由設為上述下限值以上,有顯影密接性變得良好之傾向,又,藉由設為上述上限值以下,有硬化性變得良好之傾向。作為二價之環狀脂肪族基之具體例,可列舉自環己烷環、環庚烷環、環癸烷環、環十二烷環、降烷環、異烷環、金剛烷環等之環中去除2個氫原子而成之基。該等中,就可靠性之觀點而言,較佳為自金剛烷環中去除2個氫原子而成之基。Specific examples of the divalent linear aliphatic group include a methylene group, an ethyl group, a n-propyl group, a n-butyl group, a n-hexyl group, a n-heptyl group, and the like. Among these, methylene is preferred from the viewpoint of hardenability. As specific examples of the divalent branched aliphatic group, the divalent linear aliphatic group described above has methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, isopropyl, n-butyl, Isobutyl, second butyl, third butyl, and the like have a side chain structure. The number of rings of the divalent cyclic aliphatic group is not particularly limited, and is usually 1 or more, preferably 2 or more, and usually 10 or less, preferably 5 or less, and further preferably 3 or less. When it is more than the said lower limit value, there exists a tendency for development adhesiveness to become favorable, and when it is below the said upper limit value, there exists a tendency for hardenability to become favorable. Specific examples of the divalent cyclic aliphatic group include a cyclohexane ring, a cycloheptane ring, a cyclodecane ring, a cyclododecane ring, a norbornane ring, an isoane ring, and an adamantane ring. A radical formed by removing two hydrogen atoms from a ring. Among these, from the viewpoint of reliability, a group obtained by removing two hydrogen atoms from an adamantane ring is preferred.

作為二價脂肪族基可具有之取代基,可列舉:羥基;甲氧基、乙氧基等碳數1~5之烷氧基;硝基;氰基;羧基等。該等中,就合成容易性之觀點而言,較佳為未經取代。Examples of the substituent which the divalent aliphatic group may have include a hydroxyl group; an alkoxy group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms, such as a methoxy group and an ethoxy group; a nitro group; a cyano group; and a carboxyl group. Among these, from the viewpoint of ease of synthesis, it is preferably unsubstituted.

又,作為二價芳香族環基,可列舉二價芳香族烴環基及二價芳香族雜環基。其碳數通常為4以上,較佳為5以上,更佳為6以上,又,較佳為30以下,更佳為20以下,進而較佳為15以下。藉由設為上述下限值以上,有顯影密接性變得良好之傾向,又,藉由設為上述上限值以下,有硬化性變得良好之傾向。Examples of the divalent aromatic ring group include a divalent aromatic hydrocarbon ring group and a divalent aromatic heterocyclic group. Its carbon number is usually 4 or more, preferably 5 or more, more preferably 6 or more, and further preferably 30 or less, more preferably 20 or less, and even more preferably 15 or less. When it is more than the said lower limit value, there exists a tendency for development adhesiveness to become favorable, and when it is below the said upper limit value, there exists a tendency for hardenability to become favorable.

作為二價芳香族烴環基中之芳香族烴環,可為單環,亦可為縮合環。作為二價芳香族烴環基,例如可列舉具有2個自由原子價之苯環、萘環、蒽環、菲環、苝環、稠四苯環、芘環、苯并芘環、環、聯三伸苯環、苊環、螢蒽環、茀環等基。 又,作為芳香族雜環基中之雜芳香環,可為單環,亦可為縮合環。作為二價芳香族雜環基,例如可列舉具有2個自由原子價之呋喃環、苯并呋喃環、噻吩環、苯并噻吩環、吡咯環、吡唑環、咪唑環、㗁二唑環、吲哚環、咔唑環、吡咯并咪唑環、吡咯并吡唑環、吡咯并吡咯環、噻吩并吡咯環、噻吩并噻吩環、呋喃并吡咯環、呋喃并呋喃環、噻吩并呋喃環、苯并異㗁唑環、苯并異噻唑環、苯并咪唑環、吡啶環、吡環、嗒環、嘧啶環、三環、喹啉環、異喹啉環、㖕啉環、喹㗁啉環、啡啶環、呸啶環、喹唑啉環、喹唑啉酮環、薁環等基。 二價芳香族環基中,就圖案化特性之觀點而言,較佳為具有2個自由原子價之苯環、具有2個自由原子價之萘環、或具有2個自由原子價之茀環,更佳為具有2個自由原子價之茀環。The aromatic hydrocarbon ring in the divalent aromatic hydrocarbon ring group may be a monocyclic ring or a condensed ring. Examples of the divalent aromatic hydrocarbon ring group include a benzene ring, a naphthalene ring, an anthracene ring, a phenanthrene ring, a fluorene ring, a fused tetraphenyl ring, a fluorene ring, a benzofluorene ring, Ring, bitriphenylene ring, fluorene ring, fluoranthene ring, fluorene ring and other groups. The heteroaromatic ring in the aromatic heterocyclic group may be a monocyclic ring or a condensed ring. Examples of the divalent aromatic heterocyclic group include a furan ring, a benzofuran ring, a thiophene ring, a benzothiophene ring, a pyrrole ring, a pyrazole ring, an imidazole ring, an oxadiazole ring, Indole ring, carbazole ring, pyrroloimidazole ring, pyrrolopyrazole ring, pyrrolopyrrole ring, thienopyrrole ring, thienothiophene ring, furanopyrrole ring, furanofuran ring, thienofuran ring, benzene Acyl isoxazole ring, benzoisothiazole ring, benzimidazole ring, pyridine ring, pyridine ring, data ring, pyrimidine ring, tricyclic ring, quinoline ring, isoquinoline ring, oxoline ring, quinoline ring, Pyridine ring, pyridine ring, quinazoline ring, quinazolinone ring, fluorene ring and other groups. Among the divalent aromatic ring groups, from the viewpoint of patterning characteristics, a benzene ring having two free atomic valences, a naphthalene ring having two free atomic valences, or a fluorene ring having two free atomic valences is preferred. , More preferably a fluorene ring with 2 free atomic valences.

作為二價芳香族環基可具有之取代基,可列舉:羥基、甲基、甲氧基、乙基、乙氧基、丙基、丙氧基等。該等中,就顯影溶解性、耐吸濕性之觀點而言,較佳為未經取代。Examples of the substituent which the divalent aromatic ring group may have include a hydroxyl group, a methyl group, a methoxy group, an ethyl group, an ethoxy group, a propyl group, a propoxy group, and the like. Among these, from the viewpoint of developing solubility and moisture absorption resistance, it is preferably unsubstituted.

又,作為將1個以上之二價脂肪族基與1個以上之二價芳香族環基連結而成之基,可列舉將1個以上之上文所述之二價脂肪族基與1個以上之上文所述之二價芳香族環基連結而成之基。 二價脂肪族基之個數並無特別限定,通常為1以上,較佳為2以上,且通常為10以下,較佳為5以下,更佳為3以下。藉由設為上述下限值以上,有顯影密接性變得良好之傾向,又,藉由設為上述上限值以下,有硬化性變得良好之傾向。 二價芳香族環基之個數並無特別限定,通常為1以上,較佳為2以上,且通常為10以下,較佳為5以下,更佳為3以下。藉由設為上述下限值以上,有顯影密接性變得良好之傾向,又,藉由設為上述上限值以下,有硬化性變得良好之傾向。In addition, examples of the group in which one or more divalent aliphatic groups are connected to one or more divalent aromatic ring groups include one or more divalent aliphatic groups described above and one The above-mentioned divalent aromatic ring group is a group formed by linking. The number of divalent aliphatic groups is not particularly limited, but is usually 1 or more, preferably 2 or more, and usually 10 or less, preferably 5 or less, and more preferably 3 or less. When it is more than the said lower limit value, there exists a tendency for development adhesiveness to become favorable, and when it is below the said upper limit value, there exists a tendency for hardenability to become favorable. The number of divalent aromatic ring groups is not particularly limited, but is usually 1 or more, preferably 2 or more, and usually 10 or less, preferably 5 or less, and more preferably 3 or less. When it is more than the said lower limit value, there exists a tendency for development adhesiveness to become favorable, and when it is below the said upper limit value, there exists a tendency for hardenability to become favorable.

作為將1個以上之二價脂肪族基與1個以上之二價芳香族環基連結而成之基之具體例,可列舉上述式(i-A)~(i-E)所表示之基等。該等中,就可靠性之觀點而言,較佳為上述式(i-C)所表示之基。Specific examples of the group in which one or more divalent aliphatic groups are connected to one or more divalent aromatic ring groups include the groups represented by the formulae (i-A) to (i-E). Among these, from the viewpoint of reliability, the base represented by the formula (i-C) is preferable.

作為側鏈之環狀烴基於該等二價烴基上之鍵結態樣並無特別限定,例如可列舉以該側鏈取代脂肪族基或芳香族環基之1個氫原子而成之態樣、或包括脂肪族基之1個碳原子在內而構成作為側鏈之環狀烴基之態樣。The cyclic hydrocarbon as the side chain is not particularly limited based on the bonding state of the divalent hydrocarbon group, and examples include a state in which the side chain is substituted for one hydrogen atom of an aliphatic group or an aromatic ring group. Or a cyclic hydrocarbon group as a side chain including one carbon atom of an aliphatic group.

又,上述式(ii)所表示之部分結構就相溶性之觀點而言,較佳為下述式(ii-1)所表示之部分結構。The partial structure represented by the formula (ii) is preferably a partial structure represented by the following formula (ii-1) from the viewpoint of compatibility.

[化28] [Chemical 28]

式(ii-1)中,Rc 與上述式(ii)含義相同,Rα 表示可具有取代基之一價環狀烴基,n為1以上之整數,﹡表示鍵結鍵。式(ii-1)中之苯環可進而經任意取代基所取代。In formula (ii-1), R c has the same meaning as in formula (ii) above, R α represents a monovalent cyclic hydrocarbon group which may have a substituent, n is an integer of 1 or more, and ﹡ represents a bonding bond. The benzene ring in the formula (ii-1) may be further substituted with an arbitrary substituent.

(Rα ) 於上述式(ii-1)中,Rα 表示可具有取代基之一價環狀烴基。 作為環狀烴基,可列舉脂肪族環基或芳香族環基。(R α ) In the formula (ii-1), R α represents a monovalent cyclic hydrocarbon group which may have a substituent. Examples of the cyclic hydrocarbon group include an aliphatic cyclic group and an aromatic cyclic group.

脂肪族環基所具有之環數並無特別限定,通常為1以上,較佳為2以上,又,通常為6以下,較佳為4以下,更佳為3以下。藉由設為上述下限值以上,有顯影密接性變得良好之傾向,又,藉由設為上述上限值以下,有硬化性變得良好之傾向。 又,脂肪族環基之碳數通常為4以上,較佳為6以上,更佳為8以上,又,較佳為40以下,更佳為30以下,進而較佳為20以下,尤佳為15以下。藉由設為上述下限值以上,有顯影密接性變得良好之傾向,又,藉由設為上述上限值以下,有硬化性變得良好之傾向。 作為脂肪族環基中之脂肪族環之具體例,可列舉:環己烷環、環庚烷環、環癸烷環、環十二烷環、降烷環、異烷環、金剛烷環等。該等中,就相溶性之觀點而言,較佳為金剛烷環。The number of rings of the aliphatic cyclic group is not particularly limited, but it is usually 1 or more, preferably 2 or more, and usually 6 or less, preferably 4 or less, and more preferably 3 or less. When it is more than the said lower limit value, there exists a tendency for development adhesiveness to become favorable, and when it is below the said upper limit value, there exists a tendency for hardenability to become favorable. The number of carbon atoms of the aliphatic ring group is usually 4 or more, preferably 6 or more, more preferably 8 or more, and more preferably 40 or less, more preferably 30 or less, even more preferably 20 or less, particularly preferably 15 or less. When it is more than the said lower limit value, there exists a tendency for development adhesiveness to become favorable, and when it is below the said upper limit value, there exists a tendency for hardenability to become favorable. Specific examples of the aliphatic ring in the aliphatic ring group include a cyclohexane ring, a cycloheptane ring, a cyclodecane ring, a cyclododecane ring, a norane ring, an isoane ring, and an adamantane ring. . Among these, from the viewpoint of compatibility, an adamantane ring is preferred.

另一方面,芳香族環基所具有之環數並無特別限定,通常為1以上,較佳為2以上,更佳為3以上,又,通常為10以下,較佳為5以下。藉由設為上述下限值以上,有顯影密接性變得良好之傾向,又,藉由設為上述上限值以下,有硬化性變得良好之傾向。 作為芳香族環基,可列舉芳香族烴環基、芳香族雜環基。又,芳香族環基之碳數通常為4以上,較佳為5以上,更佳為6以上,又,較佳為30以下,更佳為20以下,進而較佳為15以下。藉由設為上述下限值以上,有顯影密接性變得良好之傾向,又,藉由設為上述上限值以下,有硬化性變得良好之傾向。 作為芳香族環基中之芳香族環之具體例,可列舉:苯環、萘環、蒽環、菲環、茀環等。該等中,就可靠性之觀點而言,較佳為茀環。On the other hand, the number of rings of the aromatic ring group is not particularly limited, but it is usually 1 or more, preferably 2 or more, more preferably 3 or more, and usually 10 or less, and preferably 5 or less. When it is more than the said lower limit value, there exists a tendency for development adhesiveness to become favorable, and when it is below the said upper limit value, there exists a tendency for hardenability to become favorable. Examples of the aromatic ring group include an aromatic hydrocarbon ring group and an aromatic heterocyclic group. The number of carbon atoms of the aromatic ring group is usually 4 or more, preferably 5 or more, more preferably 6 or more, still more preferably 30 or less, more preferably 20 or less, and even more preferably 15 or less. When it is more than the said lower limit value, there exists a tendency for development adhesiveness to become favorable, and when it is below the said upper limit value, there exists a tendency for hardenability to become favorable. Specific examples of the aromatic ring in the aromatic ring group include a benzene ring, a naphthalene ring, an anthracene ring, a phenanthrene ring, and a fluorene ring. Among these, from the viewpoint of reliability, the ring is preferred.

作為環狀烴基可具有之取代基,可列舉:羥基、甲基、乙基、正丙基、異丙基、正丁基、第二丁基、第三丁基、戊基、異戊基等碳數1~5之烷基;甲氧基、乙氧基等碳數1~5之烷氧基;硝基;氰基;羧基等。該等中,就合成之容易性之觀點而言,較佳為未經取代。Examples of the substituent which the cyclic hydrocarbon group may have include a hydroxyl group, a methyl group, an ethyl group, an n-propyl group, an isopropyl group, an n-butyl group, a second butyl group, a third butyl group, a pentyl group, an isopentyl group, and the like. Alkyl groups having 1 to 5 carbons; alkoxy groups having 1 to 5 carbons such as methoxy and ethoxy; nitro; cyano; carboxyl and the like. Among these, from the viewpoint of ease of synthesis, it is preferably unsubstituted.

n表示1以上之整數,較佳為2以上,又,較佳為3以下。藉由設為上述下限值以上,有顯影密接性變得良好之傾向,又,藉由設為上述上限值以下,有硬化性變得良好之傾向。n represents an integer of 1 or more, preferably 2 or more, and more preferably 3 or less. When it is more than the said lower limit value, there exists a tendency for development adhesiveness to become favorable, and when it is below the said upper limit value, there exists a tendency for hardenability to become favorable.

該等中,就相溶性之觀點而言,Rα 較佳為一價脂肪族環基,更佳為金剛烷基。Among these, from the viewpoint of compatibility, R α is preferably a monovalent aliphatic cyclic group, and more preferably adamantyl.

如上所述,式(ii-1)中之苯環可進而經任意取代基所取代。作為該取代基,例如可列舉:羥基、甲基、甲氧基、乙基、乙氧基、丙基、丙氧基等。取代基之個數亦無特別限定,可為1個,亦可為2個以上。 該等中,就圖案化特性之觀點而言,較佳為未經取代。As described above, the benzene ring in the formula (ii-1) may be further substituted with an arbitrary substituent. Examples of the substituent include a hydroxy group, a methyl group, a methoxy group, an ethyl group, an ethoxy group, a propyl group, and a propoxy group. The number of substituents is also not particularly limited, and may be one or two or more. Among these, from the viewpoint of patterning characteristics, it is preferably unsubstituted.

以下列舉上述式(ii-1)所表示之部分結構之具體例。Specific examples of the partial structure represented by the formula (ii-1) are listed below.

[化29] [Chemical 29]

[化30] [Chemical 30]

[化31] [Chemical 31]

[化32] [Chemical 32]

[化33] [Chemical 33]

又,上述通式(ii)所表示之部分結構就可靠性之觀點而言,較佳為下述通式(ii-2)所表示之部分結構。The partial structure represented by the general formula (ii) is preferably a partial structure represented by the following general formula (ii-2) from the viewpoint of reliability.

[化34] [Chem 34]

式(ii-2)中,Rc 與上述式(ii)含義相同,Rβ 表示可具有取代基之二價環狀烴基,﹡表示鍵結鍵。式(ii-2)中之苯環可進而經任意取代基所取代。In the formula (ii-2), R c has the same meaning as the above formula (ii), R β represents a divalent cyclic hydrocarbon group which may have a substituent, and ﹡ represents a bonding bond. The benzene ring in the formula (ii-2) may be further substituted with an arbitrary substituent.

(Rβ ) 於上述式(ii-2)中,Rβ 表示可具有取代基之二價環狀烴基。 作為環狀烴基,可列舉脂肪族環基或芳香族環基。(R β ) In the formula (ii-2), R β represents a divalent cyclic hydrocarbon group which may have a substituent. Examples of the cyclic hydrocarbon group include an aliphatic cyclic group and an aromatic cyclic group.

脂肪族環基所具有之環數並無特別限定,通常為1以上,較佳為2以上,又,通常為10以下,較佳為5以下。藉由設為上述下限值以上,有顯影密接性變得良好之傾向,又,藉由設為上述上限值以下,有硬化性變得良好之傾向。 又,脂肪族環基之碳數通常為4以上,較佳為6以上,更佳為8以上,又,較佳為40以下,更佳為35以下,進而較佳為30以下。藉由設為上述下限值以上,有顯影密接性變得良好之傾向,又,藉由設為上述上限值以下,有硬化性變得良好之傾向。 作為脂肪族環基中之脂肪族環之具體例,可列舉:環己烷環、環庚烷環、環癸烷環、環十二烷環、降烷環、異烷環、金剛烷環等。該等中,就相溶性之觀點而言,較佳為金剛烷環。The number of rings of the aliphatic cyclic group is not particularly limited, but it is usually 1 or more, preferably 2 or more, and usually 10 or less, and preferably 5 or less. When it is more than the said lower limit value, there exists a tendency for development adhesiveness to become favorable, and when it is below the said upper limit value, there exists a tendency for hardenability to become favorable. The number of carbon atoms of the aliphatic ring group is usually 4 or more, preferably 6 or more, more preferably 8 or more, still more preferably 40 or less, more preferably 35 or less, and even more preferably 30 or less. When it is more than the said lower limit value, there exists a tendency for development adhesiveness to become favorable, and when it is below the said upper limit value, there exists a tendency for hardenability to become favorable. Specific examples of the aliphatic ring in the aliphatic ring group include a cyclohexane ring, a cycloheptane ring, a cyclodecane ring, a cyclododecane ring, a norane ring, an isoane ring, and an adamantane ring. . Among these, from the viewpoint of compatibility, an adamantane ring is preferred.

另一方面,芳香族環基所具有之環數並無特別限定,通常為1以上,較佳為2以上,更佳為3以上,又,通常為10以下,較佳為5以下。藉由設為上述下限值以上,有顯影密接性變得良好之傾向,又,藉由設為上述上限值以下,有硬化性變得良好之傾向。 作為芳香族環基,可列舉芳香族烴環基、芳香族雜環基。又,芳香族環基之碳數通常為4以上,較佳為6以上,更佳為8以上,進而較佳為10以上,又,較佳為40以下,更佳為30以下,進而較佳為20以下,尤佳為15以下。藉由設為上述下限值以上,有顯影密接性變得良好之傾向,又,藉由設為上述上限值以下,有硬化性變得良好之傾向。 作為芳香族環基中之芳香族環之具體例,可列舉:苯環、萘環、蒽環、菲環、茀環等。該等中,就可靠性之觀點而言,較佳為茀環。On the other hand, the number of rings of the aromatic ring group is not particularly limited, but it is usually 1 or more, preferably 2 or more, more preferably 3 or more, and usually 10 or less, and preferably 5 or less. When it is more than the said lower limit value, there exists a tendency for development adhesiveness to become favorable, and when it is below the said upper limit value, there exists a tendency for hardenability to become favorable. Examples of the aromatic ring group include an aromatic hydrocarbon ring group and an aromatic heterocyclic group. The number of carbon atoms of the aromatic ring group is usually 4 or more, preferably 6 or more, more preferably 8 or more, even more preferably 10 or more, still more preferably 40 or less, more preferably 30 or less, and even more preferably It is 20 or less, and particularly preferably 15 or less. When it is more than the said lower limit value, there exists a tendency for development adhesiveness to become favorable, and when it is below the said upper limit value, there exists a tendency for hardenability to become favorable. Specific examples of the aromatic ring in the aromatic ring group include a benzene ring, a naphthalene ring, an anthracene ring, a phenanthrene ring, and a fluorene ring. Among these, from the viewpoint of reliability, the ring is preferred.

作為環狀烴基可具有之取代基,可列舉:羥基、甲基、乙基、正丙基、異丙基、正丁基、第二丁基、第三丁基、戊基、異戊基等碳數1~5之烷基;甲氧基、乙氧基等碳數1~5之烷氧基;硝基;氰基;羧基等。該等中,就合成之簡易性之觀點而言,較佳為未經取代。Examples of the substituent which the cyclic hydrocarbon group may have include a hydroxyl group, a methyl group, an ethyl group, an n-propyl group, an isopropyl group, an n-butyl group, a second butyl group, a third butyl group, a pentyl group, an isopentyl group, and the like. Alkyl groups having 1 to 5 carbons; alkoxy groups having 1 to 5 carbons such as methoxy and ethoxy; nitro; cyano; carboxyl and the like. Among these, from the viewpoint of simplicity of synthesis, it is preferably unsubstituted.

該等中,就相溶性之觀點而言,Rβ 較佳為二價脂肪族環基,更佳為二價金剛烷環基。 另一方面,就可靠性之觀點而言,Rβ 較佳為二價芳香族環基,更佳為二價茀環基。Among these, from the viewpoint of compatibility, R β is preferably a divalent aliphatic ring group, and more preferably a divalent adamantyl ring group. On the other hand, from the viewpoint of reliability, R β is preferably a divalent aromatic ring group, and more preferably a divalent fluorene ring group.

如上所述,式(ii-2)中之苯環可進而經任意取代基所取代。作為該取代基,例如可列舉:羥基、甲基、甲氧基、乙基、乙氧基、丙基、丙氧基等。取代基之個數亦無特別限定,可為1個,亦可為2個以上。又,可經由該等取代基將式(ii-2)中之2個苯環連結。 該等中,就圖案化特性之觀點而言,較佳為未經取代。As described above, the benzene ring in the formula (ii-2) may be further substituted with an arbitrary substituent. Examples of the substituent include a hydroxy group, a methyl group, a methoxy group, an ethyl group, an ethoxy group, a propyl group, and a propoxy group. The number of substituents is also not particularly limited, and may be one or two or more. In addition, two benzene rings in formula (ii-2) may be linked via these substituents. Among these, from the viewpoint of patterning characteristics, it is preferably unsubstituted.

以下列舉上述式(ii-2)所表示之部分結構之具體例。Specific examples of the partial structure represented by the formula (ii-2) are listed below.

[化35] [Chemical 35]

[化36] [Chemical 36]

[化37] [Chemical 37]

[化38] [Chemical 38]

另一方面,上述通式(ii)所表示之部分結構就相溶性之觀點而言,較佳為下述通式(ii-3)所表示之部分結構。On the other hand, from the viewpoint of compatibility, the partial structure represented by the general formula (ii) is preferably a partial structure represented by the following general formula (ii-3).

[化39] [Chemical 39]

式(ii-3)中,Rc 及Rd 與上述式(ii)含義相同,RZ 表示氫原子或多元酸殘基。In the formula (ii-3), R c and R d have the same meanings as in the above formula (ii), and R Z represents a hydrogen atom or a polyacid residue.

所謂多元酸殘基意指自多元酸或其酐中去除1個OH基而成之一價基。再者,可進而再去除1個OH基,而與式(ii-3)所表示之其他分子中之RZ 共用,即複數個式(ii-3)可經由RZ 連結。 作為多元酸,可列舉選自順丁烯二酸、丁二酸、伊康酸、鄰苯二甲酸、四氫鄰苯二甲酸、六氫鄰苯二甲酸、均苯四甲酸、偏苯三甲酸、二苯甲酮四羧酸、甲基六氫鄰苯二甲酸、內亞甲基四氫鄰苯二甲酸、氯橋酸、甲基四氫鄰苯二甲酸、聯苯四羧酸中之一種或兩種以上。 該等中,就圖案化特性之觀點而言,作為多元酸,較佳為順丁烯二酸、丁二酸、伊康酸、鄰苯二甲酸、四氫鄰苯二甲酸、六氫鄰苯二甲酸、均苯四甲酸、偏苯三甲酸、聯苯四羧酸,更佳為四氫鄰苯二甲酸、聯苯四羧酸、四氫鄰苯二甲酸、聯苯四羧酸。The polybasic acid residue means a monovalent group obtained by removing one OH group from a polybasic acid or an anhydride thereof. Furthermore, one OH group can be removed and shared with R Z in other molecules represented by formula (ii-3), that is, a plurality of formulas (ii-3) can be linked via R Z. Examples of the polybasic acid include maleic acid, succinic acid, itaconic acid, phthalic acid, tetrahydrophthalic acid, hexahydrophthalic acid, pyromellitic acid, trimellitic acid , Benzophenone tetracarboxylic acid, methylhexahydrophthalic acid, endomethylenetetrahydrophthalic acid, chlorobridged acid, methyltetrahydrophthalic acid, biphenyltetracarboxylic acid Or two or more. Among these, from the viewpoint of patterning characteristics, as the polybasic acid, maleic acid, succinic acid, itaconic acid, phthalic acid, tetrahydrophthalic acid, and hexahydrophthalic acid are preferred. Dicarboxylic acid, pyromellitic acid, trimellitic acid, biphenyltetracarboxylic acid, more preferably tetrahydrophthalic acid, biphenyltetracarboxylic acid, tetrahydrophthalic acid, and biphenyltetracarboxylic acid.

環氧(甲基)丙烯酸酯系樹脂(b1-C)1分子中所含之上述式(ii-3)所表示之部分結構可為一種,亦可為兩種以上,例如,可混合存在RX 為氫原子者與RZ 為多元酸殘基者。The partial structure represented by the formula (ii-3) contained in one molecule of the epoxy (meth) acrylate resin (b1-C) may be one type or two or more types. For example, R may be mixed X is a hydrogen atom and R Z is a polybasic acid residue.

又,環氧(甲基)丙烯酸酯系樹脂(b1-C)1分子中所含之上述式(II)所表示之部分結構之個數並無特別限定,較佳為1以上,更佳為3以上,又,較佳為20以下,更佳為15以下,進而較佳為10以下。藉由設為上述下限值以上,有硬化性變得良好之傾向,又,藉由設為上述上限值以下,有顯影溶解性變得良好之傾向。The number of partial structures represented by the formula (II) contained in one molecule of the epoxy (meth) acrylate resin (b1-C) is not particularly limited, but it is preferably 1 or more, and more preferably 3 or more, and preferably 20 or less, more preferably 15 or less, and even more preferably 10 or less. When it is more than the said lower limit value, hardenability tends to become favorable, and when it is below the said upper limit value, the developing solubility tends to become favorable.

環氧(甲基)丙烯酸酯系樹脂(b1)可單獨使用一種,亦可混合使用兩種以上之樹脂。 又,可將上文所述之環氧(甲基)丙烯酸酯系樹脂(b1)之一部分置換為其他黏合劑樹脂使用。即,可將環氧(甲基)丙烯酸酯系樹脂(b1)與其他黏合劑樹脂併用。於該情形時,較佳為將(b)鹼可溶性樹脂中之環氧(甲基)丙烯酸酯系樹脂(b1)之比率設為5質量%以上,更佳為設為10質量%以上,進而較佳為設為20質量%以上,進而更佳為設為30質量%以上,尤佳為設為40質量%以上,最佳為設為50質量%以上。又,較佳為設為90質量%以下,更佳為設為80質量%以下,進而較佳為設為70質量%以下,尤佳為設為60質量%以下。作為上限與下限之組合,較佳為10~90質量%,更佳為20~80質量%,進而更佳為30~70質量%,尤佳為40~60質量%,最佳為50~60質量%。The epoxy (meth) acrylate resin (b1) may be used alone, or two or more resins may be used in combination. In addition, a part of the epoxy (meth) acrylate resin (b1) described above may be replaced with another binder resin and used. That is, the epoxy (meth) acrylate resin (b1) can be used in combination with another binder resin. In this case, the ratio of the epoxy (meth) acrylate resin (b1) in the (b) alkali-soluble resin is preferably 5 mass% or more, and more preferably 10 mass% or more. The content is preferably 20% by mass or more, more preferably 30% by mass or more, even more preferably 40% by mass or more, and most preferably 50% by mass or more. The content is preferably 90% by mass or less, more preferably 80% by mass or less, even more preferably 70% by mass or less, and even more preferably 60% by mass or less. The combination of the upper limit and the lower limit is preferably 10 to 90% by mass, more preferably 20 to 80% by mass, even more preferably 30 to 70% by mass, even more preferably 40 to 60% by mass, and most preferably 50 to 60%. quality%.

可與環氧(甲基)丙烯酸酯系樹脂(b1)併用之其他黏合劑樹脂並無限制,自通常用於感光性著色組合物之樹脂中選擇即可。例如,可列舉日本專利特開2007-271727號公報、日本專利特開2007-316620號公報、日本專利特開2007-334290號公報等所記載之黏合劑樹脂等。又,就可靠性或表面平滑性之觀點而言,可較佳地列舉國際公開第2017/110893號所記載之(甲基)丙烯酸系共聚合樹脂。再者,其他黏合劑樹脂均可單獨使用一種,亦可組合兩種以上使用。The other binder resin that can be used in combination with the epoxy (meth) acrylate resin (b1) is not limited, and may be selected from resins commonly used in photosensitive coloring compositions. For example, the binder resins described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2007-271727, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2007-316620, and Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2007-334290 can be cited. From the viewpoint of reliability and surface smoothness, a (meth) acrylic copolymer resin described in International Publication No. 2017/110893 is preferable. Furthermore, other binder resins can be used alone or in combination of two or more.

又,作為(b)鹼可溶性樹脂,就與著色劑或分散劑等之相溶性之觀點而言,較佳為使用(b2)丙烯酸系樹脂。Moreover, as (b) an alkali-soluble resin, (b2) an acrylic resin is preferably used from the viewpoint of compatibility with a coloring agent, a dispersant, and the like.

作為丙烯酸系樹脂,例如可列舉具有1個以上之羧基之乙烯性不飽和單體(以下稱為「不飽和單體(b2-1)」)與其他可共聚合之乙烯性不飽和單體(以下稱為「不飽和單體(b2-2)」)之共聚物。 作為不飽和單體(b2-1),例如可列舉:(甲基)丙烯酸、丁烯酸、α-氯丙烯酸、桂皮酸等不飽和單羧酸;順丁烯二酸、順丁烯二酸酐、反丁烯二酸、甲基順丁烯二酸、甲基順丁烯二酸酐、甲基反丁烯二酸等不飽和二羧酸或其酐;丁二酸單[2-(甲基)丙烯醯氧基乙基]酯、鄰苯二甲酸單[2-(甲基)丙烯醯氧基乙基]酯等二元以上之多元羧酸之單[(甲基)丙烯醯氧基烷基]酯;ω-羧基聚己內酯單(甲基)丙烯酸酯等於兩末端具有羧基與羥基之聚合物之單(甲基)丙烯酸酯;對乙烯基苯甲酸等。 該等不飽和單體(b2-1)可單獨使用,或可混合兩種以上使用。Examples of the acrylic resin include an ethylenically unsaturated monomer having one or more carboxyl groups (hereinafter referred to as "unsaturated monomer (b2-1)") and other copolymerizable ethylenically unsaturated monomer ( Hereinafter, it is a copolymer of "unsaturated monomer (b2-2)"). Examples of the unsaturated monomer (b2-1) include unsaturated monocarboxylic acids such as (meth) acrylic acid, butenoic acid, α-chloroacrylic acid, and cinnamic acid; maleic acid and maleic anhydride , Unsaturated dicarboxylic acids such as fumaric acid, methyl maleic acid, methyl maleic anhydride, methyl fumaric acid, or their anhydrides; succinic acid mono [2- (methyl ) Mono [(meth) acryloxyalkane] of divalent or higher polycarboxylic acids such as propylene ethoxyethyl] ester, mono [2- (meth) acryl ethoxyethyl] phthalate Omega] esters; ω-carboxy polycaprolactone mono (meth) acrylates are equivalent to mono (meth) acrylates of polymers having carboxyl and hydroxyl groups at both ends; p-vinylbenzoic acid and the like. These unsaturated monomers (b2-1) may be used alone, or two or more kinds may be used in combination.

又,作為不飽和單體(b2-2),例如可列舉:N-苯基順丁烯二醯亞胺、N-環己基順丁烯二醯亞胺等N-位取代順丁烯二醯亞胺;苯乙烯、α-甲基苯乙烯、對羥基苯乙烯、對羥基-α-甲基苯乙烯、對乙烯基苄基縮水甘油醚、苊等芳香族乙烯系化合物;Examples of the unsaturated monomer (b2-2) include N-position-substituted maleimidines such as N-phenyl maleimide diimide and N-cyclohexyl maleimide diimide. Imine; styrene, α-methylstyrene, p-hydroxystyrene, p-hydroxy-α-methylstyrene, p-vinyl benzyl glycidyl ether, fluorene and other aromatic vinyl compounds;

(甲基)丙烯酸甲酯、(甲基)丙烯酸正丁酯、(甲基)丙烯酸2-乙基己酯、(甲基)丙烯酸2-羥基乙酯、(甲基)丙烯酸烯丙酯、(甲基)丙烯酸苄酯、聚乙二醇(聚合度2~10)甲醚(甲基)丙烯酸酯、聚丙二醇(聚合度2~10)甲醚(甲基)丙烯酸酯、聚乙二醇(聚合度2~10)單(甲基)丙烯酸酯、聚丙二醇(聚合度2~10)單(甲基)丙烯酸酯、(甲基)丙烯酸環己酯、(甲基)丙烯酸異基酯、(甲基)丙烯酸三環[5.2.1.02,6 ]癸烷-8-基酯、(甲基)丙烯酸二環戊烯酯、甘油單(甲基)丙烯酸酯、(甲基)丙烯酸4-羥基苯酯、對異丙苯基苯酚之環氧乙烷改性(甲基)丙烯酸酯、(甲基)丙烯酸縮水甘油酯、(甲基)丙烯酸3,4-環氧環己基甲酯、3-[(甲基)丙烯醯氧基甲基]氧雜環丁烷、3-[(甲基)丙烯醯氧基甲基]-3-乙基氧雜環丁烷等(甲基)丙烯酸酯;Methyl (meth) acrylate, n-butyl (meth) acrylate, 2-ethylhexyl (meth) acrylate, 2-hydroxyethyl (meth) acrylate, allyl (meth) acrylate, ( Benzyl methacrylate, polyethylene glycol (polymerization degree 2-10) methyl ether (meth) acrylate, polypropylene glycol (polymerization degree 2-10) methyl ether (meth) acrylate, polyethylene glycol ( Degree of polymerization 2 to 10) mono (meth) acrylate, polypropylene glycol (degree of polymerization 2 to 10) mono (meth) acrylate, cyclohexyl (meth) acrylate, iso (meth) acrylate, ( Tricyclo [5.2.1.0 2,6 ] decane-8-yl meth) acrylate, dicyclopentenyl (meth) acrylate, glycerol mono (meth) acrylate, 4-hydroxy (meth) acrylate Phenyl ester, ethylene oxide modified (meth) acrylate of p-cumylphenol, glycidyl (meth) acrylate, 3,4-epoxycyclohexyl methyl (meth) acrylate, 3- [(Meth) acryloxymethyl] oxetane, 3-[(meth) acryloxymethyl] -3-ethyloxetane, and other (meth) acrylates;

環己基乙烯醚、異基乙烯醚、三環[5.2.1.02,6 ]癸烷-8-基乙烯醚、五環十五烷基乙烯醚、3-(乙烯氧基甲基)-3-乙基氧雜環丁烷等乙烯醚;聚苯乙烯、聚(甲基)丙烯酸甲酯、聚(甲基)丙烯酸正丁酯、聚矽氧烷等於聚合物分子鏈之末端具有單(甲基)丙烯醯基之巨單體等。 該等不飽和單體(b2-2)可單獨使用,或可混合兩種以上使用。Cyclohexyl vinyl ether, isoyl vinyl ether, tricyclo [5.2.1.0 2,6 ] decane-8-yl vinyl ether, pentacyclopentadecyl vinyl ether, 3- (vinyloxymethyl) -3- Vinyl ethers such as ethyloxetane; polystyrene, polymethyl (meth) acrylate, poly-n-butyl (meth) acrylate, polysiloxane is equal to a mono (methyl ) Macromonomers of acrylic fluorenyl and the like. These unsaturated monomers (b2-2) may be used alone, or two or more kinds may be used in combination.

於不飽和單體(b2-1)與不飽和單體(b2-2)之共聚物中,該共聚物中之不飽和單體(b1)之共聚合比率較佳為5~50質量%,進而較佳為10~40質量%。藉由在此種範圍內使不飽和單體(b2-1)進行共聚合,有可獲得鹼性顯影性及保存穩定性優異之感光性著色組合物之傾向。In the copolymer of the unsaturated monomer (b2-1) and the unsaturated monomer (b2-2), the copolymerization ratio of the unsaturated monomer (b1) in the copolymer is preferably 5 to 50% by mass. It is more preferably 10 to 40% by mass. By copolymerizing the unsaturated monomer (b2-1) within such a range, there is a tendency that a photosensitive coloring composition excellent in alkaline developability and storage stability can be obtained.

作為不飽和單體(b2-1)與不飽和單體(b2-2)之共聚物之具體例,例如可列舉日本專利特開平7-140654號公報、日本專利特開平8-259876號公報、日本專利特開平10-31308號公報、日本專利特開平10-300922號公報、日本專利特開平11-174224號公報、日本專利特開平11-258415號公報、日本專利特開2000-56118號公報、日本專利特開2004-101728號公報、日本專利特開2018-9132號公報等所揭示之共聚物。 不飽和單體(b2-1)與不飽和單體(b2-2)之共聚物可藉由公知之方法製造,例如亦可藉由日本專利特開2003-222717號公報、日本專利特開2006-259680號公報、國際公開第2007/029871號等所揭示之方法控制其結構或Mw、Mw/Mn。Specific examples of the copolymer of the unsaturated monomer (b2-1) and the unsaturated monomer (b2-2) include, for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 7-140654, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 8-259876, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 10-31308, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 10-300922, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 11-174224, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 11-258415, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2000-56118, Copolymers disclosed in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2004-101728 and Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2018-9132. The copolymer of the unsaturated monomer (b2-1) and the unsaturated monomer (b2-2) can be produced by a known method. For example, it can also be obtained from Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2003-222717 and Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2006. The method disclosed in -259680, International Publication No. 2007/029871, etc. controls its structure or Mw, Mw / Mn.

<(c)光聚合起始劑> (c)光聚合起始劑係具有直接吸收光,引起分解反應或奪氫反應,產生聚合活性自由基之功能之成分。視需要亦可添加聚合促進劑(鏈轉移劑)、增感色素等加成劑而使用。 作為光聚合起始劑,例如可列舉:日本專利特開昭59-152396號公報、日本專利特開昭61-151197號公報所記載之含有二茂鈦化合物之茂金屬化合物;日本專利特開2000-56118號公報所記載之六芳基聯咪唑衍生物類;日本專利特開平10-39503號公報所記載之鹵甲基化㗁二唑衍生物類、鹵甲基均三衍生物類、N-苯基甘胺酸等N-芳基-α-胺基酸類、N-芳基-α-胺基酸鹽類、N-芳基-α-胺基酸酯類等自由基活性劑、α-胺基烷基苯酮衍生物類;日本專利特開2000-80068號公報、日本專利特開2006-36750號公報等所記載之肟酯系化合物等。<(C) Photopolymerization initiator> (c) The photopolymerization initiator is a component having a function of directly absorbing light, causing a decomposition reaction or a hydrogen abstraction reaction, and generating a polymerization-active radical. If necessary, addition agents such as a polymerization accelerator (chain transfer agent) and a sensitizing dye may be used. Examples of the photopolymerization initiator include metallocene compounds containing titanocene compounds described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 59-152396 and Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 61-151197; Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2000 Hexaarylbiimidazole derivatives described in Japanese Patent Publication No. 56118; halomethylated oxadiazole derivatives, halomethyl trimellitic derivatives described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 10-39503; Free radical active agents such as N-aryl-α-amino acids such as phenylglycine, N-aryl-α-amino acid salts, N-aryl-α-amino acid esters, α- Amine alkyl phenone derivatives; oxime ester compounds described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2000-80068, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2006-36750, and the like.

具體而言,例如,作為茂金屬化合物,可列舉:二(環戊二烯基)二氯化鈦、二(環戊二烯基)雙苯基鈦、二(環戊二烯基)雙(2,3,4,5,6-五氟苯基)鈦、二(環戊二烯基)雙(2,3,5,6-四氟苯基)鈦、二(環戊二烯基)雙(2,4,6-三氟苯基)鈦、二(環戊二烯基)二(2,6-二氟苯基)鈦、二(環戊二烯基)二(2,4-二氟苯基)鈦、二(甲基環戊二烯基)雙(2,3,4,5,6-五氟苯基)鈦、二(甲基環戊二烯基)雙(2,6-二氟苯基)鈦、二(環戊二烯基)雙[2,6-二氟-3-(1-吡咯基)苯基]鈦等。Specifically, for example, as the metallocene compound, bis (cyclopentadienyl) titanium dichloride, bis (cyclopentadienyl) bisphenyltitanium, and bis (cyclopentadienyl) bis ( 2,3,4,5,6-pentafluorophenyl) titanium, bis (cyclopentadienyl) bis (2,3,5,6-tetrafluorophenyl) titanium, bis (cyclopentadienyl) Bis (2,4,6-trifluorophenyl) titanium, bis (cyclopentadienyl) bis (2,6-difluorophenyl) titanium, bis (cyclopentadienyl) bis (2,4- Difluorophenyl) titanium, bis (methylcyclopentadienyl) bis (2,3,4,5,6-pentafluorophenyl) titanium, bis (methylcyclopentadienyl) bis (2, 6-difluorophenyl) titanium, bis (cyclopentadienyl) bis [2,6-difluoro-3- (1-pyrrolyl) phenyl] titanium, and the like.

又,作為聯咪唑衍生物類,可列舉:2-(2'-氯苯基)-4,5-二苯基咪唑二聚物、2-(2'-氯苯基)-4,5-雙(3'-甲氧基苯基)咪唑二聚物、2-(2'-氟苯基)-4,5-二苯基咪唑二聚物、2-(2'-甲氧基苯基)-4,5-二苯基咪唑二聚物、(4'-甲氧基苯基)-4,5-二苯基咪唑二聚物等。Examples of the biimidazole derivatives include 2- (2'-chlorophenyl) -4,5-diphenylimidazole dimer and 2- (2'-chlorophenyl) -4,5- Bis (3'-methoxyphenyl) imidazole dimer, 2- (2'-fluorophenyl) -4,5-diphenylimidazole dimer, 2- (2'-methoxyphenyl) ) -4,5-diphenylimidazole dimer, (4'-methoxyphenyl) -4,5-diphenylimidazole dimer, and the like.

又,作為鹵甲基化㗁二唑衍生物類,可列舉:2-三氯甲基-5-(2'-苯并呋喃基)-1,3,4-㗁二唑、2-三氯甲基-5-[β-(2'-苯并呋喃基)乙烯基]-1,3,4-㗁二唑、2-三氯甲基-5-[β-(2'-(6''-苯并呋喃基)乙烯基)]-1,3,4-㗁二唑、2-三氯甲基-5-呋喃基-1,3,4-㗁二唑等。Examples of the halomethylated fluorenediazole derivatives include 2-trichloromethyl-5- (2'-benzofuranyl) -1,3,4-fluorenediazole and 2-trichloro Methyl-5- [β- (2'-benzofuranyl) vinyl] -1,3,4-fluorenediazole, 2-trichloromethyl-5- [β- (2 '-(6' '-Benzofuryl) vinyl)]-1,3,4-fluorenediazole, 2-trichloromethyl-5-furanyl-1,3,4-fluorenediazole, and the like.

又,作為鹵甲基均三衍生物類,可列舉:2-(4-甲氧基苯基)-4,6-雙(三氯甲基)均三、2-(4-甲氧基萘基)-4,6-雙(三氯甲基)均三、2-(4-乙氧基萘基)-4,6-雙(三氯甲基)均三、2-(4-乙氧基羰基萘基)-4,6-雙(三氯甲基)均三等。Examples of the halomethyl mesitane derivatives include 2- (4-methoxyphenyl) -4,6-bis (trichloromethyl) mesa, and 2- (4-methoxynaphthalene). Methyl) -4,6-bis (trichloromethyl) tris, 2- (4-ethoxynaphthyl) -4,6-bis (trichloromethyl) tris, 2- (4-ethoxy Carbonylcarbonylnaphthyl) -4,6-bis (trichloromethyl) are all equal.

又,作為α-胺基烷基苯酮衍生物類,可列舉:2-甲基-1[4-(甲硫基)苯基]-2-啉基丙烷-1-酮、2-苄基-2-二甲胺基-1-(4-啉基苯基)-丁酮-1、2-苄基-2-二甲胺基-1-(4-啉基苯基)丁烷-1-酮、4-二甲胺基苯甲酸乙酯、4-二甲胺基苯甲酸異戊酯、4-二乙胺基苯乙酮、4-二甲胺基苯丙酮、1,4-二甲胺基苯甲酸2-乙基己酯、2,5-雙(4-二乙胺基苯亞甲基)環己酮、7-二乙胺基-3-(4-二乙胺基苯甲醯基)香豆素、4-(二乙胺基)查耳酮等。Examples of the α-aminoalkyl phenone derivatives include 2-methyl-1 [4- (methylthio) phenyl] -2-olinylpropane-1-one, and 2-benzyl 2-dimethylamino-1- (4-olinylphenyl) -butanone-1, 2-benzyl-2-dimethylamino-1- (4-olinylphenyl) butane-1 -Ketone, ethyl 4-dimethylaminobenzoate, isoamyl 4-dimethylaminobenzoate, 4-diethylaminoacetophenone, 4-dimethylaminophenylacetone, 1,4-dione 2-ethylhexyl methylaminobenzoate, 2,5-bis (4-diethylaminobenzylidene) cyclohexanone, 7-diethylamino-3- (4-diethylaminobenzene Formamyl) coumarin, 4- (diethylamino) chalcone and the like.

作為光聚合起始劑,尤其是就感度或製版性之方面而言,有效的是肟酯系化合物,於使用含有酚性羥基之鹼可溶性樹脂之情形等時,就感度之方面而言變得不利,因此尤其是此種感度優異之肟酯系化合物較為有用。由於肟酯系化合物於其結構中兼具吸收紫外線之結構、傳遞光能之結構及產生自由基之結構,因此少量即感度較高,且對熱反應而言較為穩定,可以少量獲得高感度之感光性著色組合物。As a photopolymerization initiator, an oxime ester compound is particularly effective in terms of sensitivity and plate-making properties. When an alkali-soluble resin containing a phenolic hydroxyl group is used, etc., it becomes sensitive in terms of sensitivity. It is disadvantageous, and therefore, such an oxime ester compound having excellent sensitivity is particularly useful. Since the oxime ester compound has both a structure that absorbs ultraviolet light, a structure that transmits light energy, and a structure that generates free radicals, a small amount is high in sensitivity, and it is relatively stable to thermal reactions, and a small amount of high sensitivity can be obtained. Photosensitive coloring composition.

作為肟酯系化合物,例如可列舉下述通式(IV)所表示之化合物。Examples of the oxime ester compound include compounds represented by the following general formula (IV).

[化40] [Chemical 40]

上述式(IV)中,R21a 表示氫原子、可具有取代基之烷基、或可具有取代基之芳香族環基,R21b 表示包含芳香環之任意取代基,R22a 表示可具有取代基之烷醯基、或可具有取代基之芳醯基,n表示0或1之整數。In the above formula (IV), R 21a represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group which may have a substituent, or an aromatic ring group which may have a substituent, R 21b represents any substituent including an aromatic ring, and R 22a represents a substituent that may have Alkylalkyl, or arylamidino which may have a substituent, and n represents an integer of 0 or 1.

R21a 中之烷基之碳數並無特別限定,就於溶劑中之溶解性或感度之觀點而言,通常為1以上,較佳為2以上,又,通常為20以下,較佳為15以下,更佳為10以下。作為烷基之具體例,可列舉:甲基、乙基、丙基、環戊基乙基、丙基等。 作為烷基可具有之取代基,可列舉:芳香族環基、羥基、羧基、鹵素原子、胺基、醯胺基、4-(2-甲氧基-1-甲基)乙氧基-2-甲基苯基或N-乙醯基-N-乙醯氧基胺基等,就合成容易性之觀點而言,較佳為未經取代。The carbon number of the alkyl group in R 21a is not particularly limited. From the viewpoint of solubility or sensitivity in a solvent, it is usually 1 or more, preferably 2 or more, and usually 20 or less, and preferably 15 Hereinafter, it is more preferably 10 or less. Specific examples of the alkyl group include methyl, ethyl, propyl, cyclopentylethyl, and propyl. Examples of the substituent which the alkyl group may have include an aromatic ring group, a hydroxyl group, a carboxyl group, a halogen atom, an amine group, a fluorenylamino group, and 4- (2-methoxy-1-methyl) ethoxy-2. -Methylphenyl, N-ethenyl-N-ethenoxyamino, and the like are preferably unsubstituted from the viewpoint of ease of synthesis.

作為R21a 中之芳香族環基,可列舉芳香族烴環基及芳香族雜環基。芳香族環基之碳數並無特別限定,就於感光性著色組合物中之溶解性之觀點而言,較佳為5以上。又,就顯影性之觀點而言,較佳為30以下,更佳為20以下,進而較佳為12以下。Examples of the aromatic ring group in R 21a include an aromatic hydrocarbon ring group and an aromatic heterocyclic group. The number of carbon atoms of the aromatic ring group is not particularly limited, but is preferably 5 or more from the viewpoint of solubility in the photosensitive coloring composition. From the viewpoint of developability, it is preferably 30 or less, more preferably 20 or less, and even more preferably 12 or less.

作為芳香族環基之具體例,可列舉:苯基、萘基、吡啶基、呋喃基等,該等中,就顯影性之觀點而言,較佳為苯基或萘基,更佳為苯基。 作為芳香族環基可具有之取代基,可列舉:羥基、羧基、鹵素原子、胺基、醯胺基、烷基、烷氧基、該等取代基連結而成之基等,就顯影性之觀點而言,較佳為烷基、烷氧基、將該等連結而成之基,更佳為連結而成之烷氧基。 該等中,就顯影性之觀點而言,R21a 較佳為可具有取代基之芳香族環基,進而較佳為取代基具有連結而成之烷氧基之芳香族環基。Specific examples of the aromatic ring group include a phenyl group, a naphthyl group, a pyridyl group, and a furyl group. Among these, from the viewpoint of developability, a phenyl group or a naphthyl group is preferred, and a benzene group is more preferred. base. Examples of the substituent which the aromatic cyclic group may have include a hydroxyl group, a carboxyl group, a halogen atom, an amine group, amidino group, an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, and a group in which these substituents are connected. From a viewpoint, an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, and the group which connected these are preferable, and an alkoxy group which is connected is more preferable. Among these, from the viewpoint of developability, R 21a is preferably an aromatic ring group which may have a substituent, and more preferably an aromatic ring group in which the substituent has an alkoxy group connected.

又,作為R21b ,較佳可列舉可經取代之咔唑基、可經取代之9-氧硫 基或可經取代之二苯硫醚基。該等中,就感度之觀點而言,較佳為可經取代之咔唑基。Further, as R 21b , a substituted carbazolyl group and a substituted 9-oxysulfur group are preferred. Or diphenyl sulfide group which may be substituted. Among these, from the viewpoint of sensitivity, a carbazolyl group which may be substituted is preferred.

又,R22a 中之烷醯基之碳數並無特別限定,就於溶劑中之溶解性或感度之觀點而言,通常為2以上,較佳為3以上,又,通常為20以下,較佳為15以下,更佳為10以下,進而較佳為5以下。作為烷醯基之具體例,可列舉:乙醯基、丙醯基、丁醯基等。 作為烷醯基可具有之取代基,可列舉:芳香族環基、羥基、羧基、鹵素原子、胺基、醯胺基等,就合成容易性之觀點而言,較佳為未經取代。The carbon number of the alkyl group in R 22a is not particularly limited. From the viewpoint of solubility or sensitivity in a solvent, it is usually 2 or more, preferably 3 or more, and usually 20 or less. It is preferably 15 or less, more preferably 10 or less, and even more preferably 5 or less. Specific examples of the alkylfluorenyl group include an ethylfluorenyl group, a propionyl group, and a butanyl group. Examples of the substituent which the alkylfluorenyl group may have include an aromatic ring group, a hydroxyl group, a carboxyl group, a halogen atom, an amine group, and a fluorenylamino group. From the viewpoint of ease of synthesis, an unsubstituted group is preferred.

又,R22a 中之芳醯基之碳數並無特別限定,就於溶劑中之溶解性或感度之觀點而言,通常為7以上,較佳為8以上,又,通常為20以下,較佳為15以下,更佳為10以下。作為芳醯基之具體例,可列舉:苯甲醯基、萘甲醯基等。 作為芳醯基可具有之取代基,可列舉:羥基、羧基、鹵素原子、胺基、醯胺基、烷基等,就合成容易性之觀點而言,較佳為未經取代。 該等中,就感度之觀點而言,R22a 較佳為可具有取代基之烷醯基,更佳為未經取代之烷醯基,進而較佳為乙醯基。In addition, the carbon number of the arylfluorenyl group in R 22a is not particularly limited. From the viewpoint of solubility or sensitivity in a solvent, it is usually 7 or more, preferably 8 or more, and usually 20 or less. It is preferably 15 or less, and more preferably 10 or less. Specific examples of the arylfluorenyl group include a benzamyl group, a naphthylmethyl group, and the like. Examples of the substituent which the arylfluorenyl group may have include a hydroxyl group, a carboxyl group, a halogen atom, an amine group, a fluorenylamino group, and an alkyl group. From the viewpoint of ease of synthesis, it is preferably unsubstituted. Among these, from the viewpoint of sensitivity, R 22a is preferably an alkylfluorenyl group which may have a substituent, more preferably an unsubstituted alkylfluorenyl group, and even more preferably an ethylfluorenyl group.

又,就減少著色劑對液晶層之污染之方面而言,亦可適宜地使用日本專利特開2016-133574號公報所記載之起始劑。In addition, in terms of reducing the contamination of the liquid crystal layer by the colorant, the initiator described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2016-133574 can be suitably used.

光聚合起始劑可單獨使用一種,亦可組合兩種以上使用。 可視需要以提高感應感度為目的,而於光聚合起始劑中調配與圖像曝光光源之波長相對應之增感色素、聚合促進劑。作為增感色素,可列舉:日本專利特開平4-221958號公報、日本專利特開平4-219756號公報所記載之 色素;日本專利特開平3-239703號公報、日本專利特開平5-289335號公報所記載之具有雜環之香豆素色素;日本專利特開平3-239703號公報、日本專利特開平5-289335號公報所記載之3-酮香豆素化合物;日本專利特開平6-19240號公報所記載之吡咯亞甲基色素;以及日本專利特開昭47-2528號公報、日本專利特開昭54-155292號公報、日本專利特公昭45-37377號公報、日本專利特開昭48-84183號公報、日本專利特開昭52-112681號公報、日本專利特開昭58-15503號公報、日本專利特開昭60-88005號公報、日本專利特開昭59-56403號公報、日本專利特開平2-69號公報、日本專利特開昭57-168088號公報、日本專利特開平5-107761號公報、日本專利特開平5-210240號公報、日本專利特開平4-288818號公報所記載之具有二烷基胺基苯骨架之色素等。The photopolymerization initiator may be used singly or in combination of two or more kinds. If necessary, for the purpose of improving the sensitivity of sensitivity, a photopolymerization initiator is prepared with a sensitizing dye and a polymerization accelerator corresponding to the wavelength of an image exposure light source. Examples of the sensitizing dye include those described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 4-221958 and Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 4-219756. Pigments; Coumarin pigments with heterocyclic rings described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 3-239703 and Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 5-289335; Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 3-239703 and Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 5-289335 3-ketocoumarin compounds described in Japanese Patent Publication No. 6-19240; pyrrole methylene pigment described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 6-19240; and Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 47-2528, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 54- Japanese Patent Publication No. 155292, Japanese Patent Publication No. 45-37377, Japanese Patent Publication No. 48-84183, Japanese Patent Publication No. 52-112681, Japanese Patent Publication No. 58-15503, Japanese Patent Publication No. Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 60-88005, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 59-56403, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2-69, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 57-168088, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 5-107761, A pigment having a dialkylaminobenzene skeleton described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 5-210240 and Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 4-288818.

該等增感色素中較佳者為含胺基之增感色素,進而較佳者為於分子內具有胺基及苯基之化合物。尤佳者為例如:4,4'-二甲胺基二苯甲酮、4,4'-二乙胺基二苯甲酮、2-胺基二苯甲酮、4-胺基二苯甲酮、4,4'-二胺基二苯甲酮、3,3'-二胺基二苯甲酮、3,4-二胺基二苯甲酮等二苯甲酮系化合物;2-(對二甲胺基苯基)苯并㗁唑、2-(對二乙胺基苯基)苯并㗁唑、2-(對二甲胺基苯基)苯并[4,5]苯并㗁唑、2-(對二甲胺基苯基)苯并[6,7]苯并㗁唑、2,5-雙(對二乙胺基苯基)-1,3,4-㗁唑、2-(對二甲胺基苯基)苯并噻唑、2-(對二乙胺基苯基)苯并噻唑、2-(對二甲胺基苯基)苯并咪唑、2-(對二乙胺基苯基)苯并咪唑、2,5-雙(對二乙胺基苯基)-1,3,4-噻二唑、(對二甲胺基苯基)吡啶、(對二乙胺基苯基)吡啶、(對二甲胺基苯基)喹啉、(對二乙胺基苯基)喹啉、(對二甲胺基苯基)嘧啶、(對二乙胺基苯基)嘧啶等含對二烷基胺基苯基之化合物等。其中,最佳者為4,4'-二烷基胺基二苯甲酮。 增感色素可單獨使用一種,亦可將兩種以上併用。Among these sensitizing dyes, preferred are sensitizing dyes containing an amine group, and further preferred are compounds having an amine group and a phenyl group in the molecule. Particularly preferred are, for example: 4,4'-dimethylaminobenzophenone, 4,4'-diethylaminobenzophenone, 2-aminobenzophenone, 4-aminobenzophenone Ketones, 4,4'-diaminobenzophenone, 3,3'-diaminobenzophenone, 3,4-diaminobenzophenone and other benzophenone-based compounds; 2- ( P-dimethylaminophenyl) benzoxazole, 2- (p-diethylaminophenyl) benzoxazole, 2- (p-dimethylaminophenyl) benzo [4,5] benzofluorene Azole, 2- (p-dimethylaminophenyl) benzo [6,7] benzoxazole, 2,5-bis (p-diethylaminophenyl) -1,3,4-oxazole, 2 -(P-dimethylaminophenyl) benzothiazole, 2- (p-diethylaminophenyl) benzothiazole, 2- (p-dimethylaminophenyl) benzimidazole, 2- (p-diethyl Aminophenyl) benzimidazole, 2,5-bis (p-diethylaminophenyl) -1,3,4-thiadiazole, (p-dimethylaminophenyl) pyridine, (p-diethylamine) Phenyl) pyridine, (p-dimethylaminophenyl) quinoline, (p-diethylaminophenyl) quinoline, (p-dimethylaminophenyl) pyrimidine, (p-diethylaminophenyl) Compounds containing p-dialkylaminophenyl, such as pyrimidine, and the like. Among them, 4,4'-dialkylaminobenzophenone is the best. The sensitizing dye may be used alone or in combination of two or more.

作為聚合促進劑,例如可使用:對二甲胺基苯甲酸乙酯、苯甲酸2-二甲胺基乙酯等芳香族胺;正丁胺、N-甲基二乙醇胺等脂肪族胺;下文所述之巰基化合物等。 聚合促進劑可單獨使用一種,亦可組合兩種以上使用。As the polymerization accelerator, for example, aromatic amines such as p-dimethylaminoethyl benzoate and 2-dimethylaminoethyl benzoate; aliphatic amines such as n-butylamine and N-methyldiethanolamine; hereinafter The thiol compound and the like. A polymerization accelerator may be used individually by 1 type, and may be used in combination of 2 or more type.

<(d)乙烯性不飽和化合物> 本發明之感光性著色組合物含有(d)乙烯性不飽和化合物。藉由含有(d)乙烯性不飽和化合物而感度提高。 本發明所使用之乙烯性不飽和化合物係分子內具有至少1個乙烯性不飽和基之化合物。具體而言,例如可列舉:(甲基)丙烯酸、(甲基)丙烯酸烷基酯、丙烯腈、苯乙烯、及具有1個乙烯性不飽和鍵之羧酸與多元或一元醇之單酯等。<(D) Ethylene unsaturated compound> The photosensitive coloring composition of this invention contains (d) an ethylenically unsaturated compound. By containing (d) an ethylenically unsaturated compound, sensitivity improves. The ethylenically unsaturated compound used in the present invention is a compound having at least one ethylenically unsaturated group in the molecule. Specific examples include (meth) acrylic acid, (meth) acrylic acid alkyl esters, acrylonitrile, styrene, and monoesters of a carboxylic acid and a polyhydric or monohydric alcohol having one ethylenically unsaturated bond, and the like. .

於本發明中,尤其理想為使用1分子中具有2個以上乙烯性不飽和基之多官能乙烯性單體。多官能乙烯性單體所具有之乙烯性不飽和基之個數並無特別限定,通常為2個以上,較佳為4個以上,更佳為5個以上,又,較佳為8個以下,更佳為7個以下。藉由設為上述下限值以上,有成為高感度之傾向,藉由設為上述上限值以下,有於溶劑中之溶解性提高之傾向。作為上限與下限之組合,例如較佳為2~8,更佳為4~8,進而較佳為5~7。 作為多官能乙烯性單體之例,例如可列舉:脂肪族聚羥基化合物與不飽和羧酸之酯;芳香族聚羥基化合物與不飽和羧酸之酯;藉由脂肪族聚羥基化合物、芳香族聚羥基化合物等多元羥基化合物、不飽和羧酸及多元羧酸之酯化反應獲得之酯等。In the present invention, it is particularly desirable to use a polyfunctional ethylenic monomer having two or more ethylenically unsaturated groups in one molecule. The number of ethylenically unsaturated groups in the polyfunctional ethylenic monomer is not particularly limited, but it is usually two or more, preferably four or more, more preferably five or more, and more preferably eight or less , More preferably 7 or less. If it is more than the said lower limit value, it will become high sensitivity, and if it is less than the said upper limit value, the solubility in a solvent will improve. The combination of the upper limit and the lower limit is, for example, preferably from 2 to 8, more preferably from 4 to 8, and even more preferably from 5 to 7. Examples of the polyfunctional ethylenic monomer include an ester of an aliphatic polyhydroxy compound and an unsaturated carboxylic acid; an ester of an aromatic polyhydroxy compound and an unsaturated carboxylic acid; and an aliphatic polyhydroxy compound and an aromatic Polyhydroxy compounds such as polyhydroxy compounds, esters obtained by esterification of unsaturated carboxylic acids and polycarboxylic acids, and the like.

作為上述脂肪族聚羥基化合物與不飽和羧酸之酯,可列舉:乙二醇二丙烯酸酯、三乙二醇二丙烯酸酯、三羥甲基丙烷三丙烯酸酯、三羥甲基乙烷三丙烯酸酯、季戊四醇二丙烯酸酯、季戊四醇三丙烯酸酯、季戊四醇四丙烯酸酯、二季戊四醇四丙烯酸酯、二季戊四醇五丙烯酸酯、二季戊四醇六丙烯酸酯、甘油丙烯酸酯等脂肪族聚羥基化合物之丙烯酸酯、將該等例示化合物之丙烯酸酯換為甲基丙烯酸酯之甲基丙烯酸酯、同樣地換為伊康酸酯之伊康酸酯、換為丁烯酸酯之丁烯酸酯或換為順丁烯二酸酯之順丁烯二酸酯等。Examples of the ester of the aliphatic polyhydroxy compound and the unsaturated carboxylic acid include ethylene glycol diacrylate, triethylene glycol diacrylate, trimethylolpropane triacrylate, and trimethylolethane triacrylate. Acrylates of aliphatic polyhydroxy compounds such as esters, pentaerythritol diacrylate, pentaerythritol triacrylate, pentaerythritol tetraacrylate, dipentaerythritol tetraacrylate, dipentaerythritol pentaacrylate, dipentaerythritol hexaacrylate, glycerol acrylate, The acrylate of the exemplified compound is changed to the methacrylate of the methacrylate, the same is changed to the iconate of the iconate, the butenoate of the butenoate, or the maleate Esters of maleic acid and the like.

作為芳香族聚羥基化合物與不飽和羧酸之酯,可列舉:對苯二酚二丙烯酸酯、對苯二酚二甲基丙烯酸酯、間苯二酚二丙烯酸酯、間苯二酚二甲基丙烯酸酯、鄰苯三酚三丙烯酸酯等芳香族聚羥基化合物之丙烯酸酯及甲基丙烯酸酯等。Examples of the ester of an aromatic polyhydroxy compound and an unsaturated carboxylic acid include hydroquinone diacrylate, hydroquinone dimethacrylate, resorcinol diacrylate, and resorcinol dimethyl. Acrylic esters and methacrylic esters of aromatic polyhydroxy compounds, such as acrylate and pyrogallol triacrylate.

作為藉由多元羧酸及不飽和羧酸與多元羥基化合物之酯化反應所獲得之酯,未必為單一物質,若列舉具有代表性之具體例,則可列舉:丙烯酸、鄰苯二甲酸、及乙二醇之縮合物;丙烯酸、順丁烯二酸、及二乙二醇之縮合物;甲基丙烯酸、對苯二甲酸及季戊四醇之縮合物;丙烯酸、己二酸、丁二醇及甘油之縮合物等。The ester obtained by the esterification reaction of a polycarboxylic acid and an unsaturated carboxylic acid with a polyhydroxy compound is not necessarily a single substance. If a representative specific example is listed, acrylic acid, phthalic acid, and Condensates of ethylene glycol; Condensates of acrylic acid, maleic acid, and diethylene glycol; Condensates of methacrylic acid, terephthalic acid, and pentaerythritol; Condensates of acrylic acid, adipic acid, butanediol, and glycerol Condensate, etc.

除此以外,作為本發明所使用之多官能乙烯性單體之例,有用的是:如使多異氰酸酯化合物與含羥基之(甲基)丙烯酸酯或使多異氰酸酯化合物與多元醇及含羥基之(甲基)丙烯酸酯進行反應所獲得之(甲基)丙烯酸胺基甲酸酯類;如多元環氧化合物與羥基(甲基)丙烯酸酯或(甲基)丙烯酸之加成反應物之環氧丙烯酸酯類;伸乙基雙丙烯醯胺等丙烯醯胺類;鄰苯二甲酸二烯丙酯等烯丙酯類;鄰苯二甲酸二乙烯酯等含乙烯基之化合物等。In addition, as examples of the polyfunctional ethylenic monomer used in the present invention, it is useful to use a polyisocyanate compound and a hydroxyl group-containing (meth) acrylate or a polyisocyanate compound and a polyol and a hydroxyl group-containing compound. (Meth) acrylic acid urethanes obtained by reacting (meth) acrylic acid esters; such as epoxy acrylic acid of addition reaction products of polyhydric epoxy compounds and hydroxyl (meth) acrylic acid esters or (meth) acrylic acid Esters; Acrylamides such as ethacrylamide; Allyl esters such as diallyl phthalate; Vinyl compounds such as diethylene phthalate.

作為上述(甲基)丙烯酸胺基甲酸酯類,例如可列舉:DPHA-40H、UX-5000、UX-5002D-P20、UX-5003D、UX-5005(日本化藥公司製造)、U-2PPA、U-6LPA、U-10PA、U-33H、UA-53H、UA-32P、UA-1100H(新中村化學工業公司製造)、UA-306H、UA-510H、UF-8001G(共榮社化學公司製造)、UV-1700B、UV-7600B、UV-7605B、UV-7630B、UV7640B(日本合成化學工業公司製造)等。Examples of the (meth) acrylic acid urethanes include DPHA-40H, UX-5000, UX-5002D-P20, UX-5003D, UX-5005 (manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.), U-2PPA, U-6LPA, U-10PA, U-33H, UA-53H, UA-32P, UA-1100H (made by Shin Nakamura Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.), UA-306H, UA-510H, UF-8001G (made by Kyoeisha Chemical Co., Ltd. ), UV-1700B, UV-7600B, UV-7605B, UV-7630B, UV7640B (manufactured by Nippon Synthetic Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.) and the like.

該等中,就硬化性之觀點而言,作為(d)乙烯性不飽和化合物,較佳為使用(甲基)丙烯酸烷基酯,更佳為使用二季戊四醇六丙烯酸酯。 該等可單獨使用一種,亦可將兩種以上併用。Among these, from the viewpoint of hardenability, as the (d) ethylenically unsaturated compound, an alkyl (meth) acrylate is preferably used, and dipentaerythritol hexaacrylate is more preferably used. These can be used alone or in combination of two or more.

<(e)溶劑> 本發明之感光性著色組合物可含有(e)溶劑。藉由含有(e)溶劑,可使顏料分散於溶劑中,又,有塗佈變得容易之傾向。 本發明之感光性著色組合物通常以(a)著色劑、(b)鹼可溶性樹脂、(c)光聚合起始劑、及(d)乙烯性不飽和化合物、以及視需要使用之其他各種成分溶解或分散於溶劑中之狀態使用。溶劑中,就分散性或塗佈性之觀點而言,較佳為有機溶劑。<(E) Solvent> The photosensitive coloring composition of this invention may contain (e) a solvent. By containing the (e) solvent, a pigment can be disperse | distributed in a solvent, and application | coating tends to become easy. The photosensitive coloring composition of the present invention generally comprises (a) a colorant, (b) an alkali-soluble resin, (c) a photopolymerization initiator, and (d) an ethylenically unsaturated compound, and various other components used as necessary. Use in a state of being dissolved or dispersed in a solvent. Among solvents, an organic solvent is preferred from the viewpoint of dispersibility or coating properties.

有機溶劑中,就塗佈性之觀點而言,較佳為選擇沸點為100~300℃之範圍者,更佳為選擇沸點為120~280℃之範圍者。再者,此處所謂之沸點意指於壓力1013.25 hPa下之沸點,以下關於沸點全部相同。Among organic solvents, from the viewpoint of coating properties, it is preferred to select a boiling point in the range of 100 to 300 ° C, and more preferred to select a boiling point in the range of 120 to 280 ° C. The boiling point herein means the boiling point at a pressure of 1013.25 hPa, and all the boiling points are the same below.

作為此種有機溶劑,例如可列舉如下者。 乙二醇單甲醚、乙二醇單乙醚、乙二醇單丙醚、乙二醇單丁醚、丙二醇單甲醚、丙二醇單乙醚、丙二醇單正丁醚、丙二醇第三丁醚、二乙二醇單甲醚、二乙二醇單乙醚、二乙二醇單正丁醚、甲氧基甲基戊醇、二丙二醇單乙醚、二丙二醇單甲醚、3-甲氧基丁醇、3-甲基-3-甲氧基丁醇、三乙二醇單甲醚、三乙二醇單乙醚、三丙二醇甲醚之類的二醇單烷基醚類; 乙二醇二甲醚、乙二醇二乙醚、二乙二醇二甲醚、二乙二醇二乙醚、二乙二醇二丙醚、二乙二醇二丁醚、二丙二醇二甲醚之類的二醇二烷基醚類;Examples of such an organic solvent include the following. Ethylene glycol monomethyl ether, ethylene glycol monoethyl ether, ethylene glycol monopropyl ether, ethylene glycol monobutyl ether, propylene glycol monomethyl ether, propylene glycol monoethyl ether, propylene glycol mono-n-butyl ether, propylene glycol third butyl ether, diethyl ether Glycol monomethyl ether, diethylene glycol monoethyl ether, diethylene glycol mono-n-butyl ether, methoxymethylpentanol, dipropylene glycol monoethyl ether, dipropylene glycol monomethyl ether, 3-methoxybutanol, 3 -Glycol monoalkyl ethers such as methyl-3-methoxybutanol, triethylene glycol monomethyl ether, triethylene glycol monoethyl ether, and tripropylene glycol methyl ether; ethylene glycol dimethyl ether, ethyl Glycol diethyl ether, diethylene glycol dimethyl ether, diethylene glycol diethyl ether, diethylene glycol dipropyl ether, diethylene glycol dibutyl ether, dipropylene glycol dimethyl ether and the like class;

乙二醇單甲醚乙酸酯、乙二醇單乙醚乙酸酯、乙二醇單正丁醚乙酸酯、丙二醇單甲醚乙酸酯、丙二醇單乙醚乙酸酯、丙二醇單丙醚乙酸酯、丙二醇單丁醚乙酸酯、甲氧基乙酸丁酯、3-甲氧基乙酸丁酯、甲氧基乙酸戊酯、二乙二醇單甲醚乙酸酯、二乙二醇單乙醚乙酸酯、二乙二醇單正丁醚乙酸酯、二丙二醇單甲醚乙酸酯、三乙二醇單甲醚乙酸酯、三乙二醇單乙醚乙酸酯、3-甲基-3-甲氧基乙酸丁酯之類的二醇烷基醚乙酸酯類; 乙二醇二乙酸酯、1,3-丁二醇二乙酸酯、1,6-己醇二乙酸酯等二醇二乙酸酯類; 乙酸環己酯等乙酸烷基酯類; 戊基醚、二乙醚、二丙醚、二異丙醚、二丁醚、二戊醚、乙基異丁基醚、二己醚之類的醚類;Ethylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate, ethylene glycol monoethyl ether acetate, ethylene glycol mono-n-butyl ether acetate, propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate, propylene glycol monoethyl ether acetate, propylene glycol monopropyl ether ethyl Acid esters, propylene glycol monobutyl ether acetate, butyl methoxy acetate, 3-methoxy butyl acetate, amyl methoxy acetate, diethylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate, diethylene glycol mono Diethyl ether acetate, diethylene glycol mono-n-butyl ether acetate, dipropylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate, triethylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate, triethylene glycol monoethyl ether acetate, 3-methyl ether Glycol alkyl ether ether acetates such as butyl-3-methoxyacetate; ethylene glycol diacetate, 1,3-butanediol diacetate, 1,6-hexanol diethyl Glycol diacetates such as acid esters; alkyl acetates such as cyclohexyl acetate; pentyl ether, diethyl ether, dipropyl ether, diisopropyl ether, dibutyl ether, dipentyl ether, ethyl isobutyl Ethers such as ether and dihexyl ether;

丙酮、甲基乙基酮、甲基戊基酮、甲基異丙基酮、甲基異戊基酮、二異丙基酮、二異丁基酮、甲基異丁基酮、環己酮、乙基戊基酮、甲基丁基酮、甲基己基酮、甲基壬基酮、甲氧基甲基戊酮之類的酮類; 乙醇、丙醇、丁醇、己醇、環己醇、乙二醇、丙二醇、丁二醇、二乙二醇、二丙二醇、三乙二醇、甲氧基甲基戊醇、甘油、苄醇之類的一元或多元醇類; 正戊烷、正辛烷、二異丁烯、正己烷、己烯、異戊二烯、二戊烯、十二烷之類的脂肪族烴類; 環己烷、甲基環己烷、甲基環己烯、聯環己烷之類的脂環式烴類;Acetone, methyl ethyl ketone, methyl amyl ketone, methyl isopropyl ketone, methyl isoamyl ketone, diisopropyl ketone, diisobutyl ketone, methyl isobutyl ketone, cyclohexanone , Ketones such as ethylpentyl ketone, methylbutyl ketone, methylhexyl ketone, methylnonyl ketone, methoxymethylpentanone; ethanol, propanol, butanol, hexanol, cyclohexyl Mono- or polyhydric alcohols such as alcohol, ethylene glycol, propylene glycol, butanediol, diethylene glycol, dipropylene glycol, triethylene glycol, methoxymethylpentanol, glycerol, benzyl alcohol; n-pentane, Aliphatic hydrocarbons such as n-octane, diisobutylene, n-hexane, hexene, isoprene, dipentene, dodecane; cyclohexane, methylcyclohexane, methylcyclohexene, Alicyclic hydrocarbons such as cyclohexane;

苯、甲苯、二甲苯、異丙苯之類的芳香族烴類; 甲酸戊酯、甲酸乙酯、乙酸乙酯、乙酸丁酯、乙酸丙酯、乙酸戊酯、異丁酸甲酯、乙二醇乙酸酯、丙酸乙酯、丙酸丙酯、丁酸丁酯、丁酸異丁酯、異丁酸甲酯、辛酸乙酯、硬脂酸丁酯、苯甲酸乙酯、3-乙氧基丙酸甲酯、3-乙氧基丙酸乙酯、3-甲氧基丙酸甲酯、3-甲氧基丙酸乙酯、3-甲氧基丙酸丙酯、3-甲氧基丙酸丁酯、γ-丁內酯之類的鏈狀或環狀酯類; 3-甲氧基丙酸、3-乙氧基丙酸之類的烷氧基羧酸類; 氯丁烷、氯戊烷之類的鹵化烴類; 甲氧基甲基戊酮之類的醚酮類; 乙腈、苯甲腈之類的腈類等。Aromatic hydrocarbons such as benzene, toluene, xylene, cumene; pentyl formate, ethyl formate, ethyl acetate, butyl acetate, propyl acetate, pentyl acetate, methyl isobutyrate, ethylene glycol Alcohol acetate, ethyl propionate, propyl propionate, butyl butyrate, isobutyl butyrate, methyl isobutyrate, ethyl octoate, butyl stearate, ethyl benzoate, 3-ethyl Methyloxypropionate, ethyl 3-ethoxypropionate, methyl 3-methoxypropionate, ethyl 3-methoxypropionate, propyl 3-methoxypropionate, 3-methylpropionate Chain or cyclic esters such as butyloxypropionate and γ-butyrolactone; Alkoxycarboxylic acids such as 3-methoxypropionic acid and 3-ethoxypropionic acid; Chlorobutane And halogenated hydrocarbons such as chloropentane; ether ketones such as methoxymethylpentanone; nitriles such as acetonitrile and benzonitrile.

作為相當於上述之市售之有機溶劑,可列舉:礦油精、Varsol#2、Apco#18溶劑、Apco稀釋劑、Socal溶劑No.1及No.2、Solvesso#150、Shell TS28溶劑、卡必醇、乙基卡必醇、丁基卡必醇、甲基賽路蘇(「賽路蘇」為註冊商標;以下相同)、乙基賽路蘇、乙基賽路蘇乙酸酯、甲基賽路蘇乙酸酯、二乙二醇二甲醚(均為商品名)等。 該等有機溶劑可單獨使用,亦可將兩種以上併用。Examples of the commercially available organic solvents include: mineral spirits, Varsol # 2, Apco # 18 solvent, Apco thinner, Socal solvents No. 1 and No. 2, Solvesso # 150, Shell TS28 solvent, card Bisanol, ethyl carbitol, butyl carbitol, methyl cyrus ("Syrus" is a registered trademark; the same below), ethyl cyrus, ethyl cyrus acetate, a Kiselosu acetate, diethylene glycol dimethyl ether (both are trade names), and the like. These organic solvents may be used alone or in combination of two or more.

於藉由光微影法形成著色間隔物之情形時,較佳為選擇沸點為100~200℃之範圍者作為有機溶劑。更佳為具有120~170℃之沸點者。In the case where the colored spacer is formed by a photolithography method, it is preferable to select, as the organic solvent, a boiling point in the range of 100 to 200 ° C. More preferably, it has a boiling point of 120 to 170 ° C.

上述有機溶劑中,就塗佈性、表面張力等之平衡良好,組合物中之構成成分之溶解度相對較高之方面而言,較佳為二醇烷基醚乙酸酯類。 又,二醇烷基醚乙酸酯類可單獨使用,亦可併用其他有機溶劑。作為所併用之有機溶劑,尤佳者為二醇單烷基醚類。其中,尤其是就組合物中之構成成分之溶解性而言,較佳為丙二醇單甲醚。再者,二醇單烷基醚類之極性較高,若添加量過多,則有顏料容易凝聚,其後獲得之感光性著色組合物之黏度提高等保存穩定性降低之傾向,因此溶劑中之二醇單烷基醚類之比率較佳為5質量%~30質量%,更佳為5質量%~20質量%。Among the above-mentioned organic solvents, glycol alkyl ether acetates are preferred in terms of a good balance in coatability, surface tension, and the like, and relatively high solubility of constituent components in the composition. The glycol alkyl ether acetates may be used alone or in combination with other organic solvents. As the organic solvent used in combination, glycol monoalkyl ethers are particularly preferred. Among these, propylene glycol monomethyl ether is preferred in terms of the solubility of the constituents in the composition. In addition, glycol monoalkyl ethers have high polarity. If the amount is too large, the pigment tends to aggregate, and the storage stability of the photosensitive coloring composition obtained thereafter tends to decrease, such as storage stability. The ratio of the diol monoalkyl ethers is preferably 5 to 30% by mass, and more preferably 5 to 20% by mass.

又,亦較佳為併用具有150℃以上之沸點之有機溶劑(以下有時稱為「高沸點溶劑」)。藉由併用此種高沸點溶劑,感光性著色組合物變得不易乾燥,具有防止組合物中之顏料之均勻之分散狀態因急遽之乾燥而受到破壞之效果。即,具有防止產生例如因狹縫噴嘴尖端之著色劑等之析出、固化引起之雜質缺陷的效果。就此種效果較高之方面而言,上述各種溶劑中,尤佳為二乙二醇單正丁醚、二乙二醇單正丁醚乙酸酯、及二乙二醇單乙醚乙酸酯。In addition, it is also preferable to use an organic solvent having a boiling point of 150 ° C. or higher (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a “high boiling point solvent”). By using such a high-boiling-point solvent in combination, the photosensitive coloring composition becomes difficult to dry, and has the effect of preventing the uniform dispersion state of the pigment in the composition from being damaged by rapid drying. That is, it has the effect of preventing the generation | occurrence | production of the impurity defect by precipitation and solidification of the toner etc. of a slit nozzle tip, for example. In terms of such a high effect, among the above-mentioned various solvents, diethylene glycol mono-n-butyl ether, diethylene glycol mono-n-butyl ether acetate, and diethylene glycol monoethyl ether acetate are particularly preferred.

於併用高沸點溶劑之情形時,有機溶劑中之高沸點溶劑之含有比率較佳為3質量%~50質量%,更佳為5質量%~40質量%,尤佳為5質量%~30質量%。藉由設為上述下限值以上,有可抑制例如於狹縫噴嘴尖端著色劑等析出、固化而引起雜質缺陷之情況之傾向,又,藉由設為上述上限值以下,有可抑制組合物之乾燥溫度變慢,抑制減壓乾燥製程之觸控不良或預烘烤之氣孔痕跡等問題之傾向。When a high boiling point solvent is used in combination, the content ratio of the high boiling point solvent in the organic solvent is preferably 3% to 50% by mass, more preferably 5% to 40% by mass, and even more preferably 5% to 30% by mass. %. By setting it to the above lower limit value, for example, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of impurity defects caused by the precipitation and curing of colorant and the like at the tip of the slit nozzle, and by setting it to the above upper limit value, the combination can be suppressed. The drying temperature of the product becomes slower, which suppresses the tendency of problems such as poor touch in the reduced pressure drying process or pre-baking pore marks.

再者,沸點150℃以上之高沸點溶劑可為二醇烷基醚乙酸酯類,又,亦可為二醇烷基醚類,於該情形時,可不另外含有沸點150℃以上之高沸點溶劑。 作為較佳之高沸點溶劑,例如可列舉上文所述之各種溶劑中之二乙二醇單正丁醚乙酸酯、二乙二醇單乙醚乙酸酯、二丙二醇甲醚乙酸酯、1,3-丁二醇二乙酸酯、1,6-己醇二乙酸酯、甘油三乙酸酯等。In addition, the high-boiling point solvent having a boiling point of 150 ° C or higher may be a glycol alkyl ether acetate or a glycol alkyl ether. In this case, a high-boiling point solvent having a boiling point of 150 ° C or higher may not be additionally contained. . Examples of preferred high-boiling solvents include diethylene glycol mono-n-butyl ether acetate, diethylene glycol monoethyl ether acetate, dipropylene glycol methyl ether acetate, and , 3-butanediol diacetate, 1,6-hexanol diacetate, glycerol triacetate, and the like.

<(f)分散劑> 於本發明之感光性著色組合物中,以使(a)著色劑微細地分散,且使其分散狀態穩定為目的,亦可含有(f)分散劑。 作為(f)分散劑,較佳為具有官能基之高分子分散劑,進而就分散穩定性之方面而言,較佳為具有如下基等官能基之高分子分散劑:羧基;磷酸基;磺酸基;或該等之鹽之基;一級、二級或三級胺基;四級銨鹽基;源自吡啶、嘧啶、吡等含氮雜環之基。其中,尤其就於分散顏料時可以少量之分散劑進行分散之觀點而言,尤佳為具有如下基等鹼性官能基之高分子分散劑:一級、二級或三級胺基;四級銨鹽基;源自吡啶、嘧啶、吡等含氮雜環之基。<(F) Dispersant> The (f) dispersant may be contained in the photosensitive coloring composition of the present invention for the purpose of finely dispersing the (a) colorant and stabilizing the dispersed state. As the (f) dispersant, a polymer dispersant having a functional group is preferred, and in terms of dispersion stability, a polymer dispersant having a functional group such as the following group is preferred: carboxyl group; phosphate group; sulfonic acid Acid group; or such a salt group; primary, secondary or tertiary amine group; quaternary ammonium salt group; a group derived from a nitrogen-containing heterocyclic ring such as pyridine, pyrimidine and pyridine. Among them, especially from the viewpoint of dispersing a small amount of a dispersant when dispersing a pigment, a polymer dispersant having a basic functional group such as a primary group, a secondary group, or a tertiary amine group; a quaternary ammonium group is particularly preferable. Base; a radical derived from a nitrogen-containing heterocyclic ring such as pyridine, pyrimidine, and pyridine.

又,作為高分子分散劑,例如可列舉:胺基甲酸酯系分散劑、丙烯酸系分散劑、聚伸乙基亞胺系分散劑、聚烯丙基胺系分散劑、包含具有胺基之單體與巨單體之分散劑、聚氧乙烯烷基醚系分散劑、聚氧乙烯二酯系分散劑、聚醚磷酸系分散劑、聚酯磷酸系分散劑、山梨糖醇酐脂肪族酯系分散劑、脂肪族改性聚酯系分散劑等。Examples of the polymer dispersant include a urethane-based dispersant, an acrylic-based dispersant, a polyethylenimine-based dispersant, a polyallylamine-based dispersant, and a polymer containing an amine group. Monomer and macromonomer dispersant, polyoxyethylene alkyl ether dispersant, polyoxyethylene diester dispersant, polyether phosphoric acid dispersant, polyester phosphoric acid dispersant, sorbitan fatty acid fatty ester Based dispersants, aliphatic modified polyester based dispersants, and the like.

作為此種分散劑之具體例,可列舉商品名為如下者:EFKA(註冊商標;BASF公司製造)、DISPERBYK(註冊商標;BYK-Chemie公司製造)、Disparlon(註冊商標;楠本化成公司製造)、SOLSPERSE(註冊商標;Lubrizol公司製造)、KP(信越化學工業公司製造)、Polyflow(共榮社化學公司製造)、Ajisper(註冊商標;Ajinomoto公司製造)等。 該等高分子分散劑可單獨使用一種,或者亦可併用兩種以上。Specific examples of such a dispersant include the following: EFKA (registered trademark; manufactured by BASF), DISPERBYK (registered trademark; manufactured by BYK-Chemie), Disparlon (registered trademark; manufactured by Kusumoto Chemical Co., Ltd.), SOLSPERSE (registered trademark; manufactured by Lubrizol), KP (made by Shin-Etsu Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.), Polyflow (made by Kyoeisha Chemical Co., Ltd.), Ajisper (registered trademark; manufactured by Ajinomoto), and the like. These polymer dispersants may be used singly or in combination of two or more kinds.

高分子分散劑之重量平均分子量(Mw)通常為700以上,較佳為1000以上,又,通常為100000以下,較佳為50000以下。 該等中,就顏料之分散性之觀點而言,(f)分散劑較佳為含有具有官能基之胺基甲酸酯系高分子分散劑及/或丙烯酸系高分子分散劑,尤佳為含有丙烯酸系高分子分散劑。 又,就分散性、保存性之方面而言,較佳為具有鹼性官能基且具有聚酯鍵及/或聚醚鍵之高分子分散劑。The weight average molecular weight (Mw) of the polymer dispersant is usually 700 or more, preferably 1,000 or more, and usually 100,000 or less, and preferably 50,000 or less. Among these, from the viewpoint of dispersibility of the pigment, the (f) dispersant is preferably a urethane-based polymer dispersant and / or an acrylic polymer dispersant having a functional group, and particularly preferably Contains acrylic polymer dispersant. In terms of dispersibility and storage properties, a polymer dispersant having a basic functional group and having a polyester bond and / or a polyether bond is preferred.

作為胺基甲酸酯系及丙烯酸系高分子分散劑,例如可列舉:DISPERBYK160~166、182系列(均為胺基甲酸酯系)、DISPERBYK2000、2001、BYK-LPN21116等(均為丙烯酸系)(以上均為BYK-Chemie公司製造)。 作為胺基甲酸酯系高分子分散劑,若具體例示較佳之化學結構,則例如可列舉藉由使多異氰酸酯化合物、分子內具有1個或2個羥基之數量平均分子量300~10000之化合物、及分子內具有活性氫與三級胺基之化合物進行反應而獲得之重量平均分子量1000~200000之分散樹脂等。藉由利用苄基氯等四級化劑對該等進行處理,可使全部或一部分三級胺基成為四級銨鹽基。Examples of the urethane-based and acrylic polymer dispersants include DISPERBYK 160 to 166, 182 series (both urethane-based), DISPERBYK 2000, 2001, BYK-LPN21116, etc. (both acrylic-based) (The above are manufactured by BYK-Chemie). As a urethane-based polymer dispersant, if a preferable chemical structure is specifically exemplified, for example, a polyisocyanate compound, a compound having one or two hydroxyl groups in the molecule and an average molecular weight of 300 to 10,000, And a dispersion resin having a weight average molecular weight of 1,000 to 200,000 obtained by reacting a compound having active hydrogen in the molecule with a tertiary amine group. By treating these with a quaternizing agent such as benzyl chloride, all or part of the tertiary amine group can be made into a quaternary ammonium salt group.

作為上述多異氰酸酯化合物之例,可列舉:對苯二異氰酸酯、2,4-甲苯二異氰酸酯、2,6-甲苯二異氰酸酯、4,4'-二苯基甲烷二異氰酸酯、萘-1,5-二異氰酸酯、聯甲苯胺二異氰酸酯等芳香族二異氰酸酯;六亞甲基二異氰酸酯、離胺酸甲酯二異氰酸酯、2,4,4-三甲基六亞甲基二異氰酸酯、二聚酸二異氰酸酯等脂肪族二異氰酸酯;異佛酮二異氰酸酯、4,4'-亞甲基雙(環己基異氰酸酯)、ω,ω'-二異氰酸基二甲基環己烷等脂環族二異氰酸酯;苯二甲基二異氰酸酯、α,α,α',α'-四甲基苯二甲基二異氰酸酯等具有芳香環之脂肪族二異氰酸酯;離胺酸酯三異氰酸酯、1,6,11-十一烷三異氰酸酯、1,8-二異氰酸基-4-異氰酸基甲基辛烷、1,3,6-六亞甲基三異氰酸酯、聯環庚烷三異氰酸酯、三(異氰酸基苯基)甲烷、三(異氰酸基苯基)硫代磷酸酯等三異氰酸酯;以及該等之三聚物、水加成物、及該等之多元醇加成物等。作為多異氰酸酯,較佳為有機二異氰酸酯之三聚物,最佳為甲苯二異氰酸酯之三聚物與異佛酮二異氰酸酯之三聚物。該等可單獨使用一種,亦可將兩種以上併用。Examples of the polyisocyanate compound include p-phenylene diisocyanate, 2,4-toluene diisocyanate, 2,6-toluene diisocyanate, 4,4'-diphenylmethane diisocyanate, and naphthalene-1,5- Aromatic diisocyanates such as diisocyanate, ditoluidine diisocyanate; hexamethylene diisocyanate, methyl lyme diisocyanate, 2,4,4-trimethylhexamethylene diisocyanate, dimer acid diisocyanate And other aliphatic diisocyanates; isophorone diisocyanate, 4,4'-methylenebis (cyclohexyl isocyanate), ω, ω'-diisocyanatodimethylcyclohexane and other alicyclic diisocyanates; Aliphatic diisocyanates with aromatic rings such as xylylene diisocyanate, α, α, α ', α'-tetramethylxylylene diisocyanate; triamine isocyanate, 1,6,11-ten Monoalkane triisocyanate, 1,8-diisocyanato-4-isocyanatomethyloctane, 1,3,6-hexamethylenetriisocyanate, bicycloheptane triisocyanate, tris (isocyanate) Acidic phenyl) methane, tris (isocyanatophenyl) phosphorothioate, and other triisocyanates; and terpolymers, water adducts, And such polyol adducts. As the polyisocyanate, a terpolymer of an organic diisocyanate is preferable, and a terpolymer of a toluene diisocyanate and a terpolymer of an isophorone diisocyanate are most preferable. These can be used alone or in combination of two or more.

作為異氰酸酯之三聚物之製造方法,可列舉如下方法:使用適當之三聚化觸媒、例如三級胺類、膦類、烷氧化物類、金屬氧化物、羧酸鹽類等,使上述多異氰酸酯類進行異氰酸酯基之部分三聚化,藉由添加觸媒毒而停止三聚化後,藉由溶劑萃取、薄膜蒸餾而去除未反應之多異氰酸酯,從而獲得目標之含異氰脲酸酯基之多異氰酸酯。Examples of the method for producing an isocyanate trimer include the following: using an appropriate trimerization catalyst such as a tertiary amine, a phosphine, an alkoxide, a metal oxide, or a carboxylate; Polyisocyanates undergo partial trimerization of isocyanate groups. After the trimerization is stopped by adding catalyst poisons, unreacted polyisocyanates are removed by solvent extraction and thin-film distillation to obtain the target isocyanurate-containing compounds. Polyisocyanate.

作為分子內具有1個或2個羥基之數量平均分子量300~10000之化合物,可列舉:聚醚二醇(polyether glycol)、聚酯二醇(polyester glycol)、聚碳酸酯二醇、聚烯烴二醇等、以及該等化合物之單個末端羥基經碳數1~25之烷基進行烷氧基化而成者及該等兩種以上之混合物。 作為聚醚二醇(polyether glycol),可列舉:聚醚二醇(polyether diol)、聚醚酯二醇(polyetherester diol)、及該等兩種以上之混合物。作為聚醚二醇(polyether diol),可列舉使環氧烷進行均聚合或共聚合而獲得者,例如可列舉:聚乙二醇、聚丙二醇、聚乙二醇-丙二醇、聚氧四亞甲基二醇、聚氧六亞甲基二醇、聚氧八亞甲基二醇及該等之兩種以上之混合物。Examples of compounds having a number average molecular weight of 300 to 10,000 having one or two hydroxyl groups in the molecule include polyether glycol, polyester glycol, polycarbonate diol, and polyolefin diene. Alcohols, etc., and the alkoxylation of a single terminal hydroxyl group of these compounds with an alkyl group having 1 to 25 carbon atoms, and a mixture of two or more of these. Examples of the polyether glycol include polyether diol, polyetherester diol, and a mixture of two or more of these. Examples of the polyether diol include those obtained by homopolymerizing or copolymerizing an alkylene oxide, and examples thereof include polyethylene glycol, polypropylene glycol, polyethylene glycol-propylene glycol, and polyoxytetramethylene. Glycol, polyoxyhexamethylene glycol, polyoxyoctamethylene glycol, and mixtures of two or more of these.

作為聚醚酯二醇(polyetherester diol),可列舉藉由使含醚基之二醇或其與其他二醇之混合物與二羧酸或該等之酐進行反應、或者使聚酯二醇(polyester glycol)與環氧烷進行反應而獲得者,例如可列舉聚(聚氧四亞甲基)己二酸酯等。作為聚醚二醇(polyether glycol),最佳為聚乙二醇、聚丙二醇、聚氧四亞甲基二醇或該等之化合物之單個末端羥基經碳數1~25之烷基進行烷氧基化而成之化合物。Examples of the polyetherester diol include a reaction of an ether group-containing diol or a mixture with another diol with a dicarboxylic acid or an anhydride thereof, or a polyesterdiol (polyesterester diol). A glycol) is obtained by reacting with an alkylene oxide, and examples thereof include poly (polyoxytetramethylene) adipate. As the polyether glycol, polyethylene glycol, polypropylene glycol, polyoxytetramethylene glycol, or a compound thereof is preferably alkoxylated with a single terminal hydroxyl group through an alkyl group having 1 to 25 carbon atoms. A compound formed by radicalization.

作為聚酯二醇(polyester glycol),可列舉:使二羧酸(丁二酸、戊二酸、己二酸、癸二酸、反丁烯二酸、順丁烯二酸、鄰苯二甲酸等)或該等之酐與二醇(glycol)(乙二醇、二乙二醇、三乙二醇、丙二醇、二丙二醇、三丙二醇、1,2-丁二醇、1,3-丁二醇、1,4-丁二醇、2,3-丁二醇、3-甲基-1,5-戊二醇、新戊二醇、2-甲基-1,3-丙二醇、2-甲基-2-丙基-1,3-丙二醇、2-丁基-2-乙基-1,3-丙二醇、1,5-戊二醇、1,6-己二醇、2-甲基-2,4-戊二醇、2,2,4-三甲基-1,3-戊二醇、2-乙基-1,3-己二醇、2,5-二甲基-2,5-己二醇、1,8-八亞甲基二醇、2-甲基-1,8-八亞甲基二醇、1,9-壬二醇等脂肪族二醇;雙羥基甲基環己烷等脂環族二醇;苯二甲醇、雙羥基乙氧基苯等芳香族二醇;N-甲基二乙醇胺等N-烷基二烷醇胺等)進行縮聚而獲得者,例如聚己二酸乙二酯、聚己二酸丁二酯、聚六亞甲基己二酸酯、聚己二酸乙二酯/己二酸丙二酯等;或者可列舉使用上述二醇(diol)類或碳數1~25之一元醇作為起始劑而獲得之聚內酯二醇或聚內酯單醇,例如聚己內酯二醇、聚甲基戊內酯及該等之兩種以上之混合物。作為聚酯二醇(polyester glycol),最佳為聚己內酯二醇或碳數1~25之醇作為起始劑之聚己內酯。Examples of the polyester glycol include dicarboxylic acids (succinic acid, glutaric acid, adipic acid, sebacic acid, fumaric acid, maleic acid, and phthalic acid). Etc.) or their anhydrides and glycols (ethylene glycol, diethylene glycol, triethylene glycol, propylene glycol, dipropylene glycol, tripropylene glycol, 1,2-butanediol, 1,3-butanediol Alcohol, 1,4-butanediol, 2,3-butanediol, 3-methyl-1,5-pentanediol, neopentyl glycol, 2-methyl-1,3-propanediol, 2-methyl Propyl-2-propyl-1,3-propanediol, 2-butyl-2-ethyl-1,3-propanediol, 1,5-pentanediol, 1,6-hexanediol, 2-methyl- 2,4-pentanediol, 2,2,4-trimethyl-1,3-pentanediol, 2-ethyl-1,3-hexanediol, 2,5-dimethyl-2,5 -Aliphatic diols such as hexanediol, 1,8-octamethylene glycol, 2-methyl-1,8-octamethylene glycol, 1,9-nonanediol; bishydroxymethyl ring Alicyclic diols such as hexane; aromatic diols such as benzyl alcohol, dihydroxyethoxybenzene; N-alkyldialkanolamines such as N-methyldiethanolamine, etc.) Ethylene adipate, polybutylene adipate, polyhexamethylene adipate, polyethylene adipate / Adipate, etc .; or a polylactone diol or a polylactone monool obtained using the above diols or a monohydric alcohol having 1 to 25 carbons, for example, polycaprolactone Lactone glycol, polymethylvalerolactone and mixtures of two or more of these. As the polyester glycol, a polycaprolactone diol or a polycaprolactone having a carbon number of 1 to 25 is used as a starter.

作為聚碳酸酯二醇,可列舉聚碳酸(1,6-己二酯)、聚碳酸(3-甲基-1,5-戊二酯)等,作為聚烯烴二醇,可列舉聚丁二烯二醇、氫化型聚丁二烯二醇、氫化型聚異戊二烯二醇等。 該等可單獨使用一種,亦可將兩種以上併用。Examples of the polycarbonate diol include polycarbonate (1,6-hexane diester) and polycarbonate (3-methyl-1,5-pentane diester), and the like, and examples of the polyolefin diol include polybutadiene Ethylene glycol, hydrogenated polybutadiene glycol, hydrogenated polyisoprene glycol, and the like. These can be used alone or in combination of two or more.

分子內具有1個或2個羥基之化合物之數量平均分子量通常為300~10000,較佳為500~6000,進而較佳為1000~4000。The number average molecular weight of the compound having one or two hydroxyl groups in the molecule is usually 300 to 10,000, preferably 500 to 6000, and still more preferably 1,000 to 4,000.

對本發明所使用之分子內具有活性氫與三級胺基之化合物進行說明。 作為活性氫,即直接鍵結於氧原子、氮原子或硫原子之氫原子,可列舉羥基、胺基、硫醇基等官能基中之氫原子,其中,較佳為胺基、尤其是一級胺基之氫原子。The compound having an active hydrogen and a tertiary amine group in the molecule used in the present invention will be described. Active hydrogen, that is, a hydrogen atom directly bonded to an oxygen atom, a nitrogen atom, or a sulfur atom, includes a hydrogen atom in a functional group such as a hydroxyl group, an amine group, or a thiol group. Among them, an amine group is preferred, especially a primary Amino hydrogen atoms.

三級胺基並無特別限定,例如可列舉具有碳數1~4之烷基之胺基、或雜環結構,更具體而言,可列舉咪唑環或三唑環等。 若例示此種分子內具有活性氫與三級胺基之化合物,則可列舉:N,N-二甲基-1,3-丙二胺、N,N-二乙基-1,3-丙二胺、N,N-二丙基-1,3-丙二胺、N,N-二丁基-1,3-丙二胺、N,N-二甲基乙二胺、N,N-二乙基乙二胺、N,N-二丙基乙二胺、N,N-二丁基乙二胺、N,N-二甲基-1,4-丁二胺、N,N-二乙基-1,4-丁二胺、N,N-二丙基-1,4-丁二胺、N,N-二丁基-1,4-丁二胺等。The tertiary amine group is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include an amine group having an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms or a heterocyclic structure, and more specifically, an imidazole ring or a triazole ring. Examples of such compounds having active hydrogen and tertiary amine groups in the molecule include N, N-dimethyl-1,3-propanediamine, N, N-diethyl-1,3-propane Diamine, N, N-dipropyl-1,3-propanediamine, N, N-dibutyl-1,3-propanediamine, N, N-dimethylethylenediamine, N, N- Diethylethylenediamine, N, N-dipropylethylenediamine, N, N-dibutylethylenediamine, N, N-dimethyl-1,4-butanediamine, N, N-di Ethyl-1,4-butanediamine, N, N-dipropyl-1,4-butanediamine, N, N-dibutyl-1,4-butanediamine, and the like.

又,作為三級胺基為含氮雜環結構之情形時之該含氮雜環,可列舉:吡唑環、咪唑環、三唑環、四唑環、吲哚環、咔唑環、吲唑環、苯并咪唑環、苯并三唑環、苯并㗁唑環、苯并噻唑環、苯并噻二唑環等含氮五員雜環;吡啶環、嗒環、嘧啶環、三環、喹啉環、吖啶環、異喹啉環等含氮六員雜環。該等含氮雜環中,較佳為咪唑環或三唑環。Examples of the nitrogen-containing heterocyclic ring when the tertiary amine group has a nitrogen-containing heterocyclic ring structure include a pyrazole ring, an imidazole ring, a triazole ring, a tetrazole ring, an indole ring, a carbazole ring, and indene. Nitrogen-containing five-membered heterocycles such as azole ring, benzimidazole ring, benzotriazole ring, benzoxazole ring, benzothiazole ring, and benzothiadiazole ring; pyridine ring, data ring, pyrimidine ring, tricyclic ring , Quinoline ring, acridine ring, isoquinoline ring and other nitrogen-containing six-membered heterocyclic rings. Among these nitrogen-containing heterocyclic rings, an imidazole ring or a triazole ring is preferred.

若具體例示該等具有咪唑環與胺基之化合物,則可列舉:1-(3-胺基丙基)咪唑、組胺酸、2-胺基咪唑、1-(2-胺基乙基)咪唑等。又,若具體例示具有三唑環與胺基之化合物,則可列舉:3-胺基-1,2,4-三唑、5-(2-胺基-5-氯苯基)-3-苯基-1H-1,2,4-三唑、4-胺基-4H-1,2,4-三唑-3,5-二醇、3-胺基-5-苯基-1H-1,3,4-三唑、5-胺基-1,4-二苯基-1,2,3-三唑、3-胺基-1-苄基-1H-2,4-三唑等。其中,較佳為N,N-二甲基-1,3-丙二胺、N,N-二乙基-1,3-丙二胺、1-(3-胺基丙基)咪唑、3-胺基-1,2,4-三唑。 該等可單獨使用一種,亦可將兩種以上併用。Specific examples of these compounds having an imidazole ring and an amino group include 1- (3-aminopropyl) imidazole, histidine, 2-aminoimidazole, and 1- (2-aminoethyl) Imidazole and so on. In addition, if a compound having a triazole ring and an amino group is specifically exemplified, 3-amino-1,2,4-triazole, 5- (2-amino-5-chlorophenyl) -3- Phenyl-1H-1,2,4-triazole, 4-amino-4H-1,2,4-triazole-3,5-diol, 3-amino-5-phenyl-1H-1 , 3,4-triazole, 5-amino-1,4-diphenyl-1,2,3-triazole, 3-amino-1-benzyl-1H-2,4-triazole, and the like. Among these, N, N-dimethyl-1,3-propanediamine, N, N-diethyl-1,3-propanediamine, 1- (3-aminopropyl) imidazole, 3 -Amino-1,2,4-triazole. These can be used alone or in combination of two or more.

製造胺基甲酸酯系高分子分散劑時之原料之較佳之調配比率相對於多異氰酸酯化合物100質量份,分子內具有1個或2個羥基之數量平均分子量300~10000之化合物為10~200質量份,較佳為20~190質量份,進而較佳為30~180質量份,分子內具有活性氫與三級胺基之化合物為0.2~25質量份,較佳為0.3~24質量份。The preferred compounding ratio of the raw materials when manufacturing the urethane-based polymer dispersant is 10 to 200 relative to 100 parts by mass of the polyisocyanate compound, and a compound having one or two hydroxyl groups in the molecule and an average molecular weight of 300 to 10,000. 20 to 190 parts by mass, more preferably 30 to 180 parts by mass, and 0.2 to 25 parts by mass of the compound having active hydrogen and a tertiary amine group in the molecule, preferably 0.3 to 24 parts by mass.

胺基甲酸酯系高分子分散劑之製造係依照製造聚胺基甲酸酯樹脂之公知之方法而進行。作為製造時之溶劑,通常可使用:丙酮、甲基乙基酮、甲基異丁基酮、環戊酮、環己酮、異佛酮等酮類;乙酸乙酯、乙酸丁酯、乙酸賽路蘇等酯類;苯、甲苯、二甲苯、己烷等烴類;二丙酮醇、異丙醇、第二丁醇、第三丁醇等一部分醇類;二氯甲烷、氯仿等氯化物;四氫呋喃、二乙醚等醚類;二甲基甲醯胺、N-甲基吡咯啶酮、二甲基亞碸等非質子性極性溶劑等。該等可單獨使用一種,亦可將兩種以上併用。The production of the urethane-based polymer dispersant is performed in accordance with a known method for producing a polyurethane resin. As the solvent during production, acetone, methyl ethyl ketone, methyl isobutyl ketone, cyclopentanone, cyclohexanone, isophorone and other ketones can be generally used; ethyl acetate, butyl acetate, and acetate Lu Su and other esters; Benzene, toluene, xylene, hexane and other hydrocarbons; diacetone alcohol, isopropanol, second butanol, third butanol and some alcohols; methylene chloride, chloroform and other chlorides; Ethers such as tetrahydrofuran and diethyl ether; aprotic polar solvents such as dimethylformamide, N-methylpyrrolidone, and dimethylsulfine. These can be used alone or in combination of two or more.

於上述製造時,通常可使用胺基甲酸酯化反應觸媒。作為該觸媒,例如可列舉:二丁基二月桂酸錫、二辛基二月桂酸錫、二丁基二辛酸錫、辛酸亞錫等錫系;乙醯丙酮酸鐵、氯化鐵等鐵系;三乙胺、三乙二胺等三級胺系等。該等可單獨使用一種,亦可將兩種以上併用。In the above-mentioned production, a urethane reaction catalyst can be generally used. Examples of the catalyst include tin-based compounds such as dibutyltin dilaurate, dioctyltin dilaurate, dibutyltin dioctoate, and stannous octoate; iron such as iron pyruvate and ferric chloride Department; tertiary amines such as triethylamine, triethylenediamine, etc. These can be used alone or in combination of two or more.

分子內具有活性氫與三級胺基之化合物之導入量以反應後之胺值計,較佳為控制為1~100 mgKOH/g之範圍。更佳為5~95 mgKOH/g之範圍。胺值係藉由酸中和滴定鹼性胺基,使其與酸值相對應而以KOH之mg數表示之值。藉由設為上述下限值以上,有分散能力變得良好之傾向,又,藉由設為上述上限值以下,有容易抑制顯影性之降低之傾向。The introduction amount of the compound having an active hydrogen and a tertiary amine group in the molecule is preferably controlled within a range of 1 to 100 mgKOH / g based on the amine value after the reaction. A more preferable range is 5 to 95 mgKOH / g. The amine value is a value expressed in mg of KOH by titrating a basic amine group by acid neutralization to correspond to the acid value. When it is more than the said lower limit value, there exists a tendency for a dispersibility to become favorable, and when it is below the said upper limit value, there exists a tendency for the fall of the developability to be suppressed easily.

再者,於以上反應中異氰酸酯基殘存於高分子分散劑中之情形時,若進一步藉由醇或胺基化合物破壞異氰酸酯基,則產物之經時穩定性變高,故而較佳。 胺基甲酸酯系高分子分散劑之重量平均分子量(Mw)通常為1000~200000之範圍,較佳為2000~100000之範圍,更佳為3000~50000之範圍。藉由設為上述下限值以上,有分散性及分散穩定性變得良好之傾向,藉由設為上述上限值以下,有容易抑制溶解性或分散性之降低之傾向。Furthermore, in the case where the isocyanate group remains in the polymer dispersant in the above reaction, if the isocyanate group is further destroyed by an alcohol or an amine compound, the stability of the product over time is improved, which is preferable. The weight average molecular weight (Mw) of the urethane-based polymer dispersant is usually in the range of 1,000 to 200,000, preferably in the range of 2,000 to 100,000, and more preferably in the range of 3,000 to 50,000. When it is more than the said lower limit, dispersibility and dispersion stability tend to become favorable, and when it is below the said upper limit, there exists a tendency for the solubility or the fall of a dispersibility to be suppressed easily.

另一方面,作為丙烯酸系高分子分散劑,較佳為使用具有官能基(此處所謂之官能基為上文作為高分子分散劑所含之官能基而說明之官能基)之含不飽和基之單體與不具有官能基之含不飽和基之單體之無規共聚物、接枝共聚物、嵌段共聚物。該等共聚物可藉由公知之方法而製造。On the other hand, as the acrylic polymer dispersant, it is preferable to use an unsaturated group containing a functional group (the functional group referred to herein is the functional group described as the functional group contained in the polymer dispersant). Random copolymers, graft copolymers and block copolymers of monomers and unsaturated monomers without functional groups. These copolymers can be produced by a known method.

作為具有官能基之含不飽和基之單體,可列舉如下物質作為具體例:(甲基)丙烯酸、丁二酸2-(甲基)丙烯醯氧基乙酯、鄰苯二甲酸2-(甲基)丙烯醯氧基乙酯、六氫鄰苯二甲酸2-(甲基)丙烯醯氧基乙酯、丙烯酸二聚物等具有羧基之不飽和單體;(甲基)丙烯酸二甲胺基乙酯、(甲基)丙烯酸二乙胺基乙酯及該等之四級化物等具有三級胺基、四級銨鹽基之不飽和單體。該等可單獨使用一種,亦可將兩種以上併用。Examples of the unsaturated group-containing monomer having a functional group include the following: (meth) acrylic acid, 2- (meth) acrylic acid ethoxyethyl succinate, and 2- (phthalic acid) Unsaturated monomers having a carboxyl group, such as meth) acryloxyethyl ester, 2- (meth) acryloxyethyl hexahydrophthalate, acrylic acid dimer; dimethylamine (meth) acrylate Unsaturated monomers having tertiary amine groups and quaternary ammonium salt groups such as ethyl ethyl ester, diethylamino ethyl (meth) acrylate, and quaternary compounds thereof. These can be used alone or in combination of two or more.

作為不具有官能基之含不飽和基之單體,可列舉:(甲基)丙烯酸甲酯、(甲基)丙烯酸乙酯、(甲基)丙烯酸丙酯、(甲基)丙烯酸異丙酯、(甲基)丙烯酸正丁酯、(甲基)丙烯酸異丁酯、(甲基)丙烯酸第三丁酯、(甲基)丙烯酸苄酯、(甲基)丙烯酸苯酯、(甲基)丙烯酸環己酯、(甲基)丙烯酸苯氧基乙酯、(甲基)丙烯酸苯氧基甲酯、(甲基)丙烯酸2-乙基己酯、(甲基)丙烯酸異基酯、(甲基)丙烯酸三環癸酯、(甲基)丙烯酸四氫糠酯、N-乙烯基吡咯啶酮、苯乙烯及其衍生物、α-甲基苯乙烯;N-環己基順丁烯二醯亞胺、N-苯基順丁烯二醯亞胺、N-苄基順丁烯二醯亞胺等N-取代順丁烯二醯亞胺;丙烯腈、乙酸乙烯酯及聚(甲基)丙烯酸甲酯巨單體、聚苯乙烯巨單體、聚(甲基)丙烯酸2-羥基乙酯巨單體、聚乙二醇巨單體、聚丙二醇巨單體、聚己內酯巨單體等巨單體等。該等可單獨使用一種,亦可將兩種以上併用。Examples of the unsaturated group-containing monomer having no functional group include methyl (meth) acrylate, ethyl (meth) acrylate, propyl (meth) acrylate, isopropyl (meth) acrylate, N-butyl (meth) acrylate, isobutyl (meth) acrylate, third butyl (meth) acrylate, benzyl (meth) acrylate, phenyl (meth) acrylate, (meth) acrylic ring Hexyl ester, phenoxyethyl (meth) acrylate, phenoxymethyl (meth) acrylate, 2-ethylhexyl (meth) acrylate, isopropyl (meth) acrylate, (meth) Tricyclodecyl acrylate, tetrahydrofurfuryl (meth) acrylate, N-vinylpyrrolidone, styrene and its derivatives, α-methylstyrene; N-cyclohexylcis-butenediamidine, N-substituted maleimide, such as N-phenyl maleimide, N-benzyl maleimide, acrylonitrile, vinyl acetate, and poly (meth) acrylate Macromonomers, polystyrene macromonomers, 2-hydroxyethyl (meth) acrylate macromonomers, polyethylene glycol macromonomers, polypropylene glycol macromonomers, polycaprolactone macromonomers, and other macromonomers体 等。 Body and so on. These can be used alone or in combination of two or more.

丙烯酸系高分子分散劑尤佳為包含具有官能基之A嵌段與不具有官能基之B嵌段之A-B或B-A-B嵌段共聚物,於該情形時,於A嵌段中除了包含源自上述含有官能基之含不飽和基之單體之部分結構以外,亦可包含源自上述不含官能基之含不飽和基之單體之部分結構,該等可以無規共聚合或嵌段共聚合之任一態樣含有於該A嵌段中。又,不含官能基之部分結構於A嵌段中之含有比率通常為80質量%以下,較佳為50質量%以下,進而較佳為30質量%以下。The acrylic polymer dispersant is particularly preferably an AB or BAB block copolymer containing an A block having a functional group and a B block having no functional group. In this case, the A block contains a source other than the one derived from the above. In addition to the partial structure of the unsaturated group-containing monomer containing a functional group, it may also include a partial structure derived from the unsaturated group-containing monomer containing no functional group, which may be randomly copolymerized or block copolymerized. Either aspect is contained in the A block. The content ratio of the functional group-free partial structure in the A block is usually 80% by mass or less, preferably 50% by mass or less, and further preferably 30% by mass or less.

B嵌段係包含源自上述不含官能基之含不飽和基之單體之部分結構者,亦可於1個B嵌段中含有兩種以上源自單體之部分結構,該等可以無規共聚合或嵌段共聚合之任一態樣含有於該B嵌段中。 該A-B或B-A-B嵌段共聚物例如係藉由以下所示之活性聚合法而製備。活性聚合法中有陰離子活性聚合法、陽離子活性聚合法、自由基活性聚合法,其中陰離子活性聚合法之聚合活性種為陰離子,例如以下述流程表示。The B block contains a partial structure derived from the above-mentioned unsaturated group-containing monomer having no functional group, and may also contain two or more partial structures derived from the monomer in one B block. Either the regular copolymerization or the block copolymerization is contained in the B block. This A-B or B-A-B block copolymer is prepared by the living polymerization method shown below, for example. The living polymerization method includes an anionic living polymerization method, a cationic living polymerization method, and a radical living polymerization method. The polymerization active species of the anionic living polymerization method is an anion, and is represented by the following scheme, for example.

[化41] [Chemical 41]

上述流程中,Ar1 為一價有機基,Ar2 為與Ar1 不同之一價有機基,M為金屬原子,s及t分別為1以上之整數。In the above scheme, Ar 1 is a monovalent organic group, Ar 2 is a monovalent organic group different from Ar 1 , M is a metal atom, and s and t are each an integer of 1 or more.

自由基活性聚合法之聚合活性種為自由基,例如以下述流程表示。The polymerization active species of the radical living polymerization method is a radical, and is represented by the following scheme, for example.

[化42] [Chemical 42]

上述流程中,Ar1 為一價有機基,Ar2 為與Ar1 不同之一價有機基,j及k分別為1以上之整數,Ra 為氫原子或一價有機基,Rb 為與Ra 不同之氫原子或一價有機基。In the above scheme, Ar 1 is a monovalent organic group, Ar 2 is a monovalent organic group different from Ar 1 , j and k are integers of 1 or more, Ra is a hydrogen atom or a monovalent organic group, and R b is Ra is a different hydrogen atom or a monovalent organic group.

於合成該丙烯酸系高分子分散劑時,可採用日本專利特開平9-62002號公報、或P. Lutz, P. Masson et al, Polym. Bull. 12, 79 (1984),B.C. Anderson, G.D. Andrews et al, Macromolecules, 14, 1601(1981),K. Hatada, K. Ute, et al, Polym. J. 17, 977(1985)、18, 1037(1986),右手浩一、畑田耕一、高分子加工、36, 366(1987),東村敏延、沢本光男、高分子論文集、46, 189(1989),M. Kuroki, T. Aida, J. Am. Chem. Sic, 109, 4737(1987),相田卓三、井上祥平、有機合成化學、43, 300(1985),D.Y. Sogoh, W.R. Hertler et al, Macromolecules, 20, 1473(1987)等所記載之公知之方法。To synthesize the acrylic polymer dispersant, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 9-62002 or P. Lutz, P. Masson et al, Polym. Bull. 12, 79 (1984), BC Anderson, GD Andrews can be used. et al, Macromolecules, 14, 1601 (1981), K. Hatada, K. Ute, et al, Polym. J. 17, 977 (1985), 18, 1037 (1986), Right Hand Koichi, Putian Koichi, Polymer Processing , 36, 366 (1987), Tomura Toshiyuki, Enomoto Masao, Polymer Essays, 46, 189 (1989), M. Kuroki, T. Aida, J. Am. Chem. Sic, 109, 4737 (1987), Well-known methods described in Aida Takusan, Inoue Shoji, Organic Synthetic Chemistry, 43, 300 (1985), DY Sogoh, WR Hertler et al, Macromolecules, 20, 1473 (1987) and the like.

本發明可使用之丙烯酸系高分子分散劑可為A-B嵌段共聚物,亦可為B-A-B嵌段共聚物,構成該共聚物之A嵌段/B嵌段比較佳為1/99~80/20,尤佳為5/95~60/40(質量比),藉由設為該範圍內,有可確保分散性與保存穩定性之平衡之傾向。 又,本發明可使用之A-B嵌段共聚物、B-A-B嵌段共聚物1 g中之四級銨鹽基之量通常較佳為0.1~10 mmol,藉由設為該範圍內,有可確保良好之分散性之傾向。The acrylic polymer dispersant usable in the present invention may be an AB block copolymer or a BAB block copolymer. The A block / B block constituting the copolymer is preferably 1/99 to 80/20. It is particularly preferably 5/95 to 60/40 (mass ratio). By setting it within this range, there is a tendency that a balance between dispersibility and storage stability can be ensured. In addition, the amount of the quaternary ammonium salt group in 1 g of the AB block copolymer and the BAB block copolymer that can be used in the present invention is usually preferably 0.1 to 10 mmol. By setting the range to be within this range, good quality can be ensured. Tendency to be decentralized.

再者,於此種嵌段共聚物中,通常存在含有製造過程中所產生之胺基之情形,其胺值為1~100 mgKOH/g左右,就分散性之觀點而言,較佳為10 mgKOH/g以上,更佳為30 mgKOH/g以上,進而較佳為50 mgKOH/g以上,又,較佳為90 mgKOH/g以下,更佳為80 mgKOH/g以下,進而較佳為75 mgKOH/g以下。上限與下限之組合例如較佳為10~90 mgKOH/g,更佳為30~80 mgKOH/g,進而較佳為50~75 mgKOH/g。 此處,該等嵌段共聚物等分散劑之胺值係以與分散劑試樣中之除溶劑以外之固形物成分每1 g之鹼量當量之KOH之質量表示,係藉由如下方法而測定。 精確稱量0.5~1.5 g分散劑試樣置於100 mL之燒杯中,以50 mL之乙酸將其溶解。使用具備pH電極之自動滴定裝置,藉由0.1 mol/L之HClO4 乙酸溶液對該溶液進行中和滴定。以滴定pH曲線之反曲點作為滴定終點,藉由下式求出胺值。In addition, in such a block copolymer, an amine group generated in the manufacturing process may be contained, and its amine value is about 1 to 100 mgKOH / g. From the viewpoint of dispersibility, it is preferably 10 Above mgKOH / g, more preferably above 30 mgKOH / g, still more preferably above 50 mgKOH / g, still more preferably below 90 mgKOH / g, even more preferably below 80 mgKOH / g, even more preferably 75 mgKOH / g or less. The combination of the upper limit and the lower limit is, for example, preferably from 10 to 90 mgKOH / g, more preferably from 30 to 80 mgKOH / g, and even more preferably from 50 to 75 mgKOH / g. Here, the amine value of dispersants such as these block copolymers is represented by the mass of KOH equivalent to the alkali equivalent per 1 g of solid components other than the solvent in the dispersant sample. Determination. Accurately weigh 0.5 to 1.5 g of the dispersant sample into a 100 mL beaker and dissolve it with 50 mL of acetic acid. Using an automatic titration device with a pH electrode, the solution was neutralized and titrated with a 0.1 mol / L HClO 4 acetic acid solution. Using the inflection point of the titration pH curve as the end point of the titration, the amine value was determined by the following formula.

胺值[mgKOH/g]=(561×V)/(W×S) [其中,W表示分散劑試樣稱取量[g],V表示滴定終點之滴定量[mL],S表示分散劑試樣之固形物成分濃度[質量%]] 又,該嵌段共聚物之酸值亦取決於成為該酸值之根源之酸性基之有無及種類,一般較低為宜,通常為10 mgKOH/g以下,其重量平均分子量(Mw)較佳為1000~100000之範圍。藉由設為上述範圍內,有可確保良好之分散性之傾向。Amine value [mgKOH / g] = (561 × V) / (W × S) [where W is the dispersant sample weighing amount [g], V is the titration end point of the titration [mL], S is the dispersant Sample solid content concentration [mass%]] The acid value of the block copolymer also depends on the presence and type of the acidic group that is the source of the acid value. Generally, a lower value is preferred, usually 10 mgKOH / The weight average molecular weight (Mw) of g or less is preferably in the range of 1,000 to 100,000. By setting it as the said range, there exists a tendency for favorable dispersibility to be ensured.

於丙烯酸系高分子分散劑具有四級銨鹽基作為官能基之情形時,對丙烯酸系高分子分散劑之具體之結構並無特別限定,就分散性之觀點而言,較佳為具有下述式(i)所表示之重複單元(以下有時稱為「重複單元(i)」)。When the acrylic polymer dispersant has a quaternary ammonium salt group as a functional group, the specific structure of the acrylic polymer dispersant is not particularly limited. From the viewpoint of dispersibility, it is preferable to have the following A repeating unit represented by formula (i) (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "repeating unit (i)").

[化43] [Chemical 43]

上述式(i)中,R31 ~R33 分別獨立為氫原子、可具有取代基之烷基、可具有取代基之芳基、或可具有取代基之芳烷基,R31 ~R33 中2個以上可互相鍵結而形成環狀結構,R34 為氫原子或甲基,X為二價連結基,Y- 為抗衡陰離子。In the above formula (i), R 31 to R 33 are each independently a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group which may have a substituent, an aryl group which may have a substituent, or an aralkyl group which may have a substituent. Among R 31 to R 33 Two or more may be bonded to each other to form a cyclic structure, R 34 is a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, X is a divalent linking group, and Y - is a counter anion.

上述式(i)之R31 ~R33 中之可具有取代基之烷基之碳數並無特別限定,通常為1以上,又,較佳為10以下,更佳為6以下。作為烷基之具體例,可列舉:甲基、乙基、丙基、丁基、戊基、己基、庚基、辛基等,該等中,較佳為甲基、乙基、丙基、丁基、戊基、或己基,更佳為甲基、乙基、丙基、或丁基。又,可為直鏈狀、支鏈狀之任一者。又,亦可含有環己基、環己基甲基等環狀結構。The number of carbon atoms of the alkyl group which may have a substituent among R 31 to R 33 in the formula (i) is not particularly limited, but it is usually 1 or more, preferably 10 or less, and more preferably 6 or less. Specific examples of the alkyl group include methyl, ethyl, propyl, butyl, pentyl, hexyl, heptyl, and octyl. Among these, methyl, ethyl, propyl, Butyl, pentyl, or hexyl, more preferably methyl, ethyl, propyl, or butyl. Moreover, it may be either linear or branched. Moreover, it may contain cyclic structures, such as a cyclohexyl group and a cyclohexylmethyl group.

上述式(i)之R31 ~R33 中之可具有取代基之芳基之碳數並無特別限定,通常為6以上,又,較佳為16以下,更佳為12以下。作為芳基之具體例,可列舉:苯基、甲基苯基、乙基苯基、二甲基苯基、二乙基苯基、萘基、蒽基等,該等中,較佳為苯基、甲基苯基、乙基苯基、二甲基苯基、或二乙基苯基,更佳為苯基、甲基苯基、或乙基苯基。The number of carbon atoms of the aryl group which may have a substituent among R 31 to R 33 in the formula (i) is not particularly limited, but is usually 6 or more, preferably 16 or less, and more preferably 12 or less. Specific examples of the aryl group include phenyl, methylphenyl, ethylphenyl, dimethylphenyl, diethylphenyl, naphthyl, and anthracenyl. Among these, benzene is preferred Group, methylphenyl, ethylphenyl, dimethylphenyl, or diethylphenyl, more preferably phenyl, methylphenyl, or ethylphenyl.

上述式(i)之R31 ~R33 中之可具有取代基之芳烷基之碳數並無特別限定,通常為7以上,又,較佳為16以下,更佳為12以下。作為芳烷基之具體例,可列舉:苯基甲基(苄基)、苯基乙基(苯乙基)、苯基丙基、苯基丁基、苯基異丙基等,該等中,較佳為苯基甲基、苯基乙基、苯基丙基、或苯基丁基,更佳為苯基甲基、或苯基乙基。The number of carbon atoms of the aralkyl group which may have a substituent among R 31 to R 33 in the formula (i) is not particularly limited, but is usually 7 or more, preferably 16 or less, and more preferably 12 or less. Specific examples of the aralkyl group include phenylmethyl (benzyl), phenylethyl (phenethyl), phenylpropyl, phenylbutyl, and phenylisopropyl. Among these, Is preferably phenylmethyl, phenylethyl, phenylpropyl, or phenylbutyl, and more preferably phenylmethyl or phenylethyl.

該等中,就分散性之觀點而言,較佳為R31 ~R33 分別獨立為烷基或芳烷基,具體而言,較佳為R31 及R33 分別獨立為甲基或乙基,且R32 為苯基甲基或苯基乙基,進而較佳為R31 及R33 為甲基,且R32 為苯基甲基。Among these, from the viewpoint of dispersibility, it is preferable that R 31 to R 33 are each independently an alkyl group or an aralkyl group, and specifically, it is preferable that R 31 and R 33 are each independently a methyl group or an ethyl group. And R 32 is phenylmethyl or phenylethyl, more preferably R 31 and R 33 are methyl, and R 32 is phenylmethyl.

又,於丙烯酸系高分子分散劑具有三級胺基作為官能基之情形時,就分散性之觀點而言,較佳為具有下述式(ii)所表示之重複單元(以下有時稱為「重複單元(ii)」)。When the acrylic polymer dispersant has a tertiary amine group as a functional group, from the viewpoint of dispersibility, it is preferable to have a repeating unit represented by the following formula (ii) (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "Repeat Unit (ii)").

[化44] [Chemical 44]

上述式(ii)中,R35 及R36 分別獨立為氫原子、可具有取代基之烷基、可具有取代基之芳基、或可具有取代基之芳烷基,R35 及R36 可互相鍵結而形成環狀結構,R37 為氫原子或甲基,Z為二價連結基。In the above formula (ii), R 35 and R 36 are each independently a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group which may have a substituent, an aryl group which may have a substituent, or an aralkyl group which may have a substituent. R 35 and R 36 may be Bonded to each other to form a cyclic structure, R 37 is a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, and Z is a divalent linking group.

又,作為上述式(ii)之R35 及R36 中之可具有取代基之烷基,可較佳地採用作為上述式(i)之R31 ~R33 所例示者。 同樣地,作為上述式(ii)之R35 及R36 中之可具有取代基之芳基,可較佳地採用作為上述式(i)之R31 ~R33 所例示者。又,作為上述式(ii)之R35 及R36 中之可具有取代基之芳烷基,可較佳地採用作為上述式(i)之R31 ~R33 所例示者。In addition, as the alkyl group which may have a substituent among R 35 and R 36 in the formula (ii), those exemplified as R 31 to R 33 in the formula (i) can be preferably used. Similarly, as the aryl group which may have a substituent in R 35 and R 36 in the above formula (ii), those exemplified as R 31 to R 33 in the above formula (i) can be preferably used. In addition, as the aralkyl group which may have a substituent among R 35 and R 36 in the formula (ii), those exemplified as R 31 to R 33 in the formula (i) can be preferably used.

該等中,較佳為R35 及R36 分別獨立為可具有取代基之烷基,更佳為甲基、或乙基。Among these, R 35 and R 36 are each preferably an alkyl group which may have a substituent, and more preferably a methyl group or an ethyl group.

作為上述式(i)之R31 ~R33 及上述式(ii)之R35 及R36 中之烷基、芳烷基或芳基可具有之取代基,可列舉:鹵素原子、烷氧基、苯甲醯基、羥基等。Examples of the substituent which the alkyl group, aralkyl group, or aryl group in R 31 to R 33 in the formula (i) and R 35 and R 36 in the formula (ii) may have include a halogen atom and an alkoxy group. , Benzamidine, hydroxyl, etc.

於上述式(i)及(ii)中,作為二價連結基X及Z,例如可列舉碳數1~10之伸烷基、碳數6~12之伸芳基、-CONH-R43 -基、-COOR44 -基[其中,R43 及R44 為單鍵、碳數1~10之伸烷基、或碳數2~10之醚基(烷氧基烷基)]等,較佳為-COO-R44 -基。 又,於上述式(i)中,作為抗衡陰離子之Y- ,可列舉:Cl- 、Br- 、I- 、ClO4 - 、BF4 - 、CH3 COO- 、PF6 - 等。In the above formula (i) and (ii), examples of the divalent linking group X and Z, for example, include carbon atoms of the alkyl group having 1 to 10 extension, of 6 to 12 carbon atoms, an arylene group, -CONH-R 43 - Group, -COOR 44 -group [wherein R 43 and R 44 are a single bond, an alkylene group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, or an ether group (alkoxyalkyl group) having 2 to 10 carbon atoms], etc., are preferred It is -COO-R 44 -group. Further, in the above formula (I), as counter anions Y -, include: Cl -, Br -, I -, ClO 4 -, BF 4 -, CH 3 COO -, PF 6 - and the like.

上述式(i)所表示之重複單元之含有比率並無特別限定,就分散性之觀點而言,相對於上述式(i)所表示之重複單元之含有比率與上述式(ii)所表示之重複單元之含有比率之合計,較佳為60莫耳%以下,更佳為50莫耳%以下,進而較佳為40莫耳%以下,尤佳為35莫耳%以下,又,較佳為5莫耳%以上,更佳為10莫耳%以上,進而較佳為20莫耳%以上,尤佳為30莫耳%以上。The content ratio of the repeating unit represented by the above formula (i) is not particularly limited, and from the viewpoint of dispersibility, the content ratio of the repeating unit represented by the above formula (i) and that represented by the above formula (ii) The total content of the repeating unit is preferably 60 mol% or less, more preferably 50 mol% or less, still more preferably 40 mol% or less, even more preferably 35 mol% or less, and more preferably 5 mol% or more, more preferably 10 mol% or more, still more preferably 20 mol% or more, and even more preferably 30 mol% or more.

又,上述式(i)所表示之重複單元於高分子分散劑之總重複單元中所占之含有比率並無特別限定,就分散性之觀點而言,較佳為1莫耳%以上,更佳為5莫耳%以上,進而較佳為10莫耳%以上,又,較佳為50莫耳%以下,更佳為30莫耳%以下,進而較佳為20莫耳%以下,尤佳為15莫耳%以下。The content ratio of the repeating unit represented by the above formula (i) to the total repeating unit of the polymer dispersant is not particularly limited. From the viewpoint of dispersibility, it is preferably 1 mol% or more. It is preferably 5 mol% or more, further preferably 10 mol% or more, and more preferably 50 mol% or less, more preferably 30 mol% or less, and still more preferably 20 mol% or less. It is 15 mol% or less.

又,上述式(ii)所表示之重複單元於高分子分散劑之總重複單元中所占之含有比率並無特別限定,就分散性之觀點而言,較佳為5莫耳%以上,更佳為10莫耳%以上,進而較佳為15莫耳%以上,尤佳為20莫耳%以上,又,較佳為60莫耳%以下,更佳為40莫耳%以下,進而較佳為30莫耳%以下,尤佳為25莫耳%以下。The content ratio of the repeating unit represented by the above formula (ii) to the total repeating unit of the polymer dispersant is not particularly limited. From the viewpoint of dispersibility, it is preferably 5 mol% or more, more It is preferably 10 mol% or more, further preferably 15 mol% or more, particularly preferably 20 mol% or more, and more preferably 60 mol% or less, more preferably 40 mol% or less, and more preferably It is 30 mol% or less, particularly preferably 25 mol% or less.

又,高分子分散劑就提高相對於溶劑等黏合劑成分之相溶性,提高分散穩定性之觀點而言,較佳為具有下述式(iii)所表示之重複單元(以下有時稱為「重複單元(iii)」)。In addition, the polymer dispersant preferably has a repeating unit represented by the following formula (iii) (hereinafter referred to as "" Repeating unit (iii) ").

[化45] [Chemical 45]

上述式(iii)中,R40 為伸乙基或伸丙基,R41 為可具有取代基之烷基,R42 為氫原子或甲基,n為1~20之整數。In the above formula (iii), R 40 is an ethylene or propyl group, R 41 is an alkyl group which may have a substituent, R 42 is a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, and n is an integer of 1-20.

上述式(iii)之R41 中之可具有取代基之烷基之碳數並無特別限定,通常為1以上,較佳為2以上,又,較佳為10以下,更佳為6以下。作為烷基之具體例,可列舉:甲基、乙基、丙基、丁基、戊基、己基、庚基、辛基等,該等中,較佳為甲基、乙基、丙基、丁基、戊基、或己基,更佳為甲基、乙基、丙基、或丁基。又,可為直鏈狀、支鏈狀之任一者。又,亦可含有環己基、環己基甲基等環狀結構。The number of carbon atoms of the alkyl group which may have a substituent in R 41 in the above formula (iii) is not particularly limited, but it is usually 1 or more, preferably 2 or more, more preferably 10 or less, and more preferably 6 or less. Specific examples of the alkyl group include methyl, ethyl, propyl, butyl, pentyl, hexyl, heptyl, and octyl. Among these, methyl, ethyl, propyl, Butyl, pentyl, or hexyl, more preferably methyl, ethyl, propyl, or butyl. Moreover, it may be either linear or branched. Moreover, it may contain cyclic structures, such as a cyclohexyl group and a cyclohexylmethyl group.

又,上述式(iii)中之n就相對於溶劑等黏合劑成分之相溶性與分散性之觀點而言,較佳為1以上,更佳為2以上,又,較佳為10以下,更佳為5以下。In addition, in the formula (iii), n is preferably 1 or more, more preferably 2 or more, and more preferably 10 or less from the viewpoint of compatibility and dispersibility with respect to a binder component such as a solvent. It is preferably 5 or less.

又,上述式(iii)所表示之重複單元於高分子分散劑之總重複單元中所占之含有比率並無特別限定,較佳為1莫耳%以上,更佳為2莫耳%以上,進而較佳為4莫耳%以上,又,較佳為30莫耳%以下,更佳為20莫耳%以下,進而較佳為10莫耳%以下。於為上述範圍內之情形時,有可兼顧相對於溶劑等黏合劑成分之相溶性與分散穩定性之傾向。The content ratio of the repeating unit represented by the formula (iii) in the total repeating unit of the polymer dispersant is not particularly limited, but it is preferably 1 mole% or more, and more preferably 2 mole% or more. It is more preferably 4 mol% or more, more preferably 30 mol% or less, more preferably 20 mol% or less, and still more preferably 10 mol% or less. When it is in the said range, there exists a tendency for compatibility with compatibility with a binder component, such as a solvent, and dispersion stability.

又,高分子分散劑就提高分散劑相對於溶劑等黏合劑成分之相溶性,提高分散穩定性之觀點而言,較佳為具有下述式(iv)所表示之重複單元(以下有時稱為「重複單元(iv)」)。The polymer dispersant preferably has a repeating unit represented by the following formula (iv) from the viewpoint of improving the compatibility of the dispersant with a binder component such as a solvent and improving the dispersion stability (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "Repeat Unit (iv)").

[化46] [Chemical 46]

上述式(iv)中,R38 為可具有取代基之烷基、可具有取代基之芳基、或可具有取代基之芳烷基,R39 為氫原子或甲基。In the formula (iv), R 38 is an alkyl group which may have a substituent, an aryl group which may have a substituent, or an aralkyl group which may have a substituent, and R 39 is a hydrogen atom or a methyl group.

上述式(iv)之R38 中之可具有取代基之烷基之碳數並無特別限定,通常為1以上,較佳為2以上,更佳為4以上,又,較佳為10以下,更佳為8以下。作為烷基之具體例,可列舉:甲基、乙基、丙基、丁基、戊基、己基、庚基、辛基等,該等中,較佳為甲基、乙基、丙基、丁基、戊基、或己基,更佳為甲基、乙基、丙基、或丁基。又,可為直鏈狀、支鏈狀之任一者。又,亦可含有環己基、環己基甲基等環狀結構。The number of carbons of the alkyl group which may have a substituent in R 38 in the above formula (iv) is not particularly limited, but is usually 1 or more, preferably 2 or more, more preferably 4 or more, and more preferably 10 or less. It is more preferably 8 or less. Specific examples of the alkyl group include methyl, ethyl, propyl, butyl, pentyl, hexyl, heptyl, and octyl. Among these, methyl, ethyl, propyl, Butyl, pentyl, or hexyl, more preferably methyl, ethyl, propyl, or butyl. Moreover, it may be either linear or branched. Moreover, it may contain cyclic structures, such as a cyclohexyl group and a cyclohexylmethyl group.

上述式(iv)之R38 中之可具有取代基之芳基之碳數並無特別限定,通常為6以上,又,較佳為16以下,更佳為12以下,進而較佳為8以下。作為芳基之具體例,可列舉:苯基、甲基苯基、乙基苯基、二甲基苯基、二乙基苯基、萘基、蒽基等,該等中,較佳為苯基、甲基苯基、乙基苯基、二甲基苯基、或二乙基苯基,更佳為苯基、甲基苯基、或乙基苯基。The number of carbon atoms of the aryl group which may have a substituent in R 38 in the above formula (iv) is not particularly limited, but it is usually 6 or more, preferably 16 or less, more preferably 12 or less, and even more preferably 8 or less. . Specific examples of the aryl group include phenyl, methylphenyl, ethylphenyl, dimethylphenyl, diethylphenyl, naphthyl, and anthracenyl. Among these, benzene is preferred Group, methylphenyl, ethylphenyl, dimethylphenyl, or diethylphenyl, more preferably phenyl, methylphenyl, or ethylphenyl.

上述式(iv)之R38 中之可具有取代基之芳烷基之碳數並無特別限定,通常為7以上,又,較佳為16以下,更佳為12以下,進而較佳為10以下。作為芳烷基之具體例,可列舉:苯基甲基、苯基乙基、苯基丙基、苯基丁基、苯基異丙基等,該等中,較佳為苯基甲基、苯基乙基、苯基丙基、或苯基丁基,更佳為苯基甲基、或苯基乙基。The carbon number of the aralkyl group which may have a substituent in R 38 in the above formula (iv) is not particularly limited, but it is usually 7 or more, preferably 16 or less, more preferably 12 or less, and even more preferably 10 the following. Specific examples of the aralkyl group include phenylmethyl, phenylethyl, phenylpropyl, phenylbutyl, and phenylisopropyl. Of these, phenylmethyl, Phenylethyl, phenylpropyl, or phenylbutyl, more preferably phenylmethyl or phenylethyl.

該等中,就溶劑相溶性與分散穩定性之觀點而言,R38 較佳為烷基、或芳烷基,更佳為甲基、乙基、或苯基甲基。 作為R38 中之烷基可具有之取代基,可列舉鹵素原子、烷氧基等。又,作為芳基或芳烷基可具有之取代基,可列舉鏈狀之烷基、鹵素原子、烷氧基等。又,R38 所表示之鏈狀之烷基包括直鏈狀及支鏈狀之任一者。Among these, from the viewpoint of solvent compatibility and dispersion stability, R 38 is preferably an alkyl group or an aralkyl group, and more preferably a methyl group, an ethyl group, or a phenylmethyl group. Examples of the substituent which the alkyl group in R 38 may have include a halogen atom and an alkoxy group. Examples of the substituent which the aryl group or aralkyl group may have include a chain alkyl group, a halogen atom, and an alkoxy group. Moreover, the linear alkyl group represented by R 38 includes any of a linear chain and a branched chain.

又,上述式(iv)所表示之重複單元於高分子分散劑之總重複單元中所占之含有比率就分散性之觀點而言,較佳為30莫耳%以上,更佳為40莫耳%以上,進而較佳為50莫耳%以上,又,較佳為80莫耳%以下,更佳為70莫耳%以下。In addition, the content ratio of the repeating unit represented by the above formula (iv) in the total repeating unit of the polymer dispersant is preferably 30 mol% or more, and more preferably 40 mol from the viewpoint of dispersibility. % Or more, more preferably 50 mol% or more, more preferably 80 mol% or less, and more preferably 70 mol% or less.

高分子分散劑亦可具有重複單元(i)、重複單元(ii)、重複單元(iii)及重複單元(iv)以外之重複單元。作為此種重複單元之例,可列舉源自如下單體之重複單元:苯乙烯、α-甲基苯乙烯等苯乙烯系單體;(甲基)丙烯醯氯等(甲基)丙烯酸鹽系單體;(甲基)丙烯醯胺、N-羥甲基丙烯醯胺等(甲基)丙烯醯胺系單體;乙酸乙烯酯;丙烯腈;烯丙基縮水甘油醚、丁烯酸縮水甘油醚;N-甲基丙烯醯基啉等單體。The polymer dispersant may have repeating units other than repeating unit (i), repeating unit (ii), repeating unit (iii), and repeating unit (iv). Examples of such repeating units include repeating units derived from the following monomers: styrene-based monomers such as styrene and α-methylstyrene; (meth) acrylic acid salts such as (meth) acrylic acid, chloride, and the like Monomers; (meth) acrylamide-based monomers such as (meth) acrylamide, N-hydroxymethacrylamine; vinyl acetate; acrylonitrile; allyl glycidyl ether, butyric acid glycidyl Ether; monomers such as N-methacryl fluorenylline.

高分子分散劑就進一步提高分散性之觀點而言,較佳為包含具有重複單元(i)及重複單元(ii)之A嵌段與不具有重複單元(i)及重複單元(ii)之B嵌段之嵌段共聚物。該嵌段共聚物較佳為A-B嵌段共聚物或B-A-B嵌段共聚物。藉由在A嵌段中不僅導入四級銨鹽基,而且亦導入三級胺基,意外地有分散劑之分散能力顯著提高之傾向。又,B嵌段較佳為具有重複單元(iii),更佳為進而具有重複單元(iv)。From the viewpoint of further improving dispersibility, the polymer dispersant preferably includes an A block having repeating units (i) and repeating units (ii) and a B having no repeating units (i) and repeating units (ii). Block copolymer The block copolymer is preferably an A-B block copolymer or a B-A-B block copolymer. By introducing not only a quaternary ammonium salt group but also a tertiary amine group into the A block, the dispersing ability of the dispersant tends to be significantly improved. The B block preferably has a repeating unit (iii), and more preferably has a repeating unit (iv).

重複單元(i)及重複單元(ii)可以無規共聚合、嵌段共聚合之任一態樣含有於A嵌段中。又,重複單元(i)及重複單元(ii)可於1個A嵌段中各含有兩種以上,於該情形時,各重複單元可以無規共聚合、嵌段共聚合之任一態樣含有於該A嵌段中。The repeating unit (i) and the repeating unit (ii) may be contained in the A block in any form of random copolymerization and block copolymerization. In addition, the repeating unit (i) and the repeating unit (ii) may each contain two or more types in one A block. In this case, each repeating unit may be in random copolymerization or block copolymerization. It is contained in this A block.

又,於A嵌段中可含有重複單元(i)及重複單元(ii)以外之重複單元,作為此種重複單元之例,可列舉上文所述之源自(甲基)丙烯酸酯系單體之重複單元等。重複單元(i)及重複單元(ii)以外之重複單元於A嵌段中之含量較佳為0~50莫耳%,更佳為0~20莫耳%,最佳為於A嵌段中不含該重複單元。The A block may contain repeating units other than repeating units (i) and (ii). Examples of such repeating units include the (meth) acrylate-based monomers described above. Body repeating unit and so on. The content of repeating units (i) and repeating units other than repeating unit (ii) in the A block is preferably 0 to 50 mol%, more preferably 0 to 20 mol%, and most preferably in the A block. This repeat unit is not included.

於B嵌段中可含有重複單元(iii)及(iv)以外之重複單元,作為此種重複單元之例,可列舉源自如下單體之重複單元:苯乙烯、α-甲基苯乙烯等苯乙烯系單體;(甲基)丙烯醯氯等(甲基)丙烯酸鹽系單體;(甲基)丙烯醯胺、N-羥甲基丙烯醯胺等(甲基)丙烯醯胺系單體;乙酸乙烯酯;丙烯腈;烯丙基縮水甘油醚、丁烯酸縮水甘油醚;N-甲基丙烯醯基啉等單體。重複單元(iii)及重複單元(iv)以外之重複單元於B嵌段中之含有比率較佳為0~50莫耳%,更佳為0~20莫耳%,最佳為於B嵌段中不含該重複單元。The B block may contain repeating units other than repeating units (iii) and (iv). Examples of such repeating units include repeating units derived from the following monomers: styrene, α-methylstyrene, etc. Styrene-based monomers; (meth) acrylic acid-based monomers such as (meth) acrylic acid chloride; (meth) acrylamide-based monomers such as (meth) acrylamide, N-hydroxymethacrylamide Body; vinyl acetate; acrylonitrile; allyl glycidyl ether, butyric acid glycidyl ether; monomers such as N-methacryl phosphonoline. The content of the repeating units (iii) and repeating units other than the repeating unit (iv) in the B block is preferably 0 to 50 mol%, more preferably 0 to 20 mol%, and most preferably the B block. This repeating unit is not included.

又,就提高分散穩定性之方面而言,(f)分散劑較佳為與下文所述之顏料衍生物併用。From the viewpoint of improving the dispersion stability, the (f) dispersant is preferably used in combination with a pigment derivative described below.

<感光性著色組合物之其他調配成分> 於本發明之感光性著色組合物中,除了上述成分以外,可適當調配矽烷偶合劑等密接改善劑、界面活性劑(塗佈性提高劑)、顏料衍生物、光酸產生劑、交聯劑、巰基化合物、顯影改良劑、紫外線吸收劑、抗氧化劑等添加劑。<Other Formulation Ingredients of Photosensitive Coloring Composition> In the photosensitive coloring composition of the present invention, in addition to the above components, adhesion improving agents such as silane coupling agents, surfactants (coating property improving agents), and pigments can be appropriately blended. Derivatives, photoacid generators, crosslinking agents, mercapto compounds, development improvers, ultraviolet absorbers, antioxidants and other additives.

(1)密接改善劑 為了改善與基板之密接性,亦可於本發明之感光性著色組合物中含有密接改善劑。作為密接改善劑,較佳為矽烷偶合劑、含磷酸基之化合物等。 作為矽烷偶合劑之種類,可單獨使用環氧系、(甲基)丙烯酸系、胺基系等各者中之一種,或可將兩種以上混合而使用。(1) Adhesion improving agent In order to improve adhesion to a substrate, the photosensitive coloring composition of the present invention may contain an adhesion improving agent. As the adhesion improving agent, a silane coupling agent, a phosphate group-containing compound, and the like are preferable. As the type of the silane coupling agent, one of an epoxy-based, (meth) acrylic-based, and amine-based one may be used alone, or two or more of them may be used in combination.

作為較佳之矽烷偶合劑,例如可列舉:3-甲基丙烯醯氧基丙基甲基二甲氧基甲矽烷、3-甲基丙烯醯氧基丙基三甲氧基甲矽烷等(甲基)丙烯醯氧基矽烷類;2-(3,4-環氧環己基)乙基三甲氧基甲矽烷、3-縮水甘油氧基丙基三甲氧基甲矽烷、3-縮水甘油氧基丙基甲基二乙氧基甲矽烷、3-縮水甘油氧基丙基三乙氧基甲矽烷等環氧矽烷類;3-脲基丙基三乙氧基甲矽烷等脲基矽烷類;3-異氰酸酯基丙基三乙氧基甲矽烷等異氰酸酯基矽烷類,尤佳為環氧矽烷類之矽烷偶合劑。 作為含磷酸基之化合物,較佳為含(甲基)丙烯醯基之磷酸酯類,較佳為下述通式(g1)、(g2)或(g3)所表示者。Examples of preferred silane coupling agents include (meth) methyl 3-methacryloxypropylmethyldimethoxysilane, 3-methacryloxypropyltrimethoxysilane, and the like. Acrylic methoxysilanes; 2- (3,4-epoxycyclohexyl) ethyltrimethoxysilane, 3-glycidoxypropyltrimethoxysilane, 3-glycidoxypropylmethyl Ethoxysilanes such as diethoxysilyl, 3-glycidyloxypropyltriethoxysilane; Ureasilane such as 3-ureidopropyltriethoxysilane; 3-isocyanate groups Isocyanate-based silanes such as propyltriethoxysilane, and particularly preferred are silane coupling agents of epoxysilane. The phosphate group-containing compound is preferably a (meth) acrylfluorenyl group-containing phosphate ester, and is preferably represented by the following general formula (g1), (g2), or (g3).

[化47] [Chemical 47]

於上述通式(g1)、(g2)及(g3)中,R51 表示氫原子或甲基,l及l'為1~10之整數,m為1、2或3。 該等含磷酸基之化合物可單獨使用一種,亦可組合兩種以上使用。In the general formulae (g1), (g2), and (g3), R 51 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, l and l ′ are integers of 1 to 10, and m is 1, 2 or 3. These phosphate group-containing compounds may be used singly or in combination of two or more kinds.

(2)界面活性劑 為了提高塗佈性,可於本發明之感光性著色組合物中含有界面活性劑。(2) Surfactant In order to improve the coating property, a surfactant may be contained in the photosensitive coloring composition of the present invention.

作為界面活性劑,例如可使用陰離子系、陽離子系、非離子系、兩性界面活性劑等各種者。其中,就對各特性造成不良影響之可能性較低之方面而言,較佳為使用非離子系界面活性劑,其中,就塗佈性之方面而言,有效的是氟系或矽系之界面活性劑。 作為此種界面活性劑,例如可列舉:TSF4460(Momentive Performance Materials公司製造)、DFX-18(NEOS公司製造)、BYK-300、BYK-325、BYK-330(BYK-Chemie公司製造)、KP340(Shin-Etsu Silicones公司製造)、MEGAFAC F-470、MEGAFAC F-475、MEGAFAC F-478、MEGAFAC F-554、MEGAFAC F-559(DIC公司製造)、SH7PA(Dow Corning Toray公司製造)、DS-401(Daikin公司製造)、L-77(Nippon Unicar公司製造)、FC4430(3M公司製造)等。 再者,界面活性劑可使用一種,亦可以任意之組合及比率併用兩種以上。As the surfactant, for example, various anionic, cationic, nonionic, and amphoteric surfactants can be used. Among them, non-ionic surfactants are preferred in terms of the low possibility of adversely affecting various characteristics. Among them, fluorine-based or silicon-based surfactants are effective in terms of coating properties. Surfactant. Examples of such a surfactant include TSF4460 (manufactured by Momentive Performance Materials), DFX-18 (manufactured by NEOS), BYK-300, BYK-325, BYK-330 (by BYK-Chemie), and KP340 ( (Made by Shin-Etsu Silicones), MEGAFAC F-470, MEGAFAC F-475, MEGAFAC F-478, MEGAFAC F-554, MEGAFAC F-559 (manufactured by DIC), SH7PA (manufactured by Dow Corning Toray), DS-401 (Manufactured by Daikin), L-77 (manufactured by Nippon Unicar), FC4430 (manufactured by 3M), and the like. Furthermore, one type of surfactant may be used, or two or more types may be used in any combination and ratio.

(3)顏料衍生物 為了提高分散性、保存性,可於本發明之感光性著色組合物中含有顏料衍生物作為分散助劑。 作為顏料衍生物,可列舉:偶氮系、酞菁系、喹吖啶酮系、苯并咪唑酮系、喹酞酮系、異吲哚啉酮系、二㗁系、蒽醌系、陰丹士林系、苝系、紫環酮系、二酮吡咯并吡咯系、二㗁系等之衍生物,其中,較佳為酞菁系、喹酞酮系。 作為顏料衍生物之取代基,可列舉磺酸基、磺醯胺基及其四級鹽、鄰苯二甲醯亞胺甲基、二烷基胺基烷基、羥基、羧基、醯胺基等直接或經由烷基、芳基、雜環基等鍵結於顏料骨架上者,較佳為磺酸基。又,該等取代基可對一個顏料骨架取代複數個。(3) Pigment derivative In order to improve dispersibility and storage stability, a pigment derivative may be contained in the photosensitive coloring composition of the present invention as a dispersion aid. Examples of the pigment derivative include azo-based, phthalocyanine-based, quinacridone-based, benzimidazolone-based, quinophthalone-based, isoindolinone-based, difluorene-based, anthraquinone-based, and indigo Derivatives of the Shihlin system, the hydrazone system, the purple ring ketone system, the diketopyrrolopyrrole system, the difluorene system, and the like, among them, phthalocyanine system and quinophthalone system are preferred. Examples of the substituent of the pigment derivative include a sulfonic acid group, a sulfonamido group and a quaternary salt thereof, a phthalimidomethyl group, a dialkylamino group, a hydroxyl group, a carboxyl group, and a fluorenyl group. Those bonded to the pigment skeleton directly or via an alkyl group, an aryl group, or a heterocyclic group are preferably a sulfonic acid group. These substituents may substitute a plurality of pigment skeletons.

作為顏料衍生物之具體例,可列舉:酞菁之磺酸衍生物、喹酞酮之磺酸衍生物、蒽醌之磺酸衍生物、喹吖啶酮之磺酸衍生物、二酮吡咯并吡咯之磺酸衍生物、二㗁之磺酸衍生物等。該等可單獨使用一種,亦可將兩種以上併用。Specific examples of the pigment derivative include sulfonic acid derivatives of phthalocyanine, sulfonic acid derivatives of quinophthalone, sulfonic acid derivatives of anthraquinone, sulfonic acid derivatives of quinacridone, and diketopyrrolopyrrole Sulfonic acid derivatives of pyrrole, sulfonic acid derivatives of diamidine, and the like. These can be used alone or in combination of two or more.

(4)光酸產生劑 所謂光酸產生劑係可藉由紫外線而產生酸之化合物,藉由進行曝光時產生之酸之作用,因存在例如三聚氰胺化合物等交聯劑,故而會進行交聯反應。該光酸產生劑中,較佳為對溶劑之溶解性、尤其是對感光性著色組合物所使用之溶劑之溶解性較大者,例如可列舉:二苯基錪、二甲苯基錪、苯基(對茴香基)錪、雙(間硝基苯基)錪、雙(對第三丁基苯基)錪、雙(對氯苯基)錪、雙(正十二烷基)錪、對異丁基苯基(對甲苯基)錪、對異丙基苯基(對甲苯基)錪等二芳基錪;或三苯基鋶等三芳基鋶之氯化物、溴化物;或氟硼酸鹽、六氟磷酸鹽、六氟砷酸鹽、芳香族磺酸鹽、四(五氟苯基)硼酸鹽等;或正丁基三苯基硼酸二苯基苯甲醯甲基鋶等鋶有機硼錯合物類;或2-甲基-4,6-雙(三氯甲基)三、2-(4-甲氧基苯基)-4,6-雙(三氯甲基)三等三化合物等,但並不僅限於此。(4) Photoacid generator The so-called photoacid generator is a compound capable of generating an acid by ultraviolet rays, and a crosslinking reaction such as a melamine compound is caused by the action of an acid generated during exposure. . Among the photoacid generators, those having a high solubility in a solvent, particularly those having a high solubility in a solvent used in the photosensitive coloring composition are preferred, and examples thereof include diphenylphosphonium, xylylphosphonium, and benzene. (P-anisyl) 錪, bis (m-nitrophenyl) 錪, bis (p-thirdbutylphenyl) 第三, bis (p-chlorophenyl) 錪, bis (n-dodecyl) 錪, p Diaryl fluorene such as isobutylphenyl (p-tolyl) hydrazone, p-isopropylphenyl (p-tolyl) fluorene; or chloride, bromide of triaryl fluorene such as triphenyl fluorene; or fluoroborate , Hexafluorophosphate, hexafluoroarsenate, aromatic sulfonate, tetrakis (pentafluorophenyl) borate, etc .; or organoboron such as n-butyl triphenyl borate, diphenyl benzamidine methyl hydrazone, etc. Complexes; or 2-methyl-4,6-bis (trichloromethyl) tri, 2- (4-methoxyphenyl) -4,6-bis (trichloromethyl) Compounds and the like are not limited thereto.

(5)交聯劑 可進而於本發明之感光性著色組合物中添加交聯劑,例如可使用三聚氰胺或胍胺系之化合物。作為該等交聯劑,例如可列舉下述通式(6)所表示之三聚氰胺或胍胺系之化合物。(5) Cross-linking agent A cross-linking agent can be further added to the photosensitive coloring composition of the present invention. For example, a melamine or guanamine-based compound can be used. Examples of such a crosslinking agent include melamine or guanamine-based compounds represented by the following general formula (6).

[化48] [Chemical 48]

式(6)中,R61 表示-NR66 R67 基或碳數6~12之芳基,於R61 為-NR66 R67 基之情形時,R62 、R63 、R64 、R65 、R66 及R67 之一表示-CH2 OR68 基,於R61 為碳數6~12之芳基之情形時,R62 、R63 、R64 及R65 之一表示-CH2 OR68 基,R62 、R63 、R64 、R65 、R66 及R67 中剩餘者互相獨立地表示氫或-CH2 OR68 基,R68 表示氫原子或碳數1~4之烷基。 此處,碳數6~12之芳基典型而言為苯基、1-萘基或2-萘基,於該等苯基或萘基上可鍵結有烷基、烷氧基、鹵素原子等取代基。烷基及烷氧基可分別為碳數1~6左右。R68 所表示之烷基較佳為上述中之甲基或乙基,尤佳為甲基。In formula (6), R 61 represents a -NR 66 R 67 group or an aryl group having 6 to 12 carbon atoms. When R 61 is a -NR 66 R 67 group, R 62 , R 63 , R 64 , R 65 , R 66 and R 67 each represent a -CH 2 OR 68 group, and when R 61 is an aryl group having 6 to 12 carbon atoms, one of R 62 , R 63 , R 64 and R 65 represents -CH 2 OR 68 , R 62 , R 63 , R 64 , R 65 , R 66, and R 67 each independently represent hydrogen or -CH 2 OR 68 , and R 68 represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms . Here, the aryl group having 6 to 12 carbon atoms is typically a phenyl group, a 1-naphthyl group, or a 2-naphthyl group, and an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, or a halogen atom may be bonded to the phenyl or naphthyl group And other substituents. The alkyl group and the alkoxy group may each have about 1 to 6 carbon atoms. The alkyl group represented by R 68 is preferably a methyl group or an ethyl group, and particularly preferably a methyl group.

相當於通式(6)之三聚氰胺系化合物、即下述通式(6-1)之化合物中包含六羥甲基三聚氰胺、五羥甲基三聚氰胺、四羥甲基三聚氰胺、六甲氧基甲基三聚氰胺、五甲氧基甲基三聚氰胺、四甲氧基甲基三聚氰胺、六乙氧基甲基三聚氰胺等。The melamine-based compound corresponding to the general formula (6), that is, the compound of the following general formula (6-1) includes hexamethylolmelamine, pentamethylolmelamine, tetramethylolmelamine, and hexamethoxymethylmelamine , Pentamethoxymethyl melamine, tetramethoxymethyl melamine, hexaethoxymethyl melamine, etc.

[化49] [Chemical 49]

式(6-1)中,於R62 、R63 、R64 、R65 、R66 及R67 之一為芳基之情形時,R62 、R63 、R64 及R65 之一表示-CH2 OR68 基,R62 、R63 、R64 、R65 、R66 及R67 中剩餘者互相獨立地表示氫原子或-CH2 OR68 基,此處,R68 表示氫原子或烷基。In the formula (6-1), when one of R 62 , R 63 , R 64 , R 65 , R 66 and R 67 is an aryl group, one of R 62 , R 63 , R 64 and R 65 represents − CH 2 OR 68 group, the remaining of R 62 , R 63 , R 64 , R 65 , R 66 and R 67 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a -CH 2 OR 68 group, where R 68 represents a hydrogen atom or an alkane base.

又,相當於通式(6)之胍胺系化合物、即通式(6)中之R61 為芳基之化合物中包含四羥甲基苯并胍胺、四甲氧基甲基苯并胍胺、三甲氧基甲基苯并胍胺、四乙氧基甲基苯并胍胺等。In addition, the guanamine-based compound corresponding to the general formula (6), that is, the compound in which R 61 in the general formula (6) is an aryl group includes tetramethylolbenzoguanamine and tetramethoxymethylbenzoguanidine. Amine, trimethoxymethylbenzoguanamine, tetraethoxymethylbenzoguanamine, and the like.

進而,亦可使用具有羥甲基或羥甲基烷基醚基之交聯劑。以下列舉其例。 2,6-雙(羥基甲基)-4-甲基苯酚、4-第三丁基-2,6-雙(羥基甲基)苯酚、5-乙基-1,3-雙(羥基甲基)全氫-1,3,5-三-2-酮(通稱為N-乙基二羥甲基三酮)或其二甲醚體、二羥甲基三亞甲基脲或其二甲醚體、3,5-雙(羥基甲基)全氫-1,3,5-㗁二-4-酮(通稱為二羥甲基脲)或其二甲醚體、四羥甲基乙二醛二烷基脲或其四甲醚體。Furthermore, a crosslinking agent having a methylol group or a methylol alkyl ether group may be used. Examples are given below. 2,6-bis (hydroxymethyl) -4-methylphenol, 4-tert-butyl-2,6-bis (hydroxymethyl) phenol, 5-ethyl-1,3-bis (hydroxymethyl) ) Perhydro-1,3,5-tri-2-one (commonly known as N-ethyldimethyloltrione) or its dimethyl ether body, dimethyloltrimethylene urea or its dimethyl ether body , 3,5-bis (hydroxymethyl) perhydro-1,3,5-fluorenedi-4-one (commonly known as dimethylol urea) or its dimethyl ether body, tetramethylol glyoxal Alkyl urea or its tetramethyl ether.

再者,該等交聯劑可單獨適應一種,亦可組合兩種以上而使用。使用交聯劑時之量於感光性著色組合物之總固形物成分中,較佳為0.1~15質量%,尤佳為0.5~10質量%。Furthermore, these crosslinking agents may be used alone or in combination of two or more. The amount of the crosslinking agent used is preferably 0.1 to 15% by mass, and particularly preferably 0.5 to 10% by mass, based on the total solid content of the photosensitive coloring composition.

(6)巰基化合物 作為聚合促進劑,又,為了提高與基板之密接性,亦可添加巰基化合物。(6) Mercapto compound As a polymerization accelerator, a mercapto compound may be added in order to improve the adhesion to the substrate.

作為巰基化合物之種類,可列舉:2-巰基苯并噻唑、2-巰基苯并㗁唑、2-巰基苯并咪唑、己二硫醇、癸二硫醇、1,4-二甲硫基苯、丁二醇雙硫代丙酸酯、丁二醇雙硫代乙醇酸酯、乙二醇雙硫代乙醇酸酯、三羥甲基丙烷三硫代乙醇酸酯、丁二醇雙硫代丙酸酯、三羥甲基丙烷三硫代丙酸酯、三羥甲基丙烷三硫代乙醇酸酯、季戊四醇四硫代丙酸酯、季戊四醇四硫代乙醇酸酯、三羥基乙基三硫代丙酸酯、乙二醇雙(3-巰基丁酸酯)、丁二醇雙(3-巰基丁酸酯)、1,4-雙(3-巰基丁醯氧基)丁烷、三羥甲基丙烷三(3-巰基丁酸酯)、季戊四醇四(3-巰基丁酸酯)、季戊四醇三(3-巰基丁酸酯)、乙二醇雙(3-巰基異丁酸酯)、丁二醇雙(3-巰基異丁酸酯)、三羥甲基丙烷三(3-巰基異丁酸酯)、1,3,5-三(3-巰基丁氧基乙基)-1,3,5-三-2,4,6(1H,3H,5H)-三酮等具有雜環之巰基化合物或脂肪族多官能巰基化合物等。該等可單獨使用各者之一種,或可將兩種以上混合而使用。Examples of the type of the mercapto compound include 2-mercaptobenzothiazole, 2-mercaptobenzoxazole, 2-mercaptobenzimidazole, hexamethylene dithiol, decanedithiol, and 1,4-dimethylthiobenzene. , Butanediol dithiopropionate, butanediol dithioglycolate, ethylene glycol dithioglycolate, trimethylolpropane trithioglycolate, butanediol dithiopropionate Acid ester, trimethylolpropane trithiopropionate, trimethylolpropane trithioglycolate, pentaerythritol tetrathiopropionate, pentaerythritol tetrathioglycolate, trihydroxyethyl trithio Propionate, ethylene glycol bis (3-mercaptobutyrate), butanediol bis (3-mercaptobutyrate), 1,4-bis (3-mercaptobutyryloxy) butane, trimethylol Propane tris (3-mercaptobutyrate), pentaerythritol tetra (3-mercaptobutyrate), pentaerythritol tri (3-mercaptobutyrate), ethylene glycol bis (3-mercapto isobutyrate), succinic acid Alcohol bis (3-mercaptoisobutyrate), trimethylolpropane tris (3-mercaptoisobutyrate), 1,3,5-tris (3-mercaptobutoxyethyl) -1,3, 5-tri-2,4,6 (1H, 3H, 5H) -trione and other heterocyclic mercapto compounds or aliphatic polyfunctional mercapto compounds . These may be used singly or in combination of two or more kinds.

<感光性著色組合物中之成分調配量> 於本發明之感光性著色組合物中,於感光性著色組合物之總固形物成分中,(a)著色劑之含有比率為23質量%以下。由於(a)著色劑係不會彈性變形之成分,因此認為藉由將其含有比率設為上述上限值以下,所獲得之著色間隔物之機械特性變得良好。 於感光性著色組合物之總固形物成分中,(a)著色劑之含有比率只要為23質量%以下,則無特別限定,較佳為22質量%以下,更佳為20質量%以下,進而較佳為18質量%以下,進而更佳為16質量%以下,尤佳為15質量%以下,最佳為14質量%以下,又,較佳為1質量%以上,更佳為5質量%以上,進而較佳為8質量%以上,進而更佳為10質量%以上,尤佳為12質量%以上。藉由將(a)著色劑之含有比率設為上述上限值以下,有如下傾向:機械特性變得良好,又,容易獲得充分之製版特性,電可靠性優異,又,藉由設為上述下限值以上,有可獲得充分之遮光性之傾向。作為上限與下限之組合,例如,較佳為1~22質量%,更佳為5~20質量%,進而較佳為8~18質量%,進而更佳為10~16質量%,尤佳為10~15質量%,最佳為12~14質量%。<Component blending amount in the photosensitive coloring composition> In the photosensitive coloring composition of the present invention, the content ratio of (a) the colorant in the total solid content of the photosensitive coloring composition is 23% by mass or less. Since (a) the colorant is a component that does not deform elastically, it is considered that the mechanical properties of the obtained colored spacer are improved by setting the content ratio to the above-mentioned upper limit value or less. The total solid content of the photosensitive coloring composition is not particularly limited as long as the content ratio of (a) the colorant is 23% by mass or less, preferably 22% by mass or less, more preferably 20% by mass or less, and further It is preferably 18% by mass or less, more preferably 16% by mass or less, even more preferably 15% by mass or less, most preferably 14% by mass or less, more preferably 1% by mass or more, and more preferably 5% by mass or more. It is more preferably 8% by mass or more, still more preferably 10% by mass or more, and even more preferably 12% by mass or more. By setting the content ratio of (a) the colorant below the above-mentioned upper limit, the mechanical properties tend to be good, sufficient plate-making properties are easily obtained, and electrical reliability is excellent. Above the lower limit, sufficient light-shielding properties tend to be obtained. The combination of the upper limit and the lower limit is, for example, preferably 1 to 22% by mass, more preferably 5 to 20% by mass, still more preferably 8 to 18% by mass, even more preferably 10 to 16% by mass, and even more preferably 10 to 15% by mass, and most preferably 12 to 14% by mass.

本發明之感光性著色組合物中之顏料之含有比率並無特別限定,於感光性著色組合物之總固形物成分中,通常為23質量%以下,較佳為22質量%以下,更佳為20質量%以下,進而較佳為18質量%以下,進而更佳為16質量%以下,尤佳為15質量%以下,最佳為14質量%以下,又,較佳為1質量%以上,更佳為5質量%以上,進而較佳為8質量%以上,進而更佳為10質量%以上,尤佳為12質量%以上。藉由將顏料之含有比率設為上述上限值以下,有如下傾向:機械特性變得良好,又,容易獲得充分之製版特性,電可靠性優異,又,藉由設為上述下限值以上,有可獲得充分之遮光性之傾向。作為上限與下限之組合,例如,較佳為1~22質量%,更佳為5~20質量%,進而較佳為8~18質量%,進而更佳為10~16質量%,尤佳為10~15質量%,最佳為12~14質量%。The content ratio of the pigment in the photosensitive coloring composition of the present invention is not particularly limited. In the total solid content of the photosensitive coloring composition, it is usually 23% by mass or less, preferably 22% by mass or less, and more preferably 20% by mass or less, more preferably 18% by mass or less, still more preferably 16% by mass or less, even more preferably 15% by mass or less, most preferably 14% by mass or less, more preferably 1% by mass or more, more It is preferably at least 5 mass%, more preferably at least 8 mass%, even more preferably at least 10 mass%, and even more preferably at least 12 mass%. When the content ratio of the pigment is set to the above-mentioned upper limit value or less, the mechanical properties become favorable, and sufficient plate-making characteristics are easily obtained, and the electrical reliability is excellent. Further, when the content ratio of the pigment is set to the above-mentioned lower limit value or more, There is a tendency to obtain sufficient light-shielding properties. The combination of the upper limit and the lower limit is, for example, preferably 1 to 22% by mass, more preferably 5 to 20% by mass, still more preferably 8 to 18% by mass, even more preferably 10 to 16% by mass, and even more preferably 10 to 15% by mass, and most preferably 12 to 14% by mass.

第一態樣之感光性著色組合物之總固形物成分中的橙色顏料之含有比率較佳為1質量%以上,更佳為5質量%以上,進而較佳為8質量%以上,進而更佳為10質量%以上,尤佳為15質量%以上,又,通常為60質量%以下,更佳為50質量%以下,進而較佳為45質量%以下,進而更佳為40質量%以下,尤佳為30質量%以下,最佳為20質量%以下。藉由設為上述下限值以上,有可確保充分之遮光性,可抑制波長400~500 nm之透過率之傾向,藉由設為上述上限值以下,有容易獲得充分之製版性能之傾向。上限與下限之組合例如較佳為1~60質量%,更佳為5~50質量%,進而較佳為5~45質量%,進而更佳為8~40質量%,尤佳為10~30質量%,最佳為15~20質量%。The content ratio of the orange pigment in the total solid content of the photosensitive coloring composition of the first aspect is preferably 1% by mass or more, more preferably 5% by mass or more, still more preferably 8% by mass or more, and even more preferably It is 10% by mass or more, particularly preferably 15% by mass or more, and usually 60% by mass or less, more preferably 50% by mass or less, still more preferably 45% by mass or less, still more preferably 40% by mass or less, particularly It is preferably 30% by mass or less, and most preferably 20% by mass or less. When it is set to the above lower limit value, sufficient light-shielding property can be ensured, and transmittance at a wavelength of 400 to 500 nm can be suppressed. When it is set to the above upper limit value, sufficient plate-making performance tends to be easily obtained. . The combination of the upper limit and the lower limit is, for example, preferably 1 to 60% by mass, more preferably 5 to 50% by mass, still more preferably 5 to 45% by mass, still more preferably 8 to 40% by mass, and even more preferably 10 to 30. Mass%, preferably 15 to 20 mass%.

第一態樣之感光性著色組合物就色調之觀點而言,較佳為全部固形物中之藍色顏料及紫色顏料之含有比率較低,較佳為30質量%以下,更佳為25質量%以下,進而較佳為20質量%以下,進而更佳為15質量%以下,尤其更佳為10質量%以下,尤佳為5質量%以下,最佳為0質量%、即不含有。 另一方面,就遮光性之觀點而言,亦可含有藍色顏料及/或紫色顏料,於該情形時,總固形物成分中之藍色顏料及紫色顏料之含有比率較佳為1質量%以上,更佳為5質量%以上,進而較佳為8質量%以上,尤佳為10質量%以上,最佳為15質量%以上,又,較佳為30質量%以下,更佳為25質量%以下,進而較佳為20質量%以下。設為上述下限值以上,有獲得充分之遮光性之傾向,藉由設為上述上限值以下,有可獲得接近黑色之色調之傾向。作為上限與下限之組合,例如較佳為1~30質量%,更佳為5~30質量%,進而較佳為8~25質量%,進而更佳為10~20質量%,尤佳為15~20質量%。From the viewpoint of color tone, the photosensitive coloring composition of the first aspect preferably has a low content ratio of blue pigment and purple pigment in all solids, preferably 30% by mass or less, and more preferably 25% by mass. % Or less, more preferably 20% by mass or less, still more preferably 15% by mass or less, even more preferably 10% by mass or less, even more preferably 5% by mass or less, and most preferably 0% by mass, that is, not contained. On the other hand, from the viewpoint of light-shielding properties, a blue pigment and / or a purple pigment may be contained. In this case, the content ratio of the blue pigment and the purple pigment in the total solid content is preferably 1% by mass. Above, more preferably 5 mass% or more, still more preferably 8 mass% or more, particularly preferably 10 mass% or more, most preferably 15 mass% or more, more preferably 30 mass% or less, and even more preferably 25 mass % Or less, more preferably 20% by mass or less. When it is more than the said lower limit value, sufficient light-shielding property tends to be obtained, and when it is below the said upper limit value, the color tone close to black tends to be obtained. The combination of the upper limit and the lower limit is, for example, preferably 1 to 30% by mass, more preferably 5 to 30% by mass, still more preferably 8 to 25% by mass, even more preferably 10 to 20% by mass, and even more preferably 15 -20% by mass.

第一態樣之感光性著色組合物就遮光性之觀點而言,較佳為總固形物成分中之黃色顏料之含有比率較低,較佳為30質量%以下,更佳為25質量%以下,進而較佳為20質量%以下,進而更佳為15質量%以下,尤其更佳為10質量%以下,尤佳為5質量%以下,最佳為0質量%、即不含有。 另一方面,就抑制波長400~500 nm下之透過率之觀點而言,亦可含有黃色顏料,於該情形時,全部固形物中之黃色顏料之含有比率較佳為1質量%以上,更佳為3質量%以上,進而較佳為5質量%以上,尤佳為10質量%以上,最佳為15質量%以上。又,較佳為30質量%以下,更佳為25質量%以下,進而較佳為20質量%以下。藉由設為上述下限值以上,有可抑制波長400~500 nm之透過率、或可獲得接近黑色之色調之傾向,藉由設為上述上限值以下,有電可靠性變高,且可使光學密度(OD)變高之傾向。作為上限與下限之組合,例如較佳為1~30質量%,更佳為3~30質量%,進而較佳為5~30質量%,進而更佳為10~25質量%,尤佳為15~20質量%。From the viewpoint of light-shielding properties, the photosensitive coloring composition of the first aspect preferably has a low content ratio of the yellow pigment in the total solid content, preferably 30% by mass or less, and more preferably 25% by mass or less. It is more preferably 20% by mass or less, still more preferably 15% by mass or less, even more preferably 10% by mass or less, even more preferably 5% by mass or less, and most preferably 0% by mass, that is, not contained. On the other hand, from the viewpoint of suppressing the transmittance at a wavelength of 400 to 500 nm, a yellow pigment may be contained. In this case, the content ratio of the yellow pigment in all solids is preferably 1% by mass or more. It is preferably 3% by mass or more, more preferably 5% by mass or more, particularly preferably 10% by mass or more, and most preferably 15% by mass or more. The content is preferably 30% by mass or less, more preferably 25% by mass or less, and even more preferably 20% by mass or less. By setting it above the lower limit value, the transmittance at a wavelength of 400 to 500 nm can be suppressed, or a hue close to black can be obtained. By setting it below the above upper limit value, electrical reliability becomes high, and It is possible to increase the optical density (OD). The combination of the upper limit and the lower limit is, for example, preferably 1 to 30% by mass, more preferably 3 to 30% by mass, still more preferably 5 to 30% by mass, still more preferably 10 to 25% by mass, and even more preferably 15 -20% by mass.

於本發明之感光性著色組合物之總固形物成分中,(b)鹼可溶性樹脂之含有比率通常為5質量%以上,較佳為10質量%以上,更佳為20質量%以上,進而較佳為30質量%以上,尤佳為35質量%以上,且通常為85質量%以下,較佳為80質量%以下,更佳為70質量%以下,進而較佳為60質量%以下,進而更佳為50質量%以下,尤佳為45質量%以下。藉由將(b)鹼可溶性樹脂之含有比率設為上述下限值以上,有機械特性變得良好,且顯影性變得良好之傾向。又,藉由設為上述上限值以下,有如下傾向:維持適當之感度,可抑制曝光部由顯影液引起之溶解,並且可抑制密接性之降低。作為上限與下限之組合,例如,較佳為5~85質量%,更佳為10~80質量%,進而較佳為20~70質量%,進而更佳為30~60質量%,尤佳為35~50質量%,最佳為35~45質量%。In the total solid content of the photosensitive coloring composition of the present invention, the content ratio of (b) alkali-soluble resin is usually 5 mass% or more, preferably 10 mass% or more, more preferably 20 mass% or more, and more It is preferably 30% by mass or more, particularly preferably 35% by mass or more, and usually 85% by mass or less, preferably 80% by mass or less, more preferably 70% by mass or less, still more preferably 60% by mass or less, and more preferably It is preferably 50% by mass or less, and particularly preferably 45% by mass or less. When the content ratio of the (b) alkali-soluble resin is equal to or more than the above-mentioned lower limit value, there is a tendency that the mechanical properties become good and the developability becomes good. Moreover, when it is below the above-mentioned upper limit value, it tends to maintain an appropriate sensitivity, suppress the dissolution of the exposed portion by the developing solution, and suppress a decrease in adhesiveness. The combination of the upper limit and the lower limit is, for example, preferably 5 to 85% by mass, more preferably 10 to 80% by mass, still more preferably 20 to 70% by mass, even more preferably 30 to 60% by mass, and even more preferably 35 to 50% by mass, most preferably 35 to 45% by mass.

(c)光聚合起始劑之含有比率於本發明之感光性著色組合物之全部固形物中,通常為0.1質量%以上,較佳為0.5質量%以上,更佳為1質量%以上,進而較佳為2質量%以上,且通常為15質量%以下,較佳為10質量%以下,更佳為8質量%以下,進而較佳為7質量%以下,尤佳為5質量%以下。藉由將(c)光聚合起始劑之含有比率設為上述下限值以上,有可抑制感度降低之傾向,藉由設為上述上限值以下,有可抑制未曝光部分相對於顯影液之溶解性之降低,而抑制顯影不良之傾向。作為上限與下限之組合,例如,較佳為0.1~15質量%,更佳為0.5~10質量%,進而較佳為1~8質量%,進而更佳為2~7質量%,尤佳為2~5質量%。(c) The content ratio of the photopolymerization initiator is generally 0.1% by mass or more, preferably 0.5% by mass or more, and more preferably 1% by mass or more in the total solids of the photosensitive coloring composition of the present invention. It is preferably 2 mass% or more, and usually 15 mass% or less, preferably 10 mass% or less, more preferably 8 mass% or less, still more preferably 7 mass% or less, and even more preferably 5 mass% or less. When the content ratio of the (c) photopolymerization initiator is set to the above-mentioned lower limit value or less, the sensitivity tends to be suppressed. When it is set to the above-mentioned upper limit value or less, the unexposed portion with respect to the developer can be suppressed. This reduces the solubility and suppresses the tendency to develop poorly. The combination of the upper limit and the lower limit is, for example, preferably 0.1 to 15% by mass, more preferably 0.5 to 10% by mass, still more preferably 1 to 8% by mass, even more preferably 2 to 7% by mass, and even more preferably 2 to 5 mass%.

於將(c)光聚合起始劑與聚合促進劑一併使用之情形時,於本發明之感光性著色組合物之全部固形物中,聚合促進劑之含有比率較佳為0.05質量%以上,且通常為10質量%以下,較佳為5質量%以下,聚合促進劑較佳為以相對於(c)光聚合起始劑100質量份通常為0.1~50質量份、0.1~20質量份之比率使用。藉由將聚合促進劑之含有比率設為上述下限值以上,有可抑制對曝光光線之感度降低之傾向,藉由設為上述上限值以下,有可抑制未曝光部分相對於顯影液之溶解性降低,而抑制顯影不良之傾向。 又,於將(c)光聚合起始劑與增感色素一併使用之情形時,就感度之觀點而言,於感光性著色組合物之總固形物成分中,增感色素之含有比率通常為20質量%以下,較佳為15質量%以下,進而較佳為10質量%以下。When (c) a photopolymerization initiator is used together with a polymerization accelerator, the content of the polymerization accelerator in all solids of the photosensitive coloring composition of the present invention is preferably 0.05% by mass or more. It is usually 10% by mass or less, preferably 5% by mass or less, and the polymerization accelerator is preferably 0.1 to 50 parts by mass and 0.1 to 20 parts by mass relative to 100 parts by mass of the (c) photopolymerization initiator. Ratio used. When the content ratio of the polymerization accelerator is set to the above lower limit value or more, it is possible to suppress a decrease in sensitivity to exposure light. By setting the content ratio to the above upper limit value or less, it is possible to suppress the unexposed portion from being exposed to the developer. The solubility is reduced, and the tendency of poor development is suppressed. When (c) a photopolymerization initiator is used together with a sensitizing dye, the content ratio of the sensitizing dye in the total solid content of the photosensitive coloring composition is usually from the viewpoint of sensitivity. It is 20% by mass or less, preferably 15% by mass or less, and further preferably 10% by mass or less.

於本發明之感光性著色組合物之總固形物成分中,(d)乙烯性不飽和化合物之含有比率通常為1質量%以上,較佳為5質量%以上,更佳為10質量%以上,進而較佳為20質量%以上,尤佳為30質量%以上,又,通常為70質量%以下,較佳為60質量%以下,更佳為50質量%以下。藉由將(d)乙烯性不飽和化合物之含有比率設為上述下限值以上,有如下傾向:維持適當之感度,可抑制曝光部由顯影液引起之溶解,並且可抑制密接性之降低,又,藉由設為上述上限值以下,有抑制顯影液對曝光部之滲透性變高之情況,而容易獲得良好之圖像之傾向。作為上限與下限之組合,例如,較佳為1~70質量%,更佳為5~60質量%,進而較佳為10~60質量%,進而更佳為20~60質量%,尤佳為30~50質量%。In the total solid content of the photosensitive coloring composition of the present invention, the content ratio of (d) the ethylenically unsaturated compound is usually 1% by mass or more, preferably 5% by mass or more, and more preferably 10% by mass or more. It is more preferably 20% by mass or more, particularly preferably 30% by mass or more, and usually 70% by mass or less, preferably 60% by mass or less, and more preferably 50% by mass or less. When the content ratio of the (d) ethylenically unsaturated compound is equal to or higher than the above-mentioned lower limit value, there is a tendency to maintain an appropriate sensitivity, suppress dissolution of the exposed portion by the developing solution, and suppress a decrease in adhesiveness. In addition, by setting it to be equal to or less than the above upper limit value, there is a tendency that the permeability of the developer to the exposed portion is suppressed to be high, and a good image tends to be easily obtained. The combination of the upper limit and the lower limit is, for example, preferably 1 to 70% by mass, more preferably 5 to 60% by mass, still more preferably 10 to 60% by mass, even more preferably 20 to 60% by mass, and even more preferably 30 to 50% by mass.

另一方面,(b)鹼可溶性樹脂相對於(d)乙烯性不飽和化合物100質量份之含有比率並無特別限定,較佳為50質量份以上,更佳為80質量份以上,進而較佳為100質量份以上,又,通常為700質量份以下,較佳為500質量份以下,更佳為400質量份以下,進而較佳為300質量份以下。藉由設為上述下限值以上,有成為無剝離等之適當之顯影狀態之傾向,又,藉由設為上述上限值以下,有可設為對於顯影液而言適當之溶解時間之傾向。又,作為上限與下限之組合,例如,可較佳地列舉50~700質量份,更佳地列舉80~500質量份,進而地列舉佳為80~400質量份,尤佳地列舉100~300質量份。On the other hand, the content ratio of (b) the alkali-soluble resin to 100 parts by mass of the (d) ethylenically unsaturated compound is not particularly limited, but is preferably 50 parts by mass or more, more preferably 80 parts by mass or more, and further preferably It is 100 parts by mass or more, and usually 700 parts by mass or less, preferably 500 parts by mass or less, more preferably 400 parts by mass or less, and further preferably 300 parts by mass or less. By setting it to be above the lower limit value, there is a tendency that it becomes an appropriate developing state without peeling and the like, and by setting it to be below the upper limit value, it is possible to set the dissolution time to be appropriate for the developer. . In addition, as a combination of the upper limit and the lower limit, for example, 50 to 700 parts by mass is more preferable, 80 to 500 parts by mass is more preferable, 80 to 400 parts by mass is more preferable, and 100 to 300 is even more preferable. Parts by mass.

再者,本發明之感光性著色組合物藉由使用(e)溶劑,而以其總固形物成分之含有比率成為通常為5質量%以上、較佳為10質量%以上、更佳為15質量%以上且通常為50質量%以下、較佳為30質量%以下、更佳為25質量%以下之方式進行調液。作為上限與下限之組合,較佳為5~50質量%,更佳為10~30質量%,進而較佳為15~25質量%。In addition, the photosensitive coloring composition of the present invention uses the (e) solvent, and the content ratio of the total solid content thereof is usually 5% by mass or more, preferably 10% by mass or more, and more preferably 15% by mass. % Or more, and usually 50 mass% or less, preferably 30 mass% or less, and more preferably 25 mass% or less. The combination of the upper limit and the lower limit is preferably 5 to 50% by mass, more preferably 10 to 30% by mass, and even more preferably 15 to 25% by mass.

於本發明之感光性著色組合物含有(f)分散劑之情形時,於感光性著色組合物之總固形物成分中,(f)分散劑之含有比率通常為1質量%以上,較佳為2質量%以上,又,通常為30質量%以下,較佳為20質量%以下,更佳為15質量%以下,進而較佳為10質量%以下,尤佳為5質量%以下。藉由將(f)分散劑之含有比率設為上述下限值以上,有容易獲得充分之分散性之傾向,藉由設為上述上限值以下,有可抑制因其他成分之比率相對減少而導致感度、製版性等降低之情況之傾向。作為上限與下限之組合,例如,較佳為1~30質量%,更佳為1~20質量%,進而較佳為1~15質量%,進而更佳為2~10質量%,尤佳為2~5質量%。When the photosensitive coloring composition of this invention contains (f) dispersing agent, the content rate of (f) dispersing agent in the total solid content of a photosensitive coloring composition is 1 mass% or more normally, Preferably it is 2% by mass or more, and usually 30% by mass or less, preferably 20% by mass or less, more preferably 15% by mass or less, still more preferably 10% by mass or less, and even more preferably 5% by mass or less. When the content ratio of the (f) dispersant is set to the above lower limit value or more, sufficient dispersibility tends to be easily obtained. When the content ratio of the (f) dispersant is set to the above upper limit value or less, the relative decrease in the ratio of other components can be suppressed. This tends to cause a decrease in sensitivity, plate-making properties, and the like. The combination of the upper limit and the lower limit is, for example, preferably 1 to 30% by mass, more preferably 1 to 20% by mass, even more preferably 1 to 15% by mass, even more preferably 2 to 10% by mass, and even more preferably 2 to 5 mass%.

又,(f)分散劑相對於(a)著色劑100質量份之含有比率通常為5質量份以上,更佳為10質量份以上,進而較佳為15質量份以上,且通常為50質量份以下,尤佳為30質量份以下。藉由將(f)分散劑之含有比率設為上述下限值以上,有容易獲得充分之分散性之傾向,藉由設為上述上限值以下,有可抑制因其他成分之比率相對減少而導致感度、製版性等降低之情況之傾向。作為上限與下限之組合,例如,較佳為5~50質量份,更佳為10~50質量份,進而較佳為15~30質量份。The content ratio of (f) the dispersant to 100 parts by mass of the (a) colorant is usually 5 parts by mass or more, more preferably 10 parts by mass or more, still more preferably 15 parts by mass or more, and usually 50 parts by mass Hereinafter, it is particularly preferably 30 parts by mass or less. When the content ratio of the (f) dispersant is set to the above lower limit value or more, sufficient dispersibility tends to be easily obtained. When the content ratio of the (f) dispersant is set to the above upper limit value or less, the ratio of other components can be suppressed from being reduced. This tends to cause a decrease in sensitivity, plate-making properties, and the like. The combination of the upper limit and the lower limit is, for example, preferably from 5 to 50 parts by mass, more preferably from 10 to 50 parts by mass, and even more preferably from 15 to 30 parts by mass.

於使用密接改善劑之情形時,其含有比率於感光性著色組合物中之全部固形物中,通常為0.1~5質量%,較佳為0.2~3質量%,進而較佳為0.4~2質量%。藉由將密接改善劑之含有比率設為上述下限值以上,有可充分獲得密接性之提高效果之傾向,藉由設為上述上限值以下,有可抑制感度降低、或顯影後殘留殘渣而成為缺陷之情況之傾向。When the adhesion improving agent is used, the content ratio is usually 0.1 to 5% by mass, preferably 0.2 to 3% by mass, and more preferably 0.4 to 2% by weight in the total solids in the photosensitive coloring composition. %. When the content ratio of the adhesion improving agent is set to the above lower limit value or more, there is a tendency that the effect of improving the adhesion property can be sufficiently obtained. When it is set to the above upper limit value or less, it is possible to suppress a decrease in sensitivity or a residual residue after development. And the tendency to become a defect.

又,於使用界面活性劑之情形時,其含有比率於感光性著色組合物中之總固形物成分中,通常為0.001~10質量%,較佳為0.005~1質量%,進而較佳為0.01~0.5質量%,最佳為0.03~0.3質量%。藉由將界面活性劑之含有比率設為上述下限值以上,有容易表現出塗佈膜之平滑性、均一性之傾向,藉由設為上述上限值以下,有容易表現出塗佈膜之平滑性、均一性,亦可抑制其他特性變差之傾向。When a surfactant is used, its content ratio in the total solid content of the photosensitive coloring composition is usually 0.001 to 10% by mass, preferably 0.005 to 1% by mass, and more preferably 0.01. ∼0.5% by mass, and most preferably 0.03∼0.3% by mass. When the content ratio of the surfactant is set to the above lower limit value, the smoothness and uniformity of the coating film tend to be easily exhibited. When the content ratio of the surfactant is set to the above upper limit value, the coated film is likely to be expressed. The smoothness and uniformity can also suppress the tendency of other characteristics to deteriorate.

<感光性著色組合物之物性> 本發明之感光性著色組合物可適宜地用於形成著色間隔物。就用作著色間隔物之觀點而言,較佳為其硬化膜之每1 μm膜厚之光學密度(OD)較高。以將本發明之感光性著色組合物硬化所獲得之著色間隔物單獨計,較佳為0.01以上,更佳為0.03以上,進而較佳為0.05以上,進而更佳為0.08以上,尤佳為0.10以上,最佳為0.15以上。此處,每1 μm膜厚之光學密度(OD)係藉由下文所述之實施例所記載之方法測得之值。<Physical properties of photosensitive coloring composition> The photosensitive coloring composition of the present invention can be suitably used to form a colored spacer. From the viewpoint of use as a colored spacer, it is preferable that the optical density (OD) per 1 μm film thickness of the cured film is high. The colored spacer obtained by curing the photosensitive coloring composition of the present invention is preferably 0.01 or more, more preferably 0.03 or more, still more preferably 0.05 or more, still more preferably 0.08 or more, and even more preferably 0.10. The above is preferably 0.15 or more. Here, the optical density (OD) per 1 μm film thickness is a value measured by the method described in the examples described below.

又,於與藍色之彩色濾光層積層之情形時,將著色間隔物與藍色之彩色濾光層積層而成之2層之光學密度(OD)較佳為0.5以上,更佳為1.0以上。此處,所積層之2層之光學密度(OD)係藉由下文所述之實施例所記載之方法測得之值。In the case of lamination with a blue color filter, the optical density (OD) of the two layers obtained by laminating the colored spacer and the blue color filter is preferably 0.5 or more, and more preferably 1.0. the above. Here, the optical density (OD) of the two layers of the stacked layers is a value measured by a method described in the examples described below.

又,本發明之感光性著色組合物較佳為波長400~500 nm之平均吸光度相對於波長500~700 nm之平均吸光度之比為1.8以上,更佳為2.0以上,進而較佳為3.0以上,又,較佳為15以下,更佳為10以下,進而較佳為7以下,尤佳為4.5以下。藉由設為上述下限值以上,有於與藍色之彩色濾光層積層之情形時可獲得接近黑色之色調之傾向。又,藉由設為上述上限值以下,有可提高光學密度(OD)之傾向。The photosensitive coloring composition of the present invention preferably has a ratio of an average absorbance at a wavelength of 400 to 500 nm to an average absorbance at a wavelength of 500 to 700 nm of 1.8 or more, more preferably 2.0 or more, and further preferably 3.0 or more. In addition, it is preferably 15 or less, more preferably 10 or less, even more preferably 7 or less, and even more preferably 4.5 or less. By setting it to be more than the above-mentioned lower limit value, it is possible to obtain a hue close to black when laminated with a blue color filter. Moreover, when it is below the said upper limit, there exists a tendency for optical density (OD) to be improved.

此處,感光性著色組合物之波長400~500 nm之平均吸光度相對於波長500~700 nm之平均吸光度之比可藉由使用該感光性著色組合物形成膜厚為2.5 μm之硬化膜,利用分光光度計以1 nm為間隔測定波長400~700 nm之吸光度而特定出。 詳細之測定條件等並無特別限定,例如可藉由以下之方法進行測定。 首先,使用旋轉塗佈機將感光性著色組合物塗佈於玻璃基板(AGC公司製造之「AN100」)上。其次,於90℃下在加熱板上加熱乾燥90秒而形成塗佈膜。對於所獲得之塗佈膜,於空氣下進行紫外線照射。使用波長365 nm下之強度為32 mW/cm2 之紫外線,曝光量設為70 mJ/cm2 。繼而,使用包含含有0.05質量%之氫氧化鉀與0.08質量%之非離子性界面活性劑(花王公司製造之「A-60」)之水溶液之顯影液,於25℃下實施水壓0.15 MPa之噴淋顯影後,藉由純水停止顯影,藉由水洗噴霧進行洗淨。噴淋顯影時間於10~120秒之間進行調整,設為將未曝光之塗膜溶解去除之時間之1.5倍。將藉由該等操作獲得之附塗膜之基板於烘箱中在230℃下加熱20分鐘而使圖案硬化,獲得附膜厚為2.5 μm之硬化膜之基板。繼而,使用島津製作所公司製造之分光光度計UV-3150,以1 nm為間隔測定該基板之波長400~700 nm之吸光度,並且以未塗佈感光性著色組合物之玻璃基板作為對照。將波長400~500 nm之每隔1 nm之吸光度之測定值進行平均,藉此算出平均吸光度,同樣地算出波長500~700 nm之平均吸光度,然後算出波長400~500 nm之平均吸光度相對於波長500~700 nm之平均吸光度之比。Here, the ratio of the average absorbance at a wavelength of 400 to 500 nm to the average absorbance at a wavelength of 500 to 700 nm of the photosensitive coloring composition can be used to form a cured film having a film thickness of 2.5 μm by using the photosensitive coloring composition. The spectrophotometer measures the absorbance at a wavelength of 400 to 700 nm at intervals of 1 nm and specifies it. The detailed measurement conditions and the like are not particularly limited, and for example, the measurement can be performed by the following method. First, a photosensitive coating composition was applied on a glass substrate ("AN100" manufactured by AGC) using a spin coater. Next, it was heated and dried on a hot plate at 90 ° C for 90 seconds to form a coating film. The obtained coating film was irradiated with ultraviolet rays in the air. Ultraviolet light having an intensity of 32 mW / cm 2 at a wavelength of 365 nm was used, and the exposure amount was set to 70 mJ / cm 2 . Next, a developing solution containing an aqueous solution containing 0.05% by mass of potassium hydroxide and 0.08% by mass of a nonionic surfactant ("A-60" manufactured by Kao Corporation) was used, and a water pressure of 0.15 MPa was performed at 25 ° C. After the spray development, the development was stopped by pure water, and the cleaning was performed by water washing spray. The spray development time is adjusted between 10 to 120 seconds, and is set to 1.5 times the time to dissolve and remove the unexposed coating film. The substrate with a coating film obtained by these operations was heated in an oven at 230 ° C. for 20 minutes to harden the pattern to obtain a substrate with a cured film having a film thickness of 2.5 μm. Next, a UV-3150 spectrophotometer manufactured by Shimadzu Corporation was used to measure the absorbance of the substrate at a wavelength of 400 to 700 nm at intervals of 1 nm, and a glass substrate to which the photosensitive coloring composition was not applied was used as a control. The average absorbance at a wavelength of 400 to 500 nm every 1 nm is averaged to calculate the average absorbance. Similarly, the average absorbance at a wavelength of 500 to 700 nm is calculated, and then the average absorbance at a wavelength of 400 to 500 nm is calculated with respect to the wavelength. Ratio of average absorbance at 500 to 700 nm.

第二態樣之本發明之感光性著色組合物之xy色度圖中之色度座標(x,y)滿足0.40≦x≦0.55、且0.35≦y≦0.50。藉由將色度座標(x,y)設為上述範圍內,認為與藍色層積層時之色調變得良好,波長400~500 nm之漏光得以抑制。In the second aspect, the chromaticity coordinates (x, y) in the xy chromaticity diagram of the photosensitive coloring composition of the present invention satisfy 0.40 ≦ x ≦ 0.55, and 0.35 ≦ y ≦ 0.50. By setting the chromaticity coordinates (x, y) within the above range, it is considered that the color tone when laminated with blue is good, and light leakage at a wavelength of 400 to 500 nm is suppressed.

x為0.40以上,較佳為0.42以上,更佳為0.45以上,進而較佳為0.46以上。又,x為0.55以下,較佳為0.53以下,更佳為0.52以下,進而較佳為0.51以下,尤佳為0.50以下。藉由設為上述下限值以上,有可確保充分之遮光性,可抑制波長400~500 nm之透過率之傾向,又,藉由設為上述上限值以下,有機械特性良化之傾向。作為上限與下限之組合,例如,較佳為0.42~0.53,更佳為0.45~0.52,進而較佳為0.46~0.51,尤佳為0.46~0.50。x is 0.40 or more, preferably 0.42 or more, more preferably 0.45 or more, and even more preferably 0.46 or more. In addition, x is 0.55 or less, preferably 0.53 or less, more preferably 0.52 or less, even more preferably 0.51 or less, and even more preferably 0.50 or less. When it is set to the above lower limit value, sufficient light-shielding property can be ensured, and transmittance at a wavelength of 400 to 500 nm can be suppressed. When it is set to the above upper limit value, the mechanical properties tend to be improved. . The combination of the upper limit and the lower limit is, for example, preferably 0.42 to 0.53, more preferably 0.45 to 0.52, still more preferably 0.46 to 0.51, and even more preferably 0.46 to 0.50.

又,y為0.35以上,較佳為0.37以上,更佳為0.40以上,進而較佳為0.41以上,尤佳為0.42以上。又,y為0.50以下,較佳為0.48以下,更佳為0.47以下,進而較佳為0.46以下,尤佳為0.45以下。藉由設為上述下限值以上,有可確保充分之遮光性,可抑制波長400~500 nm之透過率之傾向,又,藉由設為上述上限值以下,有機械特性良化之傾向。作為上限與下限之組合,例如,較佳為0.37~0.48,更佳為0.40~0.47,進而較佳為0.41~0.46,尤佳為0.42~0.45。In addition, y is 0.35 or more, preferably 0.37 or more, more preferably 0.40 or more, still more preferably 0.41 or more, and even more preferably 0.42 or more. In addition, y is 0.50 or less, preferably 0.48 or less, more preferably 0.47 or less, even more preferably 0.46 or less, and even more preferably 0.45 or less. When it is set to the above lower limit value, sufficient light-shielding property can be ensured, and transmittance at a wavelength of 400 to 500 nm can be suppressed. When it is set to the above upper limit value, the mechanical properties tend to be improved. . The combination of the upper limit and the lower limit is, for example, preferably 0.37 to 0.48, more preferably 0.40 to 0.47, still more preferably 0.41 to 0.46, and even more preferably 0.42 to 0.45.

此處,xy色度圖中之色度座標(x,y)可藉由使用感光性著色組合物形成膜厚為1.0 μm之硬化膜,對分光光譜進行測定而特定出。 詳細之測定條件等並無特別限定,例如可藉由以下之方法進行測定。 首先,使用旋轉塗佈機將感光性著色組合物塗佈於玻璃基板(AGC公司製造之「AN100」)上。其次,於90℃下在加熱板上加熱乾燥90秒而形成塗佈膜。對於所獲得之塗佈膜,於空氣下進行紫外線照射。使用波長365 nm下之強度為32 mW/cm2 之紫外線,曝光量設為70 mJ/cm2 。繼而,使用包含含有0.05質量%之氫氧化鉀與0.08質量%之非離子性界面活性劑(花王公司製造之「A-60」)之水溶液之顯影液,於25℃下實施水壓0.15 MPa之噴淋顯影後,藉由純水停止顯影,藉由水洗噴霧進行洗淨。噴淋顯影時間於10~120秒之間進行調整,設為將未曝光之塗膜溶解去除之時間之1.5倍。將藉由該等操作獲得之附塗膜之基板於烘箱中在230℃下加熱20分鐘而使圖案硬化,獲得附膜厚為1.0 μm之硬化膜之基板。繼而,對於該基板之透光率,使用島津製作所公司製造之分光光度計UV-3150,以1 nm為間隔測定波長380~780 nm之透過率,並且以未塗佈感光性著色組合物之玻璃基板作為對照。繼而,依照JIS Z8701,根據波長380~780 nm之透過率與圖1之光源之分佈(發光光譜)算出XYZ表色系統中之xy色度圖之色度座標(x,y)。Here, the chromaticity coordinates (x, y) in the xy chromaticity diagram can be specified by forming a cured film having a film thickness of 1.0 μm using a photosensitive coloring composition and measuring the spectroscopic spectrum. The detailed measurement conditions and the like are not particularly limited, and for example, the measurement can be performed by the following method. First, a photosensitive coating composition was applied on a glass substrate ("AN100" manufactured by AGC) using a spin coater. Next, it was heated and dried on a hot plate at 90 ° C for 90 seconds to form a coating film. The obtained coating film was irradiated with ultraviolet rays in the air. Ultraviolet light having an intensity of 32 mW / cm 2 at a wavelength of 365 nm was used, and the exposure amount was set to 70 mJ / cm 2 . Next, a developing solution containing an aqueous solution containing 0.05% by mass of potassium hydroxide and 0.08% by mass of a nonionic surfactant ("A-60" manufactured by Kao Corporation) was used, and a water pressure of 0.15 MPa was performed at 25 ° C. After the spray development, the development was stopped by pure water, and the cleaning was performed by water washing spray. The spray development time is adjusted between 10 to 120 seconds, and is set to 1.5 times the time to dissolve and remove the unexposed coating film. The substrate with a coating film obtained by these operations was heated in an oven at 230 ° C. for 20 minutes to harden the pattern to obtain a substrate with a cured film having a film thickness of 1.0 μm. Next, regarding the light transmittance of the substrate, a spectrophotometer UV-3150 manufactured by Shimadzu Corporation was used to measure the transmittance at a wavelength of 380 to 780 nm at intervals of 1 nm, and the glass was not coated with the photosensitive coloring composition. The substrate served as a control. Then, according to JIS Z8701, the chromaticity coordinates (x, y) of the xy chromaticity diagram in the XYZ color system are calculated from the transmittance at a wavelength of 380 to 780 nm and the light source distribution (emission spectrum) in FIG. 1.

<感光性著色組合物之製造方法> 本發明之感光性著色組合物係依照常規方法而製造。 通常較佳為使用塗料調節器、砂磨機、球磨機、輥磨機、石磨機、噴射磨機、均質機等對(a)著色劑預先進行分散處理。由於藉由分散處理將(a)著色劑微粒化,因此感光性著色組合物之塗佈特性提高。<The manufacturing method of a photosensitive coloring composition> The photosensitive coloring composition of this invention is manufactured according to a conventional method. In general, it is preferable to use a paint conditioner, a sand mill, a ball mill, a roll mill, a stone mill, a jet mill, a homogenizer, or the like to perform a dispersion treatment on the colorant in advance. Since (a) the coloring agent is made finer by the dispersion treatment, the coating characteristics of the photosensitive coloring composition are improved.

分散處理通常較佳為藉由併用(a)著色劑、(e)溶劑、及(f)分散劑、視需要之(b)鹼可溶性樹脂之一部分或全部之系統進行(以下有時將供於分散處理之混合物、及藉由該處理獲得之組合物稱為「油墨」或「顏料分散液」)。尤其是若使用高分子分散劑作為(f)分散劑,則可抑制所獲得之油墨及感光性著色組合物之經時增黏(分散穩定性優異),故而較佳。 如上所述,於製造感光性著色組合物之步驟中,較佳為製造至少含有(a)著色劑、(e)溶劑、及(f)分散劑之顏料分散液。作為顏料分散液可使用之(a)著色劑、(e)溶劑、及(f)分散劑,分別可較佳地採用作為感光性著色組合物可使用者而記載者。The dispersion treatment is usually preferably performed by a system using a part or the whole of (a) a colorant, (e) a solvent, and (f) a dispersant, and optionally (b) an alkali-soluble resin (hereinafter sometimes provided in The mixture obtained by the dispersion treatment and the composition obtained by the treatment are called "ink" or "pigment dispersion"). In particular, if a polymer dispersant is used as the (f) dispersant, the obtained ink and the photosensitive coloring composition can be suppressed from thickening with time (excellent dispersion stability), and therefore, it is preferable. As described above, in the step of producing the photosensitive coloring composition, it is preferable to produce a pigment dispersion liquid containing at least (a) a colorant, (e) a solvent, and (f) a dispersant. The (a) colorant, (e) solvent, and (f) dispersant that can be used as the pigment dispersion liquid are each preferably used as a photosensitive coloring composition and can be described by a user.

再者,於對含有調配於感光性著色組合物中之全部成分之液體進行分散處理之情形時,由於分散處理時產生放熱,因此存在高反應性之成分改性之可能性。因此,較佳為藉由不含(c)光聚合起始劑或(d)乙烯性不飽和化合物之系統進行分散處理。 於藉由砂磨機使(a)著色劑分散之情形時,可較佳地使用0.1~8 mm左右之粒徑之玻璃珠或氧化鋯珠。分散處理條件如下:溫度通常為0℃至100℃,較佳為室溫至80℃之範圍。分散時間有根據液之組成及分散處理裝置之尺寸等而合適時間有所不同之傾向,進行適當調節即可。分散之標準為以將顏料分散液或感光性著色組合物塗佈於基板時之20度鏡面光澤度(JIS Z8741)成為50~300之範圍之方式控制油墨之光澤。藉由設為上述下限值以上,有如下傾向:可抑制分散處理不充分而殘存粗糙之顏料((a)著色劑)粒子之情況,容易使顯影性、密接性、解像性等變得充分。又,藉由設為上述上限值以下,有如下傾向:可抑制顏料破碎而產生大量超微粒之情況,而可使分散穩定性變得良好。Furthermore, when a liquid containing all the components formulated in the photosensitive coloring composition is subjected to a dispersion treatment, since heat is generated during the dispersion treatment, there is a possibility that a highly reactive component may be modified. Therefore, it is preferable to perform the dispersion treatment by a system containing no (c) photopolymerization initiator or (d) ethylenically unsaturated compound. When (a) the colorant is dispersed by a sand mill, glass beads or zirconia beads having a particle diameter of about 0.1 to 8 mm can be preferably used. The dispersion treatment conditions are as follows: The temperature is usually in the range of 0 ° C to 100 ° C, preferably in the range of room temperature to 80 ° C. The dispersing time tends to vary depending on the composition of the liquid and the size of the dispersing processing device, and it may be adjusted appropriately. The standard for dispersion is to control the gloss of the ink so that the 20-degree specular gloss (JIS Z8741) when the pigment dispersion liquid or the photosensitive coloring composition is applied to the substrate is in the range of 50 to 300. By setting it to the above lower limit value or more, there is a tendency that the pigment ((a) colorant) particles which are insufficiently dispersed and remain rough can be suppressed, and the developability, adhesiveness, resolvability and the like are easily changed. full. Moreover, when it is below the said upper limit, there exists a tendency which can suppress a case where a pigment breaks and a large amount of ultrafine particles generate | occur | produce, and can make dispersion stability favorable.

又,分散於油墨中之顏料之分散粒徑通常為0.03~0.3 μm。粒徑可藉由動態光散射法等進行測定。 繼而,將藉由上述分散處理所獲得之油墨與感光性著色組合物中所含之上述其他成分加以混合而製成均勻之溶液。於感光性著色組合物之製造步驟中,由於較多情況下微細之污物會混入至液中,因此較理想為藉由過濾器等對所獲得之感光性著色組合物進行過濾處理。The dispersed particle diameter of the pigment dispersed in the ink is usually 0.03 to 0.3 μm. The particle diameter can be measured by a dynamic light scattering method or the like. Then, the ink obtained by the dispersion process and the other components contained in the photosensitive coloring composition are mixed to prepare a uniform solution. In the manufacturing steps of the photosensitive coloring composition, since fine dirt is often mixed into the liquid in many cases, it is desirable to filter the obtained photosensitive coloring composition with a filter or the like.

[硬化物] 本發明之硬化物可藉由將本發明之感光性著色組合物硬化而獲得。將感光性著色組合物硬化而成之硬化物可適宜地用作著色間隔物。[Hardened product] The hardened product of the present invention can be obtained by hardening the photosensitive coloring composition of the present invention. A cured product obtained by curing the photosensitive coloring composition can be suitably used as a colored spacer.

[著色間隔物] 依照包含本發明之硬化物之本發明之著色間隔物的製造方法對其進行說明。[Colored spacer] The method for producing the colored spacer of the present invention including the cured product of the present invention will be described.

(1)支持體 作為用以形成著色間隔物之支持體,只要有適度之強度,則其材質並無特別限定。主要使用透明基板,作為材質,例如可列舉:聚對苯二甲酸乙二酯等聚酯系樹脂、聚丙烯、聚乙烯等聚烯烴系樹脂、聚碳酸酯、聚甲基丙烯酸甲酯、聚碸等熱塑性樹脂製片材;環氧樹脂、不飽和聚酯樹脂、聚(甲基)丙烯酸系樹脂等熱硬化性樹脂片材、或各種玻璃等。其中,就耐熱性之觀點而言,較佳為玻璃、耐熱性樹脂。又,亦存在於基板之表面成膜ITO(Indium Tin Oxide,氧化銦錫)、IZO(Indium Zinc Oxide,氧化銦鋅)等透明電極之情形。除了透明基板以外,亦可於TFT陣列上形成。(1) Support As a support for forming a colored spacer, the material is not particularly limited as long as it has a moderate strength. Transparent substrates are mainly used. Examples of the material include polyester resins such as polyethylene terephthalate, polyolefin resins such as polypropylene and polyethylene, polycarbonate, polymethyl methacrylate, and polyfluorene. Thermoplastic resin sheets such as epoxy resins, unsaturated polyester resins, poly (meth) acrylic resins, and various glass materials. Among them, glass and a heat-resistant resin are preferred from the viewpoint of heat resistance. In addition, transparent electrodes such as ITO (Indium Tin Oxide) and IZO (Indium Zinc Oxide) may be formed on the surface of the substrate. In addition to a transparent substrate, it may be formed on a TFT array.

為了改良接著性等表面物性,可視需要對支持體進行電暈放電處理、臭氧處理、矽烷偶合劑或胺基甲酸酯系樹脂等各種樹脂之薄膜形成處理等。 透明基板之厚度通常設為0.05~10 mm之範圍,較佳為設為0.1~7 mm之範圍。又,於進行各種樹脂之薄膜形成處理之情形時,其膜厚通常為0.01~10 μm之範圍,較佳為0.05~5 μm之範圍。In order to improve surface properties such as adhesion, the support may be subjected to a corona discharge treatment, an ozone treatment, a thin film forming treatment of various resins such as a silane coupling agent or a urethane resin, etc., as necessary. The thickness of the transparent substrate is usually set in a range of 0.05 to 10 mm, and preferably in a range of 0.1 to 7 mm. When a thin film forming process is performed on various resins, the film thickness is usually in the range of 0.01 to 10 μm, and preferably in the range of 0.05 to 5 μm.

(2)著色間隔物 本發明之感光性著色組合物可用於與公知之彩色濾光片用感光性著色組合物同樣之用途,以下,對於用作著色間隔物之情形,對其形成方法進行說明。(2) Colored spacer The photosensitive colored composition of the present invention can be used for the same applications as the known photosensitive colored composition for a color filter. Hereinafter, the method for forming a colored spacer will be described. .

通常,藉由塗佈等方法以膜狀或圖案狀將感光性著色組合物供給於應設置著色間隔物之支持體上,將溶劑乾燥去除。繼而,藉由進行曝光-顯影之光微影法等方法形成圖案。其後,視需要進行追加曝光或熱硬化處理,藉此於該支持體上形成著色間隔物。Usually, the photosensitive coloring composition is supplied to a support to which a coloring spacer is to be provided in a film shape or a pattern shape by a method such as coating, and the solvent is dried and removed. Then, a pattern is formed by a photolithography method such as exposure-development. Thereafter, if necessary, additional exposure or thermosetting treatment is performed to form colored spacers on the support.

(3)著色間隔物之形成 [1]對基板之供給方法 本發明之感光性著色組合物通常以溶解或分散於溶劑中之狀態供給至支持體上。作為其供給方法,可藉由先前公知之方法例如旋轉塗佈法、線棒塗佈法、流塗法、模塗法、輥塗法、噴塗法等進行。又,亦可藉由噴墨法或印刷法等,以圖案狀供給。其中,若藉由模塗法,則就可大幅削減塗佈液之使用量,且完全不會受利用旋塗法時附著之霧等之影響,可抑制雜質產生等綜合觀點而言較佳。(3) Formation of colored spacers [1] Supply method to substrate The photosensitive colored composition of the present invention is usually supplied to a support in a state of being dissolved or dispersed in a solvent. The supply method can be performed by a conventionally known method such as a spin coating method, a bar coating method, a flow coating method, a die coating method, a roll coating method, a spray coating method, or the like. In addition, it may be supplied in a pattern by an inkjet method, a printing method, or the like. Among them, if the die coating method is used, it is possible to greatly reduce the amount of coating liquid used, and it is not affected at all by the fog and the like attached when the spin coating method is used, and it is preferable from a comprehensive viewpoint that the generation of impurities can be suppressed.

塗佈量根據用途而有所不同,例如於著色間隔物之情形時,乾燥膜厚通常為0.5 μm~10 μm之範圍,較佳為1 μm~9 μm之範圍,尤佳為1 μm~7 μm之範圍。又,重要的是乾燥膜厚或最終形成之間隔物之高度於基板全域上均勻。於偏差較大之情形時,存在於液晶面板產生顯示不均等缺陷之情形。The coating amount varies depending on the application. For example, in the case of colored spacers, the dry film thickness is usually in the range of 0.5 μm to 10 μm, preferably in the range of 1 μm to 9 μm, and particularly preferably in the range of 1 μm to 7 μm range. In addition, it is important that the thickness of the dry film or the height of the spacer that is finally formed is uniform over the entire area of the substrate. When the deviation is large, there may be a case where a defect such as display unevenness occurs in the liquid crystal panel.

但於使用本發明之感光性著色組合物藉由光微影法一次形成高度不同之著色間隔物之情形時,最終形成之著色間隔物之高度不同。However, when the photosensitive coloring composition of the present invention is used to form colored spacers having different heights at one time by a photolithography method, the heights of the finally formed colored spacers are different.

再者,可使用玻璃基板等公知之基板作為支持體。又,基板表面為平面為宜。A known substrate such as a glass substrate can be used as the support. The substrate surface is preferably a flat surface.

[2]乾燥方法 將感光性著色組合物供給至支持體上後之乾燥較佳為利用使用加熱板、IR(infrared,紅外線)烘箱、對流烘箱之乾燥方法。又,亦可組合不提高溫度地於減壓腔室內進行乾燥之減壓乾燥法。[2] Drying method The drying method after the photosensitive coloring composition is supplied to the support is preferably a drying method using a hot plate, an IR (infrared) oven, or a convection oven. Further, a reduced-pressure drying method for drying in a decompression chamber without increasing the temperature may be combined.

乾燥溫度及乾燥時間等乾燥條件可根據溶劑成分之種類、所使用之乾燥機之性能等適當選擇。通常於40℃~130℃之溫度且15秒~5分鐘之範圍內選擇,較佳為於50℃~110℃之溫度且30秒~3分鐘之範圍內選擇。The drying conditions such as drying temperature and drying time can be appropriately selected according to the type of the solvent component and the performance of the dryer used. It is usually selected within a temperature range of 40 ° C to 130 ° C and 15 seconds to 5 minutes, and preferably within a range of 50 ° C to 110 ° C and 30 seconds to 3 minutes.

[3]曝光方法 曝光係於感光性著色組合物之塗佈膜上重疊負光罩圖案,經由該光罩圖案照射紫外線或可見光線之光源而進行。於使用曝光光罩進行曝光之情形時,可利用使曝光光罩靠近感光性著色組合物之塗佈膜之方法,或將曝光光罩配置於離開感光性著色組合物之塗佈膜之位置並經由該曝光光罩投影曝光之光之方法。又,亦可利用不使用光罩圖案之藉由雷射光進行之掃描曝光方式。此時,為了防止由氧引起之光聚合性層之感度降低,可視需要於脫氧環境下進行,或於在光聚合性層上形成聚乙烯醇層等隔氧層後進行曝光。[3] Exposure method Exposure is performed by superposing a negative mask pattern on a coating film of a photosensitive coloring composition, and irradiating a light source of ultraviolet or visible light through the mask pattern. In the case of using an exposure mask for exposure, a method of bringing the exposure mask close to the coating film of the photosensitive coloring composition, or arranging the exposure mask at a position away from the coating film of the photosensitive coloring composition and Method for projecting exposed light through the exposure mask. In addition, a scanning exposure method using laser light without using a mask pattern may be used. At this time, in order to prevent the sensitivity of the photopolymerizable layer from being reduced by oxygen, it may be performed in a deoxidizing environment or after exposure to an oxygen barrier layer such as a polyvinyl alcohol layer on the photopolymerizable layer as necessary.

作為本發明之較佳之態樣,於藉由光微影法同時形成高度不同之著色間隔物之情形時,例如使用如下曝光光罩,其具有遮光部(透光率0%)與作為複數個開口部之平均透光率最高之開口部(完全透過開口部)及平均透光率較低之開口部(中間透過開口部)。藉由該方法,利用中間透過開口部與完全透過開口部之平均透光率之差即曝光量之差而產生殘膜率之差異。 中間透過開口部已知有例如利用具有微小之多邊形之遮光單元的矩陣狀遮光圖案製作之方法等。又,已知有藉由作為吸收體之鉻系、鉬系、鎢系、矽系等材料之膜對透光率進行控制而製作之方法等。As a preferred aspect of the present invention, in the case where the colored spacers of different heights are simultaneously formed by the photolithography method, for example, the following exposure mask is used, which has a light shielding portion (light transmittance 0%) and a plurality of The opening having the highest average light transmittance (completely transparent opening) and the opening having a low average light transmittance (middle transparent opening). According to this method, a difference in the residual film rate is generated by using a difference between the average light transmittance of the intermediate transmission opening portion and the completely transmitted opening portion, that is, a difference in exposure amount. A method of making a matrix-shaped light-shielding pattern using a light-shielding unit having a minute polygon is known as the intermediate transmission opening. In addition, a method of making the light transmittance by controlling a film of a material such as chromium-based, molybdenum-based, tungsten-based, or silicon-based materials as an absorber is known.

上述曝光所使用之光源並無特別限定。作為光源,例如可列舉:氙氣燈、鹵素燈、鎢燈、高壓水銀燈、超高壓水銀燈、金屬鹵化物燈、中壓水銀燈、低壓水銀燈、碳弧燈、螢光燈等燈光源,或氬離子雷射、YAG(Yttrium Aluminum Garnet,釔-鋁-石榴石)雷射、準分子雷射、氮雷射、氦-鎘雷射、藍紫色半導體雷射、近紅外半導體雷射等雷射光源等。於照射特定波長之光而使用之情形時,亦可利用光學濾光片。The light source used for the above exposure is not particularly limited. Examples of the light source include a xenon lamp, a halogen lamp, a tungsten lamp, a high-pressure mercury lamp, an ultra-high-pressure mercury lamp, a metal halide lamp, a medium-pressure mercury lamp, a low-pressure mercury lamp, a carbon arc lamp, and a fluorescent lamp, or an argon ion lightning Laser, YAG (Yttrium Aluminum Garnet) laser, excimer laser, nitrogen laser, helium-cadmium laser, blue-violet semiconductor laser, near-infrared semiconductor laser and other laser light sources. When using light of a specific wavelength, an optical filter can also be used.

作為光學濾光片,例如可為可藉由薄膜控制曝光波長下之透光率之類型,作為該情形時之材質,例如可列舉:Cr化合物(Cr之氧化物、氮化物、氮氧化物、氟化物等)、MoSi、Si、W、Al等。The optical filter may be, for example, a type in which the light transmittance at the exposure wavelength can be controlled by a thin film. Examples of the material in this case include Cr compounds (oxides, nitrides, oxynitrides of Cr, Fluoride, etc.), MoSi, Si, W, Al, etc.

作為曝光量,通常為1 mJ/cm2 以上,較佳為5 mJ/cm2 以上,更佳為10 mJ/cm2 以上,且通常為300 mJ/cm2 以下,較佳為200 mJ/cm2 以下,更佳為150 mJ/cm2 以下。 又,於近接曝光方式之情形時,曝光對象與光罩圖案之距離通常為10 μm以上,較佳為50 μm以上,更佳為75 μm以上,且通常為500 μm以下,較佳為400 μm以下,更佳為300 μm以下。The exposure amount is usually 1 mJ / cm 2 or more, preferably 5 mJ / cm 2 or more, more preferably 10 mJ / cm 2 or more, and usually 300 mJ / cm 2 or less, and preferably 200 mJ / cm. 2 or less, more preferably 150 mJ / cm 2 or less. In the case of the proximity exposure method, the distance between the exposure object and the mask pattern is usually 10 μm or more, preferably 50 μm or more, more preferably 75 μm or more, and usually 500 μm or less, and preferably 400 μm. Below, it is more preferably 300 μm or less.

[4]顯影方法 進行上述曝光後,藉由使用鹼性化合物之水溶液、或有機溶劑之顯影,可於基板上形成圖像圖案。該水溶液中可進而含有界面活性劑、有機溶劑、緩衝劑、錯合劑、染料或顏料。[4] Development method After performing the above exposure, an image pattern can be formed on a substrate by development using an aqueous solution of an alkaline compound or an organic solvent. The aqueous solution may further contain a surfactant, an organic solvent, a buffering agent, a complexing agent, a dye, or a pigment.

作為鹼性化合物,可列舉:氫氧化鈉、氫氧化鉀、氫氧化鋰、碳酸鈉、碳酸鉀、碳酸氫鈉、碳酸氫鉀、矽酸鈉、矽酸鉀、偏矽酸鈉、磷酸鈉、磷酸鉀、磷酸氫鈉、磷酸氫鉀、磷酸二氫鈉、磷酸二氫鉀、氫氧化銨等無機鹼性化合物;或單、二或三乙醇胺、單、二或三甲胺、單、二或三乙胺、單或二異丙胺、正丁胺、單、二或三異丙醇胺、伸乙基亞胺、伸乙基二亞胺、四甲基氫氧化銨(TMAH)、膽鹼等有機鹼性化合物。該等鹼性化合物可為兩種以上之混合物。Examples of the basic compound include sodium hydroxide, potassium hydroxide, lithium hydroxide, sodium carbonate, potassium carbonate, sodium bicarbonate, potassium bicarbonate, sodium silicate, potassium silicate, sodium metasilicate, sodium phosphate, Inorganic basic compounds such as potassium phosphate, sodium hydrogen phosphate, potassium hydrogen phosphate, sodium dihydrogen phosphate, potassium dihydrogen phosphate, ammonium hydroxide; or mono, di or triethanolamine, mono, di or trimethylamine, mono, di or tri Ethylamine, mono- or diisopropylamine, n-butylamine, mono-, di- or triisopropanolamine, ethyleneimine, ethylenediimine, tetramethylammonium hydroxide (TMAH), choline and other organic Basic compounds. These basic compounds may be a mixture of two or more.

作為上述界面活性劑,例如可列舉:聚氧乙烯烷基醚類、聚氧乙烯烷基芳基醚類、聚氧乙烯烷基酯類、山梨糖醇酐烷基酯類、單甘油酯烷基酯類等非離子系界面活性劑;烷基苯磺酸鹽類、烷基萘磺酸鹽類、烷基硫酸鹽類、烷基磺酸鹽類、磺基丁二酸酯鹽類等陰離子性界面活性劑;烷基甜菜鹼類、胺基酸類等兩性界面活性劑。Examples of the surfactant include polyoxyethylene alkyl ethers, polyoxyethylene alkylaryl ethers, polyoxyethylene alkyl esters, sorbitan alkyl esters, and monoglyceride alkyl groups. Nonionic surfactants such as esters; anionic properties such as alkylbenzenesulfonates, alkylnaphthalenesulfonates, alkylsulfates, alkylsulfonates, sulfosuccinates, etc. Surfactants; Ampholytic surfactants such as alkyl betaines and amino acids.

作為有機溶劑,例如可列舉:異丙醇、苄醇、乙基賽路蘇、丁基賽路蘇、苯基賽路蘇、丙二醇、二丙酮醇等。有機溶劑可單獨使用,亦可與水溶液併用。Examples of the organic solvent include isopropyl alcohol, benzyl alcohol, ethyl cyrus, butyl cyrus, phenyl cyrus, propylene glycol, and diacetone alcohol. The organic solvent may be used alone or in combination with an aqueous solution.

顯影處理之條件並無特別限制,通常可於顯影溫度為10~50℃之範圍,其中較佳為15~45℃、尤佳為20~40℃下,藉由浸漬顯影法、噴射顯影法、毛刷顯影法、超音波顯影法等任一顯影方法進行。The conditions for the development treatment are not particularly limited, and generally, the development temperature can be in the range of 10 to 50 ° C, preferably 15 to 45 ° C, and particularly preferably 20 to 40 ° C. By the immersion development method, the jet development method, Any development method such as a brush development method and an ultrasonic development method is performed.

[5]追加曝光及熱硬化處理 可視需要藉由與上述曝光方法同樣之方法對顯影後之基板進行追加曝光,又,亦可進行熱硬化處理。關於此時之熱硬化處理條件,溫度可於100℃~280℃之範圍、較佳為150℃~250℃之範圍內選擇,時間可於5分鐘~60分鐘之範圍內選擇。[5] Additional exposure and thermal curing treatment If necessary, additional exposure may be performed on the substrate after development by the same method as the above-mentioned exposure method, and thermal curing treatment may also be performed. Regarding the heat curing treatment conditions at this time, the temperature can be selected in the range of 100 ° C to 280 ° C, preferably 150 ° C to 250 ° C, and the time can be selected in the range of 5 minutes to 60 minutes.

本發明之著色間隔物之大小或形狀等係根據應用其之彩色濾光片之規格等而適當調整,本發明之感光性著色組合物尤其是對藉由光微影法同時形成間隔物與輔助間隔物高度不同之著色間隔物有用,於該情形時,間隔物之高度通常為2~7 μm左右,輔助間隔物通常具有較間隔物低0.2~1.5 μm左右之高度。The size or shape of the colored spacer of the present invention is appropriately adjusted according to the specifications and the like of the color filter to which it is applied. The photosensitive coloring composition of the present invention is particularly suitable for the simultaneous formation of the spacer and the auxiliary by the photolithography method. Colored spacers having different spacer heights are useful. In this case, the height of the spacer is usually about 2 to 7 μm, and the auxiliary spacer usually has a height that is about 0.2 to 1.5 μm lower than the spacer.

[彩色濾光片] 本發明之彩色濾光片具備如上所述之本發明之著色間隔物,例如係於作為透明基板之玻璃基板上積層黑矩陣與紅色、綠色、藍色之畫素著色層及表塗層,並於形成著色間隔物後形成配向膜而製造。或亦存在畫素著色層、著色間隔物形成於液晶驅動側基板上之情形,或亦存在分開形成於透明基板上與液晶驅動側基板上之情形。 又,如韓國公開專利第10-2013-0015734號公報、韓國公開專利第10-2015-0059026號公報、韓國公開專利第10-2017-0017447號公報所記載般,亦可於非顯示區域設置著色間隔物,於該情形時,藉由在對面側積層藍色層或紅色層之彩色濾光片,可減少光洩漏至非顯示區域之情況。又,亦可僅為藍色層、僅為紅色層、僅為綠色層。具備LED背光裝置之液晶顯示器有LED之藍色光之成分較強之傾向。因此,藍色光之成分容易透過,例如,於僅單層、尤其是僅藍色層之情形時,有容易產生波長400~500 nm之漏光等之傾向。該漏光可藉由製成液晶顯示器時之積層結構、或對向之著色間隔物之材料特性加以調整,例如適宜為使用使本發明之感光性著色組合物硬化而成之著色間隔物。[Color filter] The color filter of the present invention includes the coloring spacer of the present invention as described above, for example, a black matrix and red, green, and blue pixel color layers are laminated on a glass substrate as a transparent substrate. And surface coating, and forming an alignment film after forming colored spacers. There may be a case where a pixel colored layer and a colored spacer are formed on the liquid crystal driving side substrate, or a case where they are formed separately on a transparent substrate and a liquid crystal driving side substrate. In addition, as described in Korean Laid-Open Patent No. 10-2013-0015734, Korean Laid-Open Patent No. 10-2015-0059026, and Korean Laid-Open Patent No. 10-2017-0017447, coloring may be provided in a non-display area. In this case, the spacer can reduce the leakage of light to the non-display area by stacking a color filter of a blue layer or a red layer on the opposite side. Moreover, it may be only a blue layer, only a red layer, and only a green layer. Liquid crystal displays equipped with LED backlight devices tend to have a stronger blue light component. Therefore, the components of blue light are easily transmitted. For example, when there is only a single layer, especially a blue layer, there is a tendency that light leakage at a wavelength of 400 to 500 nm is likely to occur. The light leakage can be adjusted by the laminated structure when the liquid crystal display is manufactured, or the material characteristics of the facing colored spacer. For example, it is suitable to use a colored spacer obtained by curing the photosensitive coloring composition of the present invention.

[圖像顯示裝置] 本發明之圖像顯示裝置具備本發明之著色間隔物。 例如可將上述具有本發明之著色間隔物之彩色濾光片與液晶驅動側基板進行貼合而形成液晶單元,於所形成之液晶單元中注入液晶,藉此製造具備本發明之著色間隔物之液晶顯示裝置等本發明之圖像顯示裝置。 [實施例][Image display device] The image display device of the present invention includes the colored spacer of the present invention. For example, the color filter having the colored spacer of the present invention and the liquid crystal driving side substrate can be bonded to form a liquid crystal cell, and liquid crystal can be injected into the formed liquid crystal cell, thereby manufacturing a colored spacer with the colored spacer of the present invention. The image display device of the present invention, such as a liquid crystal display device. [Example]

繼而,列舉實施例及比較例更具體地說明本發明,但本發明只要不超過其主旨,則不限定於以下實施例。 以下之實施例及比較例所使用之感光性著色組合物之構成成分如下所述。Next, the present invention will be described more specifically with reference to examples and comparative examples. However, the present invention is not limited to the following examples as long as the gist of the present invention is not exceeded. The constituents of the photosensitive coloring composition used in the following examples and comparative examples are as follows.

<鹼可溶性樹脂-I> 一面對丙二醇單甲醚乙酸酯145質量份進行氮氣置換一面加以攪拌,並升溫至120℃。於其中滴加苯乙烯10質量份、甲基丙烯酸縮水甘油酯85.2質量份及具有三環癸烷骨架之單甲基丙烯酸酯(日立化成公司製造之FA-513M)66質量份,並且歷經3小時滴加2,2'-偶氮雙-2-甲基丁腈8.47質量份,進而於90℃下繼續攪拌2小時。其次將反應容器內置換為空氣,於丙烯酸43.2質量份中投入三(二甲胺基甲基)苯酚0.7質量份及對苯二酚0.12質量份,於100℃下持續反應12小時。其後,添加四氫鄰苯二甲酸酐(THPA)56.2質量份、三乙胺0.7質量份,於100℃下反應3.5小時。由此獲得之鹼可溶性樹脂-I之藉由GPC測得之聚苯乙烯換算之重量平均分子量Mw為8400,酸值為80 mgKOH/g。<Alkali-soluble resin-I> While stirring 145 parts by mass of propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate, the mixture was stirred, and the temperature was raised to 120 ° C. To this, 10 parts by mass of styrene, 85.2 parts by mass of glycidyl methacrylate, and 66 parts by mass of monomethacrylate (FA-513M manufactured by Hitachi Chemical Co., Ltd.) having a tricyclodecane skeleton were added dropwise, and the reaction was continued for 3 hours. 8.47 parts by mass of 2,2'-azobis-2-methylbutyronitrile was added dropwise, and stirring was continued at 90 ° C for 2 hours. Next, the inside of the reaction vessel was replaced with air, 0.7 parts by mass of tris (dimethylaminomethyl) phenol and 0.12 parts by mass of hydroquinone were added to 43.2 parts by mass of acrylic acid, and the reaction was continued at 100 ° C. for 12 hours. Thereafter, 56.2 parts by mass of tetrahydrophthalic anhydride (THPA) and 0.7 parts by mass of triethylamine were added, and the mixture was reacted at 100 ° C for 3.5 hours. The polystyrene-equivalent weight average molecular weight Mw of the alkali-soluble resin-I thus obtained, as measured by GPC, was 8400, and the acid value was 80 mgKOH / g.

<鹼可溶性樹脂-II> 一面對丙二醇單甲醚乙酸酯210.1質量份與丙二醇單甲醚52.5質量份之混合液進行氮氣置換一面加以攪拌,並升溫至120℃。歷經3小時於其中滴加甲基丙烯酸苄酯3.52質量份、甲基丙烯酸68.8質量份、具有三環癸烷骨架之單甲基丙烯酸酯(日立化成公司製造之FA-513M)39.7質量份及2,2'-偶氮雙-2-甲基丁腈3.3質量份之混合液,進而於90℃下繼續攪拌2小時。其次,將反應容器內置換為空氣,投入甲基丙烯酸縮水甘油酯38.4質量份、三(二甲胺基甲基)苯酚0.8質量份及對苯二酚0.1質量份,於100℃下持續反應12小時。由此獲得之鹼可溶性樹脂-II之藉由GPC測得之聚苯乙烯換算之重量平均分子量Mw為19100,酸值為198 mgKOH/g。<Alkali Soluble Resin-II> While stirring the mixed solution of 210.1 parts by mass of propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate and 52.5 parts by mass of propylene glycol monomethyl ether, the mixture was stirred while being heated to 120 ° C. 3.52 parts by mass of benzyl methacrylate, 68.8 parts by mass of methacrylic acid, and 39.7 parts by mass of monomethacrylate (FA-513M manufactured by Hitachi Chemical Co., Ltd.) having a tricyclodecane skeleton were added dropwise thereto over 3 hours. 3.3 'parts by mass of 2'-azobis-2-methylbutyronitrile, and further stirred at 90 ° C for 2 hours. Next, the inside of the reaction vessel was replaced with air, and 38.4 parts by mass of glycidyl methacrylate, 0.8 parts by mass of tris (dimethylaminomethyl) phenol, and 0.1 part by mass of hydroquinone were charged, and the reaction was continued at 100 ° C. 12 hour. The polystyrene-equivalent weight average molecular weight Mw of the alkali-soluble resin-II thus obtained, measured by GPC, was 19,100, and the acid value was 198 mgKOH / g.

<鹼可溶性樹脂-III> 於三乙胺1.8質量份、及4-甲氧基苯酚0.12質量份、丙二醇單甲醚乙酸酯91.8質量份之存在下,於85℃下使丁二酸酐17質量份與二季戊四醇聚丙烯酸酯(新中村化學公司製造之A-9550)350質量份反應6小時,藉此獲得1分子中具有1個羧基與2個以上之丙烯醯基之多官能丙烯酸酯(d-1)。 繼而,於80℃下對雙酚A型環氧樹脂(三菱化學公司製造之jER-828,環氧當量186)32.7 g、上述多官能丙烯酸酯(d-1)460.7 g、2,2,6,6-四甲基哌啶1-氧自由基0.2 g、三苯基膦8.0 g、丙二醇單甲醚乙酸酯18.9 g進行攪拌直至酸值成為2 mgKOH/g以下為止。繼而,於所獲得之反應產物520.5 g中添加丙二醇單甲醚乙酸酯161.6 g使其溶解後,添加1,2,3,6-四氫鄰苯二甲酸酐24.2 g,於90℃下反應4小時,藉此獲得鹼可溶性樹脂-III。所獲得之鹼可溶性樹脂-III之酸值為23 mgKOH/g,藉由GPC測得之聚苯乙烯換算之重量平均分子量Mw為3000,雙鍵當量為120 g/mol。<Alkali-soluble resin-III> In the presence of 1.8 parts by mass of triethylamine, 0.12 parts by mass of 4-methoxyphenol, and 91.8 parts by mass of propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate, 17 parts by mass of succinic anhydride was made at 85 ° C. Part was reacted with 350 parts by mass of dipentaerythritol polyacrylate (A-9550 manufactured by Shin Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd.) for 6 hours, thereby obtaining a polyfunctional acrylate (d having 1 carboxyl group and 2 or more acryl fluorenyl groups in 1 molecule) -1). Then, 32.7 g of bisphenol A epoxy resin (jER-828 manufactured by Mitsubishi Chemical Corporation, epoxy equivalent 186), 460.7 g of the above-mentioned polyfunctional acrylate (d-1), 2, 2, 6 at 80 ° C. , 6-tetramethylpiperidine 1-oxy radical 0.2 g, triphenylphosphine 8.0 g, and propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate 18.9 g were stirred until the acid value became 2 mgKOH / g or less. Then, 161.6 g of propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate was added to 520.5 g of the obtained reaction product to dissolve it, and 24.2 g of 1,2,3,6-tetrahydrophthalic anhydride was added, and reacted at 90 ° C. 4 hours, thereby obtaining alkali-soluble resin-III. The alkali-soluble resin-III obtained had an acid value of 23 mgKOH / g, a polystyrene-equivalent weight average molecular weight Mw measured by GPC of 3000, and a double bond equivalent of 120 g / mol.

<分散劑-I> BYK-Chemie公司製造之「BYK-LPN21116」(包含側鏈具有四級銨鹽基及三級胺基之A嵌段與不具有四級銨鹽基及三級胺基之B嵌段的丙烯酸系A-B嵌段共聚物。胺值為70 mgKOH/g。酸值為1 mgKOH/g以下) 於分散劑-I之A嵌段中含有下述式(1a)及(2a)之重複單元,於B嵌段中含有下述式(3a)之重複單元。下述式(1a)、(2a)、及(3a)於分散劑-I之總重複單元中所占之重複單元之含有比率分別為11.1莫耳%、22.2莫耳%、6.7莫耳%。<Dispersant-I> "BYK-LPN21116" manufactured by BYK-Chemie (including A-blocks with a quaternary ammonium salt group and a tertiary amine group in the side chain and those without B-block acrylic AB block copolymer. Amine value is 70 mgKOH / g. Acid value is 1 mgKOH / g or less) The A block of the dispersant-I contains the following formulae (1a) and (2a) The repeating unit includes a repeating unit of the following formula (3a) in the B block. The content ratios of the repeating units occupied by the following formulae (1a), (2a), and (3a) in the total repeating units of the dispersant-I are 11.1 mole%, 22.2 mole%, and 6.7 mole%, respectively.

[化50] [Chemical 50]

<分散劑-II> BYK-Chemie公司製造之「DISPERBYK-2000」(包含側鏈具有四級銨鹽基之A嵌段與不具有四級銨鹽基之B嵌段的丙烯酸系A-B嵌段共聚物。胺值為10 mgKOH/g。酸值為1 mgKOH/g以下)<Dispersant-II> "DISPERBYK-2000" manufactured by BYK-Chemie (copolymerization of acrylic block AB containing an A block having a quaternary ammonium salt group in a side chain and a B block having no quaternary ammonium salt group (Amine value is 10 mgKOH / g. Acid value is less than 1 mgKOH / g)

<溶劑-I> PGMEA:丙二醇單甲醚乙酸酯 <溶劑-II> MB:3-甲氧基丁醇 <光聚合起始劑-I><Solvent-I> PGMEA: propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate <Solvent-II> MB: 3-methoxybutanol <Photopolymerization initiator-I>

BASF公司製造之OXE-01(肟酯光聚合起始劑)OXE-01 (oxime ester photopolymerization initiator) manufactured by BASF

<光聚合性單體> 日本化藥公司製造之DPHA(二季戊四醇六丙烯酸酯) <添加劑-I> 日本化藥公司製造之KAYAMER PM-21(含甲基丙烯醯基之磷酸酯) <添加劑-II> Dow Corning Toray公司製造之SH6040(3-縮水甘油氧基丙基三甲氧基甲矽烷) <界面活性劑> DIC公司製造之MEGAFAC F-554<Photopolymerizable monomer> DPHA (dipentaerythritol hexaacrylate) manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd. <Additive-I> KAYAMER PM-21 (methacryl fluorenyl-containing phosphate) manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd. <Additive- II > SH6040 (3-glycidyloxypropyltrimethoxysilyl) manufactured by Dow Corning Toray Corporation <surfactant> MEGAFAC F-554 manufactured by DIC Corporation

<顏料分散液1~6之製備> 將表2所記載之顏料、分散劑、鹼可溶性樹脂、及溶劑以成為表2所記載之質量比之方式加以混合。再者,表2中之分散劑及鹼可溶性樹脂之量為固形物成分量,溶劑之量中亦包括來自分散劑及鹼可溶性樹脂之溶劑量。 藉由塗料振盪機於25~45℃之範圍內將該溶液進行3小時之分散處理。作為珠粒,使用0.5 mm之氧化鋯珠,並添加分散液之2.5倍之質量。分散結束後,藉由過濾器將珠粒與分散液分離,而製備顏料分散液1~6。<Preparation of Pigment Dispersions 1 to 6> The pigments, dispersants, alkali-soluble resins, and solvents described in Table 2 were mixed so as to have a mass ratio described in Table 2. In addition, the amounts of the dispersant and the alkali-soluble resin in Table 2 are the amounts of solid components, and the amount of the solvent also includes the amount of the solvent derived from the dispersant and the alkali-soluble resin. This solution was dispersed for 3 hours by a paint shaker in a range of 25 to 45 ° C. As beads, use 0.5 mm Zirconia beads, and add 2.5 times the mass of the dispersion. After the dispersion was completed, the beads and the dispersion liquid were separated by a filter to prepare pigment dispersion liquids 1 to 6.

[表2] [Table 2]

<顏料分散液7之製備> 以如下方式變更顏料之種類、分散劑之種類、各成分之調配比,除此以外,與顏料分散液1~6同樣地進行分散,而製備顏料分散液7。再者,分散劑及鹼可溶性樹脂之量為固形物成分量,溶劑之量中亦包括來自分散劑及鹼可溶性樹脂之溶劑量。 C.I.顏料橙64 70質量份 C.I.顏料紫29 10質量份 C.I.顏料藍16 20質量份 分散劑-II 100質量份 鹼可溶性樹脂-I 100質量份 溶劑-I 960質量份 溶劑-II 240質量份<Preparation of Pigment Dispersion Liquid 7> The pigment dispersion liquid 7 was prepared by dispersing in the same manner as the pigment dispersion liquids 1 to 6 except that the type of pigment, the type of dispersant, and the mixing ratio of each component were changed as follows. In addition, the amount of the dispersant and the alkali-soluble resin is the amount of the solid matter component, and the amount of the solvent also includes the amount of the solvent derived from the dispersant and the alkali-soluble resin. C.I.Pigment Orange 64 70 parts by mass C.I.Pigment Purple 29 10 parts by mass C.I.Pigment Blue 16 20 parts by mass Dispersant-II 100 parts by mass Alkali-soluble resin-I 100 parts by mass Solvent-I 960 parts by mass Solvent-II 240 parts by mass

<感光性著色組合物1~14之製備> [實施例1~12、比較例1及2] 使用上述所製備之顏料分散液1~5及7,以感光性著色組合物之總固形物成分中之比率成為表3~5之調配比率之方式添加各成分,進而,以總固形物成分之含有比率為22質量%,且成為PGMEA/MB=80/20(質量比)之方式添加溶劑,加以攪拌使其溶解,而製備感光性著色組合物1~14。使用所獲得之各感光性著色組合物,藉由下文所述之方法進行評價。<Preparation of Photosensitive Coloring Compositions 1 to 14> [Examples 1 to 12, Comparative Examples 1 and 2] Using the pigment dispersion liquids 1 to 5 and 7 prepared as described above, the total solid content of the photosensitive coloring composition was used. Add the components such that the ratios in Tables 3 to 5 are the blending ratios, and further add a solvent such that the total solids content ratio is 22% by mass and PGMEA / MB = 80/20 (mass ratio). The mixture was stirred and dissolved to prepare a photosensitive coloring composition 1 to 14. Each of the obtained photosensitive coloring compositions was evaluated by the method described below.

[表3] [table 3]

[表4] [Table 4]

[表5] [table 5]

<色度之測定> 以加熱燒成後之膜厚成為1.0 μm之方式,使用旋轉塗佈機於玻璃基板(AGC公司製造之「AN100」)上塗佈各感光性著色組合物。繼而,於90℃下在加熱板上加熱乾燥90秒而形成塗佈膜。 對於所獲得之塗佈膜,不使用光罩而實施全面曝光處理。使用波長365 nm下之強度為32 mW/cm2 之紫外線,曝光量設為70 mJ/cm2 。又,紫外線照射係於空氣下進行。<Measurement of chromaticity> Each photosensitive coloring composition was applied on a glass substrate ("AN100" manufactured by AGC) using a spin coater so that the film thickness after heating and firing became 1.0 μm. Then, the coating film was formed by heating and drying on a hot plate at 90 ° C for 90 seconds. The obtained coating film was subjected to full exposure processing without using a photomask. Ultraviolet light having an intensity of 32 mW / cm 2 at a wavelength of 365 nm was used, and the exposure amount was set to 70 mJ / cm 2 . The ultraviolet irradiation was performed in the air.

繼而,使用包含含有0.05質量%之氫氧化鉀與0.08質量%之非離子性界面活性劑(花王公司製造之「A-60」)之水溶液的顯影液,於25℃下實施水壓0.15 MPa之噴淋顯影後,藉由純水停止顯影,藉由水洗噴霧進行洗淨。噴淋顯影時間設為顯影50秒。 將該基板於烘箱中在230℃下加熱燒成20分鐘加以硬化,而獲得具有著色層之色度測定用基板。Next, a developing solution containing an aqueous solution containing 0.05% by mass of potassium hydroxide and 0.08% by mass of a nonionic surfactant ("A-60" manufactured by Kao Corporation) was used to perform a water pressure of 0.15 MPa at 25 ° C. After the spray development, the development was stopped by pure water, and the cleaning was performed by water washing spray. The shower development time was set to 50 seconds for development. The substrate was heated and fired in an oven at 230 ° C. for 20 minutes to be hardened to obtain a substrate for color measurement with a colored layer.

使用島津製作所公司製造之分光光度計UV-3150,以1 nm為間隔測定所獲得之各色度測定用基板之波長380~780 nm下之透光率,並且以未塗佈感光性著色組合物之玻璃基板作為對照。繼而,根據各色度測定用基板之波長380~780 nm之每隔1 nm之透過率與圖1之光源之分佈(發光光譜)算出XYZ表色系統中之xy色度圖之色度座標(x,y)。將結果示於表3~5。Using a UV-3150 spectrophotometer manufactured by Shimadzu Corporation, the light transmittance of each of the obtained chromaticity measurement substrates at a wavelength of 380 to 780 nm was measured at intervals of 1 nm. A glass substrate was used as a control. Then, calculate the chromaticity coordinates (x) of the xy chromaticity diagram in the XYZ color system based on the transmittance of every 1 nm of the wavelengths of 380 to 780 nm for each chromaticity measurement substrate and the light source distribution (luminous spectrum) in FIG. 1. , Y). The results are shown in Tables 3 to 5.

<光學特性評價用基板之製作> 以加熱燒成後之膜厚成為2.5 μm之方式,使用旋轉塗佈機於玻璃基板(AGC公司製造之「AN100」)上塗佈各感光性著色組合物。繼而,於90℃下在加熱板上加熱乾燥90秒而形成塗佈膜。 對於所獲得之塗佈膜,不使用光罩而實施全面曝光處理。使用波長365 nm下之強度為32 mW/cm2 之紫外線,曝光量設為70 mJ/cm2 。又,紫外線照射係於空氣下進行。<Production of the substrate for evaluating optical characteristics> Each photosensitive coloring composition was applied on a glass substrate ("AN100" manufactured by AGC) using a spin coater so that the film thickness after heating and firing became 2.5 μm. Then, the coating film was formed by heating and drying on a hot plate at 90 ° C for 90 seconds. The obtained coating film was subjected to full exposure processing without using a photomask. Ultraviolet light having an intensity of 32 mW / cm 2 at a wavelength of 365 nm was used, and the exposure amount was set to 70 mJ / cm 2 . The ultraviolet irradiation was performed in the air.

繼而,使用包含含有0.05質量%之氫氧化鉀與0.08質量%之非離子性界面活性劑(花王公司製造之「A-60」)之水溶液的顯影液,於25℃下實施水壓0.15 MPa之噴淋顯影後,藉由純水停止顯影,藉由水洗噴霧進行洗淨。噴淋顯影時間設為顯影50秒。 將該基板於烘箱中在230℃下加熱燒成20分鐘加以硬化,而獲得具有著色層之光學特性評價用基板。Next, a developing solution containing an aqueous solution containing 0.05% by mass of potassium hydroxide and 0.08% by mass of a nonionic surfactant ("A-60" manufactured by Kao Corporation) was used to perform a water pressure of 0.15 MPa at 25 ° C. After the spray development, the development was stopped by pure water, and the cleaning was performed by water washing spray. The shower development time was set to 50 seconds for development. This substrate was heated and fired in an oven at 230 ° C. for 20 minutes to be hardened to obtain a substrate for evaluating optical characteristics having a colored layer.

<藍色基板之製作> 使用上述所製備之顏料分散液6,以感光性著色組合物之總固形物成分中之比率成為以下之調配比率之方式添加各成分,進而以總固形物成分之含有比率成為22質量%之方式添加PGMEA,並加以攪拌、溶解,而製備感光性著色組合物15。<Preparation of blue substrate> Using the pigment dispersion liquid 6 prepared above, each component is added so that the ratio of the total solids component of the photosensitive coloring composition becomes the following blending ratio, and the content of the total solids component is further included. PGMEA was added so that the ratio might be 22% by mass, and the mixture was stirred and dissolved to prepare a photosensitive coloring composition 15.

顏料分散液6 41.67質量% 鹼可溶性樹脂-I 34.98質量% 光聚合性單體 19.25質量% 光聚合起始劑-I 4.00質量% 界面活性劑 0.10質量%Pigment dispersion 6 41.67% by mass Alkali-soluble resin-I 34.98% by mass Photopolymerizable monomer 19.25% by mass Photopolymerization initiator-I 4.00% by mass Surfactant 0.10% by mass

繼而,以加熱燒成後之膜厚成為1.0 μm之方式進行調整,除此以外,進行與<光學特性評價用基板之製作>同樣之操作,而獲得具有藍色層之藍色基板。Then, a blue substrate having a blue layer was obtained by adjusting the film thickness after heating and firing so as to be 1.0 μm, and performing the same operation as in <Preparing a substrate for evaluating optical characteristics>.

<波長400~500 nm透過率、吸光度、色調之評價> 使用島津製作所公司製造之分光光度計UV-3150,以1 nm為間隔測定所獲得之光學特性評價用基板及藍色基板之波長380~780 nm之透光率及吸光度,並且以未塗佈感光性著色組合物之玻璃基板作為對照。<Evaluation of transmittance, absorbance, and hue at a wavelength of 400 to 500 nm> The wavelengths of the obtained substrates for evaluating optical characteristics and blue substrates were measured using a spectrophotometer UV-3150 manufactured by Shimadzu Corporation at a wavelength of 380 to The light transmittance and absorbance at 780 nm were compared with a glass substrate on which the photosensitive coloring composition was not applied.

然後,將各基板之波長400~500 nm下之每隔1 nm的透過率之測定值進行平均,藉此算出平均透過率,繼而使用該等計算值,算出將光學特性評價用基板與藍色基板重疊之狀態下之平均透過率,按照以下之基準進行評價。於藍色基板單獨之情形時,波長400~500 nm之平均透過率變高,因此較佳為藉由進一步積層著色層而使其平均透過率之值變低。 按照同樣之順序,算出波長400 nm下之透過率、波長450 nm下之透過率、波長500 nm下之透過率,將該等結果示於表3~5。Then, the measured values of the transmittances at intervals of 1 nm at a wavelength of 400 to 500 nm of each substrate are averaged to calculate the average transmittance, and the calculated values are then used to calculate the optical property evaluation substrate and the blue color. The average transmittance in the state where the substrates were overlapped was evaluated according to the following criteria. In the case where the blue substrate is alone, the average transmittance at a wavelength of 400 to 500 nm becomes high. Therefore, it is preferable to further reduce the value of the average transmittance by further laminating the colored layer. In the same procedure, the transmittance at a wavelength of 400 nm, the transmittance at a wavelength of 450 nm, and the transmittance at a wavelength of 500 nm were calculated. The results are shown in Tables 3 to 5.

(波長400~500 nm平均透過率) A:5%以下 C:超過5%(Average transmittance of wavelength 400 to 500 nm) A: 5% or less C: More than 5%

繼而,將各光學特性評價用基板之波長400~500 nm下之每隔1 nm的吸光度之測定值進行平均,藉此算出平均吸光度。同樣地算出波長500~700 nm之平均吸光度,而算出波長400~500 nm之平均吸光度相對於波長500~700 nm之平均吸光度之比。將該等結果示於表3~5。 再者,表3~5中,作為「吸光度比率」,記載(波長400~500 nm之平均吸光度)/(波長500~700 nm之平均吸光度)之值。Then, the average absorbance was calculated by averaging the measured values of the absorbance at every 1 nm at the wavelengths of 400 to 500 nm of each optical property evaluation substrate. Similarly, the average absorbance at a wavelength of 500 to 700 nm was calculated, and the ratio of the average absorbance at a wavelength of 400 to 500 nm to the average absorbance at a wavelength of 500 to 700 nm was calculated. These results are shown in Tables 3 to 5. In Tables 3 to 5, the value of (average absorbance at a wavelength of 400 to 500 nm) / (average absorbance at a wavelength of 500 to 700 nm) is described as the "absorbance ratio".

繼而,根據各光學特性評價用基板及藍色基板之波長380~780 nm之每隔1 nm之透過率與圖1之光源之分佈(發光光譜)算出將光學特性評價用基板與藍色基板重疊之狀態的XYZ表色系統中之xy色度圖之色度座標(x,y),按照以下之基準進行色調評價。將各結果示於表3~5。Next, the optical property evaluation substrate and the blue substrate were calculated based on the transmittance of every 1 nm of the wavelengths of 380 to 780 nm and the light source distribution (emission spectrum) of each of the optical property evaluation substrates and the blue substrates. The chromaticity coordinates (x, y) of the xy chromaticity diagram in the XYZ color measurement system in this state are evaluated based on the following criteria. Each result is shown in Tables 3-5.

(色調) (1)A:x≧0.25且y≧0.25(色調接近黑色) (2)B:x≧0.20且y≧0.20,且 不滿足(1)之範圍(色調稍顯藍色) (3)C:x<0.20或y<0.20(色調非常藍)(Tint) (1) A: x ≧ 0.25 and y ≧ 0.25 (hue is close to black) (2) B: x ≧ 0.20 and y ≧ 0.20, and does not satisfy the range of (1) (hue is slightly blue) (3 ) C: x <0.20 or y <0.20 (hue is very blue)

<光學密度(OD)之評價> 藉由透過密度計(GretagMacbeth公司製造之「D200-II」)測定所獲得之光學特性評價用基板之著色層與藍色基板之藍色層各自之光學密度(OD)。根據該等測定值,算出將著色層與藍色層積層之狀態下之光學密度。將其結果示於表3~5。 繼而,算出僅光學特性評價用基板之著色層之每單位膜厚之光學密度(OD/μm)。將其結果示於表3~5。再者,表3~5中,作為「光學密度 OD/μm」,記載每1 μm之單位光學密度 OD/μm。<Evaluation of Optical Density (OD)> The optical densities of each of the colored layer of the obtained substrate for evaluating optical characteristics and the blue layer of the blue substrate were measured by a transmission densitometer ("D200-II" manufactured by GretagMacbeth). OD). Based on these measured values, the optical density in a state where the colored layer and the blue layer are laminated is calculated. The results are shown in Tables 3 to 5. Then, the optical density (OD / μm) per unit film thickness of only the colored layer of the substrate for evaluating optical characteristics was calculated. The results are shown in Tables 3 to 5. In addition, in Tables 3 to 5, as the "optical density OD / μm", the unit optical density OD / μm per 1 μm is described.

<機械特性評價用基板之製作> 使用旋轉塗佈機於玻璃基板(旭硝子公司製造之「AN100」)上塗佈實施例1~12、比較例1及2之各感光性著色組合物。進行真空乾燥後,於90℃下在加熱板上加熱乾燥90秒而形成塗佈膜。 對於所獲得之塗佈膜,使用具有直徑5~50 μm(5~20 μm:以1 μm為間隔;25 μm~50 μm:以5 μm為間隔)之各種直徑之圓形圖案之完全透過開口部的曝光光罩實施曝光處理。曝光間距(光罩與塗佈面間之距離)為250 μm。作為照射光,使用波長365 nm下之強度為32 mW/cm2 之紫外線,曝光量設為70 mJ/cm2 。又,紫外線照射係於空氣下進行。<Preparation of a substrate for evaluating mechanical characteristics> Each of the photosensitive coloring compositions of Examples 1 to 12 and Comparative Examples 1 and 2 was coated on a glass substrate ("AN100" manufactured by Asahi Glass Co., Ltd.) using a spin coater. After vacuum drying, it was dried by heating on a hot plate at 90 ° C for 90 seconds to form a coating film. For the obtained coating film, a fully transparent opening having a circular pattern of various diameters having a diameter of 5 to 50 μm (5 to 20 μm: at intervals of 1 μm; 25 μm to 50 μm: at intervals of 5 μm) was used. Part of the exposure mask performs exposure processing. The exposure pitch (distance between the mask and the coating surface) was 250 μm. As the irradiation light, ultraviolet rays having an intensity of 32 mW / cm 2 at a wavelength of 365 nm were used, and the exposure amount was set to 70 mJ / cm 2 . The ultraviolet irradiation was performed in the air.

繼而,使用包含含有0.05質量%之氫氧化鉀與0.08質量%之非離子性界面活性劑(花王公司製造之「A-60」)之水溶液的顯影液,於25℃下實施水壓0.05 MPa之噴淋顯影後,藉由純水停止顯影,藉由水洗噴霧進行洗淨。噴淋顯影時間於10~120秒之間進行調整,設為將未曝光之塗膜溶解去除之時間之1.3倍。 藉由該等操作,獲得將不需要部分去除之圖案。將形成有該圖案之基板於烘箱中在230℃下加熱20分鐘而使圖案硬化,獲得高度為2.5 μm之大致圓柱狀之間隔物圖案。Next, a developing solution containing an aqueous solution containing 0.05% by mass of potassium hydroxide and 0.08% by mass of a nonionic surfactant ("A-60" manufactured by Kao Corporation) was used, and a water pressure of 0.05 MPa was performed at 25 ° C. After the spray development, the development was stopped by pure water, and the cleaning was performed by water washing spray. The spray development time is adjusted between 10 to 120 seconds, and is set to 1.3 times the time to dissolve and remove the unexposed coating film. With these operations, a pattern that will not need to be partially removed is obtained. The patterned substrate was heated in an oven at 230 ° C. for 20 minutes to harden the pattern to obtain a substantially cylindrical spacer pattern having a height of 2.5 μm.

<機械特性之評價> 所獲得之間隔物圖案中,以底面之直徑為22±2 μm之圖案作為對象,按照以下之順序測定彈性恢復率。 作為負載-卸載試驗之微小硬度計,使用Fischer Instruments公司製造(FISCHERSCOPE H100C),於測定溫度23℃下使用直徑50 μm之平面壓頭,以一定速度(5 mN/sec)對間隔物施加荷重,於荷重達到100 mN處保持5秒,繼而於相同速度下進行卸載,於荷重降至0 mN處保持5秒,而獲得荷重-位移曲線。根據該荷重-位移曲線,以最大之位移值作為最大位移H[max],以荷重成為0 mN並保持5秒後之位移作為最終位移H[Last]而算出。 繼而,藉由下述式算出彈性恢復率,以如下方式進行彈性恢復率評價。將各結果示於表3~5。<Evaluation of mechanical characteristics> Among the obtained spacer patterns, a pattern having a bottom surface diameter of 22 ± 2 μm was used as an object, and the elastic recovery rate was measured in the following procedure. As a micro-hardness tester for load-unloading test, a Fischer Instruments company (FISCHERSCOPE H100C) was used, and a flat indenter with a diameter of 50 μm was used at a measurement temperature of 23 ° C. to apply a load to the spacer at a constant speed (5 mN / sec). Hold the load at 100 mN for 5 seconds, then unload it at the same speed, and hold it for 5 seconds at the load reduced to 0 mN to obtain the load-displacement curve. Based on the load-displacement curve, the maximum displacement value was taken as the maximum displacement H [max], and the displacement after the load became 0 mN and held for 5 seconds was calculated as the final displacement H [Last]. Then, the elastic recovery rate was calculated by the following formula, and the elastic recovery rate was evaluated as follows. Each result is shown in Tables 3-5.

彈性恢復率(%)= {(最大位移H[max]-最終位移H[Last]) /最大位移H[max]}×100Elastic recovery rate (%) = {(maximum displacement H [max]-final displacement H [Last]) / maximum displacement H [max]} × 100

(彈性恢復率) A:90%以上 C:未達90%(Elastic recovery rate) A: 90% or more C: Less than 90%

對於使用實施例1、6~9、比較例2之感光性著色組合物獲得之間隔物圖案,將所達到之荷重由100 mN變更為200 mN,除此以外,藉由與上文所述同樣之順序及條件獲得荷重-位移曲線,算出彈性恢復率。將結果示於表6。Regarding the spacer pattern obtained using the photosensitive coloring composition of Examples 1, 6 to 9, and Comparative Example 2, the load reached was changed from 100 mN to 200 mN. Load and displacement curves were obtained in the order and conditions, and the elastic recovery rate was calculated. The results are shown in Table 6.

[表6] [TABLE 6]

於表3中,根據實施例1~5與比較例1之比較可知,藉由使用全部著色劑中之橙色顏料之含有比率為45質量%以上之感光性著色組合物,波長400~500 nm之平均透過率變得充分低。認為其原因在於:藉由將全部著色劑中之橙色顏料之含有比率設為上述下限值以上,於藍色層中不被吸收而透過之波長400~500 nm之光被橙色顏料充分地遮蔽。 又,同樣地,根據實施例1~5與比較例1之比較可知,藉由使xy色度圖中之色度座標(x,y)滿足0.40≦x≦0.55、且0.35≦y≦0.50,波長400~500 nm之平均透過率變得充分低。認為其原因在於:藉由將色度座標(x,y)設為上述範圍內,即設為所呈現之顏色接近橙色之著色劑之調配構成,而可藉由著色劑充分地遮蔽於藍色層中不被吸收而透過之波長400~500 nm之光。In Table 3, according to the comparison between Examples 1 to 5 and Comparative Example 1, it can be seen that by using a photosensitive coloring composition having a content ratio of an orange pigment in all the colorants of 45% by mass or more, a wavelength of 400 to 500 nm The average transmittance becomes sufficiently low. It is considered that the reason is that by setting the content ratio of the orange pigment in all colorants to the above lower limit value, the light having a wavelength of 400 to 500 nm which is not absorbed in the blue layer and is transmitted is sufficiently blocked by the orange pigment. . In the same manner, according to the comparison between Examples 1 to 5 and Comparative Example 1, it can be seen that the chromaticity coordinates (x, y) in the xy chromaticity diagram satisfy 0.40 ≦ x ≦ 0.55 and 0.35 ≦ y ≦ 0.50. The average transmittance at a wavelength of 400 to 500 nm becomes sufficiently low. The reason is considered that by setting the chromaticity coordinates (x, y) within the above range, that is, by setting a coloring agent whose color is close to orange, the colorant can be sufficiently shielded from blue Light having a wavelength of 400 to 500 nm which is not absorbed in the layer and transmitted.

進而,根據實施例1~5與比較例1之比較可知,於使用全部著色劑中之橙色顏料之含有比率為45質量%以上之感光性著色組合物之情形時,色調於實用上亦充分。其原因在於:藉由對藍色層之色調添加著色層之色調,而成為均勻且接近黑色之色調。 又,根據實施例2及3與實施例4之比較可知,全部著色劑中之藍色顏料及紫色顏料之含有比率越少,色調越良好。其原因亦在於對藍色層之色調添加著色層之色調。Furthermore, according to the comparison between Examples 1 to 5 and Comparative Example 1, it can be seen that when a photosensitive coloring composition having a content ratio of orange pigment in all the colorants of 45% by mass or more is used, the color tone is also practically sufficient. The reason is that by adding the tint of the colored layer to the tint of the blue layer, it becomes a uniform and nearly black tint. It is also known from the comparison between Examples 2 and 3 and Example 4 that the smaller the content ratio of the blue pigment and the purple pigment in all the colorants, the better the color tone. The reason is also to add the tint of the colored layer to the tint of the blue layer.

於表4中,根據實施例6~9與比較例2之比較可知,藉由將感光性著色組合物之總固形物成分中之著色劑之含有比率設為23質量%以下,著色間隔物之機械特性變得良好。認為藉由將總固形物成分中之著色劑之含有比率設為23質量%以下,即避免不進行彈性變形之著色劑之含有比率變得過高,而可抑制對著色間隔物施加荷重時之塑性變形,彈性恢復率變得良好。又,根據實施例6~9之比較可知,不論總固形物成分中之著色劑之含有比率如何,藉由將全部著色劑中之橙色顏料之含有比率設為45質量%以上,可充分地降低波長400~500 nm之平均透過率。In Table 4, it can be seen from the comparison between Examples 6 to 9 and Comparative Example 2 that by setting the content ratio of the coloring agent in the total solid content of the photosensitive coloring composition to 23% by mass or less, The mechanical characteristics become good. It is considered that by setting the content ratio of the coloring agent in the total solids content to 23% by mass or less, the content ratio of the coloring agent that is not elastically deformed is prevented from becoming too high, and it is possible to suppress the effect of applying a load on the colored spacer. Plastic deformation and elastic recovery become good. In addition, it can be seen from the comparison of Examples 6 to 9 that regardless of the content ratio of the coloring agent in the total solid content, the content of the orange pigment in the entire colorant can be sufficiently reduced by setting the content ratio of the orange pigment to 45% by mass or more. The average transmittance at a wavelength of 400 to 500 nm.

進而,根據表3之實施例1~5與表5之實施例10及11可知,不論橙色顏料以外所含之著色劑之種類如何,藉由將著色劑中之橙色顏料之含有比率設為45質量%以上,波長400~500 nm之平均透過率變得充分低。又,可知不論橙色顏料以外所含之著色劑之種類如何,藉由將感光性著色組合物之總固形物成分中之著色劑之含有比率設為23質量%以下,著色間隔物之機械特性變得良好。Furthermore, according to Examples 1 to 5 of Table 3 and Examples 10 and 11 of Table 5, it can be seen that regardless of the type of the colorant contained in the orange pigment, the content ratio of the orange pigment in the colorant is set to 45. At mass% or more, the average transmittance at a wavelength of 400 to 500 nm becomes sufficiently low. In addition, it can be seen that regardless of the type of the coloring agent contained other than the orange pigment, the mechanical characteristics of the colored spacer are changed by setting the content ratio of the coloring agent in the total solid content of the photosensitive coloring composition to 23% by mass or less. Well.

進而,根據表3之實施例1與表5之實施例12之比較可知,不論橙色顏料之種類如何,藉由將著色劑中之橙色顏料之含有比率設為45質量%以上,波長400~500 nm之平均透過率可充分降低。又,可知不論橙色顏料之種類如何,藉由將感光性著色組合物之總固形物成分中之著色劑之含有比率設為23質量%以下,著色間隔物之機械特性變得良好。Furthermore, according to a comparison between Example 1 in Table 3 and Example 12 in Table 5, it can be seen that regardless of the type of the orange pigment, the content ratio of the orange pigment in the colorant is set to 45% by mass or more, and the wavelength is 400 to 500. The average transmittance of nm can be sufficiently reduced. It was also found that regardless of the type of the orange pigment, by setting the content ratio of the coloring agent in the total solid content of the photosensitive coloring composition to 23% by mass or less, the mechanical properties of the coloring spacer are improved.

圖1係用於色度測定及色調評價之光源之發光光譜。Figure 1 shows the emission spectrum of a light source used for chromaticity measurement and hue evaluation.

Claims (11)

一種感光性著色組合物,其特徵在於:其係含有(a)著色劑、(b)鹼可溶性樹脂、(c)光聚合起始劑、及(d)乙烯性不飽和化合物者, 於感光性著色組合物之總固形物成分中,上述(a)著色劑之含有比率為23質量%以下, 上述(a)著色劑含有橙色顏料,且 上述(a)著色劑中之上述橙色顏料之含有比率為45質量%以上。A photosensitive coloring composition, characterized in that it contains (a) a colorant, (b) an alkali-soluble resin, (c) a photopolymerization initiator, and (d) an ethylenically unsaturated compound. In the total solid content of the coloring composition, the content ratio of the (a) colorant is 23% by mass or less, the colorant of the (a) colorant contains an orange pigment, and the content ratio of the orange pigment in the (a) colorant. It is 45% by mass or more. 如請求項1之感光性著色組合物,其中上述橙色顏料含有選自由C.I.顏料橙13、C.I.顏料橙43、C.I.顏料橙64、及C.I.顏料橙72所組成之群中之至少1種。The photosensitive coloring composition according to claim 1, wherein the orange pigment contains at least one selected from the group consisting of C.I. pigment orange 13, C.I. pigment orange 43, C.I. pigment orange 64, and C.I. pigment orange 72. 如請求項1或2之感光性著色組合物,其中上述(a)著色劑中之藍色顏料及紫色顏料之含有比率為50質量%以下。The photosensitive coloring composition according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the content ratio of the blue pigment and the purple pigment in the (a) colorant is 50% by mass or less. 如請求項1至3中任一項之感光性著色組合物,其中上述(a)著色劑進而含有黃色顏料。The photosensitive coloring composition according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein the (a) colorant further contains a yellow pigment. 如請求項4之感光性著色組合物,其中上述黃色顏料含有選自由C.I.顏料黃138、C.I.顏料黃139、及C.I.顏料黃150所組成之群中之至少1種。The photosensitive coloring composition according to claim 4, wherein the yellow pigment contains at least one selected from the group consisting of C.I. Pigment Yellow 138, C.I. Pigment Yellow 139, and C.I. Pigment Yellow 150. 如請求項1至5中任一項之感光性著色組合物,其中於感光性著色組合物之總固形物成分中,上述(a)著色劑之含有比率為1質量%以上。The photosensitive coloring composition according to any one of claims 1 to 5, wherein the content ratio of the (a) colorant in the total solid content of the photosensitive coloring composition is 1% by mass or more. 如請求項1至6中任一項之感光性著色組合物,其係用於形成著色間隔物。The photosensitive coloring composition according to any one of claims 1 to 6, which is used to form a colored spacer. 一種感光性著色組合物,其特徵在於:其係含有(a)著色劑、(b)鹼可溶性樹脂、(c)光聚合起始劑、及(d)乙烯性不飽和化合物者, 上述感光性著色組合物係用於形成著色間隔物, 於感光性著色組合物之總固形物成分中,上述(a)著色劑之含有比率為23質量%以下,且 xy色度圖中之色度座標(x,y)滿足0.40≦x≦0.55且0.35≦y≦0.50。A photosensitive coloring composition, characterized in that it contains (a) a colorant, (b) an alkali-soluble resin, (c) a photopolymerization initiator, and (d) an ethylenically unsaturated compound. The coloring composition is used to form a colored spacer. In the total solid content of the photosensitive coloring composition, the content ratio of the (a) colorant is 23% by mass or less, and the chromaticity coordinates in the xy chromaticity diagram ( x, y) satisfy 0.40 ≦ x ≦ 0.55 and 0.35 ≦ y ≦ 0.50. 一種硬化物,其係使如請求項1至8中任一項之感光性著色組合物硬化而獲得者。A cured product obtained by curing the photosensitive coloring composition according to any one of claims 1 to 8. 一種著色間隔物,其包含如請求項9之硬化物。A colored spacer comprising a hardened body as claimed in claim 9. 一種圖像顯示裝置,其具備如請求項10之著色間隔物。An image display device including the colored spacer as claimed in claim 10.
TW107122683A 2017-06-30 2018-06-29 Photosensitive colored composition, cured product, colored spacer, and image display device TWI768074B (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2017129366 2017-06-30
JP2017-129366 2017-06-30

Publications (2)

Publication Number Publication Date
TW201905592A true TW201905592A (en) 2019-02-01
TWI768074B TWI768074B (en) 2022-06-21

Family

ID=64741995

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
TW107122683A TWI768074B (en) 2017-06-30 2018-06-29 Photosensitive colored composition, cured product, colored spacer, and image display device

Country Status (5)

Country Link
JP (1) JP7351221B2 (en)
KR (1) KR102582198B1 (en)
CN (1) CN110785706A (en)
TW (1) TWI768074B (en)
WO (1) WO2019004427A1 (en)

Family Cites Families (11)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2009041312A1 (en) * 2007-09-27 2009-04-02 Sakata Inx Corp. Pigment dispersion assistant, pigment dispersion containing the same, and use of the pigment dispersion
JP5235582B2 (en) * 2008-09-30 2013-07-10 富士フイルム株式会社 Colored curable composition, color filter, method for producing the same, and solid-state imaging device
JP2010223987A (en) * 2009-03-19 2010-10-07 Dnp Fine Chemicals Co Ltd Red composition for color filter and color filter having the same
KR101266295B1 (en) 2009-09-09 2013-05-23 제일모직주식회사 Black photosensitive resin composition and black matrix manufactured by using the same
KR101799492B1 (en) 2011-08-04 2017-11-21 엘지디스플레이 주식회사 Liquid crystal display device
KR102078989B1 (en) * 2012-01-31 2020-02-19 미쯔비시 케미컬 주식회사 Colored photosensitive composition, black photo spacer, and color filter
KR101973750B1 (en) 2013-03-29 2019-09-03 엘지디스플레이 주식회사 Thin film transistor liquid crystal display device
JP6147143B2 (en) * 2013-08-28 2017-06-14 富士フイルム株式会社 Colored photosensitive resin composition, cured film, color filter, method for producing color filter, solid-state imaging device, and image display device
JP6131168B2 (en) * 2013-10-21 2017-05-17 富士フイルム株式会社 Red photosensitive resin composition, cured film, color filter, method for producing color filter, solid-state imaging device, and image display device
KR102491215B1 (en) * 2015-03-11 2023-01-20 미쯔비시 케미컬 주식회사 Photosensitive coloring composition for forming colored spacer, cured product, colored spacer, and image display device
KR20170017447A (en) 2015-08-07 2017-02-15 엘지디스플레이 주식회사 Liquid Crystal Display Device and Method of manufacturing the same

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
KR20200023297A (en) 2020-03-04
TWI768074B (en) 2022-06-21
JPWO2019004427A1 (en) 2020-04-30
WO2019004427A1 (en) 2019-01-03
KR102582198B1 (en) 2023-09-22
CN110785706A (en) 2020-02-11
JP7351221B2 (en) 2023-09-27

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
JP6361838B2 (en) Photosensitive coloring composition, cured product, black matrix, coloring spacer, and image display device
TWI753056B (en) Colored photosensitive resin composition, pigment dispersion, bank, organic electroluminescent element, image display device and lighting
TWI776205B (en) Photosensitive colored composition
TWI711882B (en) Photosensitive coloring composition, cured product, coloring spacer, image display device
TWI759427B (en) Photosensitive colored composition, cured product, colored spacer, image display device
TWI794156B (en) Photosensitive coloring composition for forming colored spacer, cured product, colored spacer, image display device
TW201818152A (en) Photosensitive resin composition, cured product and image display device
JP2022078139A (en) Photosensitive coloring composition, cured material, coloring spacer, image display device
JP2019015966A (en) Photosensitive coloring composition, cured product, colored spacer, and image display device
TWI829830B (en) Photosensitive coloring composition, hardened material, coloring spacer, and image display device
TWI768074B (en) Photosensitive colored composition, cured product, colored spacer, and image display device
JP2019164335A (en) Photosensitive coloring composition, cured product, coloration spacer, and image display device
JP2019144407A (en) Photosensitive colored composition, cured product, colored spacer and image display device